Mercurial > vim
annotate runtime/doc/eval.txt @ 4845:a83fb2bd8c8e v7.3.1169
updated for version 7.3.1169
Problem: New regexp engine: some work is done while executing a pattern,
even though the result is predictable.
Solution: Do the work while compiling the pattern.
| author | Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org> |
|---|---|
| date | Tue, 11 Jun 2013 22:44:09 +0200 |
| parents | 4db0bf9f1b44 |
| children | a5352e73dc00 |
| rev | line source |
|---|---|
|
4502
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4437
diff
changeset
|
1 *eval.txt* For Vim version 7.3. Last change: 2013 May 21 |
| 1621 | 2 |
| 3 | |
| 4 VIM REFERENCE MANUAL by Bram Moolenaar | |
| 7 | 5 |
| 6 | |
| 7 Expression evaluation *expression* *expr* *E15* *eval* | |
| 8 | |
| 9 Using expressions is introduced in chapter 41 of the user manual |usr_41.txt|. | |
| 10 | |
| 11 Note: Expression evaluation can be disabled at compile time. If this has been | |
| 1621 | 12 done, the features in this document are not available. See |+eval| and |
| 99 | 13 |no-eval-feature|. |
| 7 | 14 |
| 85 | 15 1. Variables |variables| |
| 16 1.1 Variable types | |
| 87 | 17 1.2 Function references |Funcref| |
| 161 | 18 1.3 Lists |Lists| |
| 99 | 19 1.4 Dictionaries |Dictionaries| |
| 20 1.5 More about variables |more-variables| | |
| 85 | 21 2. Expression syntax |expression-syntax| |
| 22 3. Internal variable |internal-variables| | |
| 23 4. Builtin Functions |functions| | |
| 24 5. Defining functions |user-functions| | |
| 25 6. Curly braces names |curly-braces-names| | |
| 26 7. Commands |expression-commands| | |
| 27 8. Exception handling |exception-handling| | |
| 28 9. Examples |eval-examples| | |
| 29 10. No +eval feature |no-eval-feature| | |
| 30 11. The sandbox |eval-sandbox| | |
| 634 | 31 12. Textlock |textlock| |
| 7 | 32 |
| 33 {Vi does not have any of these commands} | |
| 34 | |
| 35 ============================================================================== | |
| 36 1. Variables *variables* | |
| 37 | |
| 85 | 38 1.1 Variable types ~ |
| 114 | 39 *E712* |
| 1621 | 40 There are six types of variables: |
| 41 | |
| 3082 | 42 Number A 32 or 64 bit signed number. |expr-number| *Number* |
| 99 | 43 Examples: -123 0x10 0177 |
| 44 | |
| 1621 | 45 Float A floating point number. |floating-point-format| *Float* |
| 46 {only when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 47 Examples: 123.456 1.15e-6 -1.1e3 | |
| 48 | |
| 99 | 49 String A NUL terminated string of 8-bit unsigned characters (bytes). |
| 1621 | 50 |expr-string| Examples: "ab\txx\"--" 'x-z''a,c' |
| 99 | 51 |
| 52 Funcref A reference to a function |Funcref|. | |
| 53 Example: function("strlen") | |
| 54 | |
| 55 List An ordered sequence of items |List|. | |
| 56 Example: [1, 2, ['a', 'b']] | |
| 55 | 57 |
| 370 | 58 Dictionary An associative, unordered array: Each entry has a key and a |
| 59 value. |Dictionary| | |
| 60 Example: {'blue': "#0000ff", 'red': "#ff0000"} | |
| 61 | |
| 55 | 62 The Number and String types are converted automatically, depending on how they |
| 63 are used. | |
| 7 | 64 |
| 65 Conversion from a Number to a String is by making the ASCII representation of | |
| 2581 | 66 the Number. Examples: |
| 67 Number 123 --> String "123" ~ | |
| 68 Number 0 --> String "0" ~ | |
| 69 Number -1 --> String "-1" ~ | |
| 2152 | 70 *octal* |
| 7 | 71 Conversion from a String to a Number is done by converting the first digits |
| 72 to a number. Hexadecimal "0xf9" and Octal "017" numbers are recognized. If | |
| 2581 | 73 the String doesn't start with digits, the result is zero. Examples: |
| 74 String "456" --> Number 456 ~ | |
| 75 String "6bar" --> Number 6 ~ | |
| 76 String "foo" --> Number 0 ~ | |
| 77 String "0xf1" --> Number 241 ~ | |
| 78 String "0100" --> Number 64 ~ | |
| 79 String "-8" --> Number -8 ~ | |
| 80 String "+8" --> Number 0 ~ | |
| 7 | 81 |
| 82 To force conversion from String to Number, add zero to it: > | |
| 83 :echo "0100" + 0 | |
| 782 | 84 < 64 ~ |
| 85 | |
| 86 To avoid a leading zero to cause octal conversion, or for using a different | |
| 87 base, use |str2nr()|. | |
| 7 | 88 |
| 89 For boolean operators Numbers are used. Zero is FALSE, non-zero is TRUE. | |
| 90 | |
| 91 Note that in the command > | |
| 92 :if "foo" | |
| 93 "foo" is converted to 0, which means FALSE. To test for a non-empty string, | |
| 3893 | 94 use empty(): > |
| 95 :if !empty("foo") | |
| 153 | 96 < *E745* *E728* *E703* *E729* *E730* *E731* |
| 97 List, Dictionary and Funcref types are not automatically converted. | |
| 85 | 98 |
| 1621 | 99 *E805* *E806* *E808* |
| 100 When mixing Number and Float the Number is converted to Float. Otherwise | |
| 101 there is no automatic conversion of Float. You can use str2float() for String | |
| 102 to Float, printf() for Float to String and float2nr() for Float to Number. | |
| 103 | |
| 104 *E706* *sticky-type-checking* | |
| 85 | 105 You will get an error if you try to change the type of a variable. You need |
| 106 to |:unlet| it first to avoid this error. String and Number are considered | |
| 1621 | 107 equivalent though, as well are Float and Number. Consider this sequence of |
| 108 commands: > | |
| 85 | 109 :let l = "string" |
| 87 | 110 :let l = 44 " changes type from String to Number |
| 1621 | 111 :let l = [1, 2, 3] " error! l is still a Number |
| 112 :let l = 4.4 " changes type from Number to Float | |
| 113 :let l = "string" " error! | |
| 85 | 114 |
| 115 | |
| 87 | 116 1.2 Function references ~ |
| 153 | 117 *Funcref* *E695* *E718* |
| 1621 | 118 A Funcref variable is obtained with the |function()| function. It can be used |
| 114 | 119 in an expression in the place of a function name, before the parenthesis |
| 120 around the arguments, to invoke the function it refers to. Example: > | |
| 55 | 121 |
| 122 :let Fn = function("MyFunc") | |
| 123 :echo Fn() | |
| 114 | 124 < *E704* *E705* *E707* |
| 819 | 125 A Funcref variable must start with a capital, "s:", "w:", "t:" or "b:". You |
| 126 cannot have both a Funcref variable and a function with the same name. | |
| 85 | 127 |
| 114 | 128 A special case is defining a function and directly assigning its Funcref to a |
| 129 Dictionary entry. Example: > | |
| 130 :function dict.init() dict | |
| 131 : let self.val = 0 | |
| 132 :endfunction | |
| 133 | |
| 134 The key of the Dictionary can start with a lower case letter. The actual | |
| 135 function name is not used here. Also see |numbered-function|. | |
| 136 | |
| 137 A Funcref can also be used with the |:call| command: > | |
| 138 :call Fn() | |
| 139 :call dict.init() | |
| 85 | 140 |
| 141 The name of the referenced function can be obtained with |string()|. > | |
| 119 | 142 :let func = string(Fn) |
| 85 | 143 |
| 144 You can use |call()| to invoke a Funcref and use a list variable for the | |
| 145 arguments: > | |
| 119 | 146 :let r = call(Fn, mylist) |
| 85 | 147 |
| 148 | |
| 87 | 149 1.3 Lists ~ |
| 161 | 150 *List* *Lists* *E686* |
| 55 | 151 A List is an ordered sequence of items. An item can be of any type. Items |
| 1621 | 152 can be accessed by their index number. Items can be added and removed at any |
| 55 | 153 position in the sequence. |
| 154 | |
| 85 | 155 |
| 156 List creation ~ | |
| 157 *E696* *E697* | |
| 55 | 158 A List is created with a comma separated list of items in square brackets. |
| 85 | 159 Examples: > |
| 160 :let mylist = [1, two, 3, "four"] | |
| 161 :let emptylist = [] | |
| 55 | 162 |
| 1621 | 163 An item can be any expression. Using a List for an item creates a |
| 842 | 164 List of Lists: > |
| 85 | 165 :let nestlist = [[11, 12], [21, 22], [31, 32]] |
| 55 | 166 |
| 167 An extra comma after the last item is ignored. | |
| 168 | |
| 85 | 169 |
| 170 List index ~ | |
| 171 *list-index* *E684* | |
| 55 | 172 An item in the List can be accessed by putting the index in square brackets |
| 85 | 173 after the List. Indexes are zero-based, thus the first item has index zero. > |
| 174 :let item = mylist[0] " get the first item: 1 | |
| 55 | 175 :let item = mylist[2] " get the third item: 3 |
| 85 | 176 |
| 87 | 177 When the resulting item is a list this can be repeated: > |
| 85 | 178 :let item = nestlist[0][1] " get the first list, second item: 12 |
| 55 | 179 < |
| 85 | 180 A negative index is counted from the end. Index -1 refers to the last item in |
| 181 the List, -2 to the last but one item, etc. > | |
| 55 | 182 :let last = mylist[-1] " get the last item: "four" |
| 183 | |
| 85 | 184 To avoid an error for an invalid index use the |get()| function. When an item |
| 87 | 185 is not available it returns zero or the default value you specify: > |
| 85 | 186 :echo get(mylist, idx) |
| 187 :echo get(mylist, idx, "NONE") | |
| 188 | |
| 189 | |
| 190 List concatenation ~ | |
| 191 | |
| 192 Two lists can be concatenated with the "+" operator: > | |
| 193 :let longlist = mylist + [5, 6] | |
| 119 | 194 :let mylist += [7, 8] |
| 85 | 195 |
| 196 To prepend or append an item turn the item into a list by putting [] around | |
| 197 it. To change a list in-place see |list-modification| below. | |
| 198 | |
| 199 | |
| 200 Sublist ~ | |
| 201 | |
| 55 | 202 A part of the List can be obtained by specifying the first and last index, |
| 203 separated by a colon in square brackets: > | |
| 85 | 204 :let shortlist = mylist[2:-1] " get List [3, "four"] |
| 55 | 205 |
| 206 Omitting the first index is similar to zero. Omitting the last index is | |
| 1156 | 207 similar to -1. > |
| 90 | 208 :let endlist = mylist[2:] " from item 2 to the end: [3, "four"] |
| 209 :let shortlist = mylist[2:2] " List with one item: [3] | |
| 210 :let otherlist = mylist[:] " make a copy of the List | |
| 85 | 211 |
| 842 | 212 If the first index is beyond the last item of the List or the second item is |
| 213 before the first item, the result is an empty list. There is no error | |
| 214 message. | |
| 215 | |
| 216 If the second index is equal to or greater than the length of the list the | |
| 217 length minus one is used: > | |
| 829 | 218 :let mylist = [0, 1, 2, 3] |
| 219 :echo mylist[2:8] " result: [2, 3] | |
| 220 | |
| 270 | 221 NOTE: mylist[s:e] means using the variable "s:e" as index. Watch out for |
| 1621 | 222 using a single letter variable before the ":". Insert a space when needed: |
| 270 | 223 mylist[s : e]. |
| 224 | |
| 85 | 225 |
| 226 List identity ~ | |
| 99 | 227 *list-identity* |
| 85 | 228 When variable "aa" is a list and you assign it to another variable "bb", both |
| 229 variables refer to the same list. Thus changing the list "aa" will also | |
| 230 change "bb": > | |
| 231 :let aa = [1, 2, 3] | |
| 232 :let bb = aa | |
| 233 :call add(aa, 4) | |
| 234 :echo bb | |
| 114 | 235 < [1, 2, 3, 4] |
| 85 | 236 |
| 237 Making a copy of a list is done with the |copy()| function. Using [:] also | |
| 238 works, as explained above. This creates a shallow copy of the list: Changing | |
| 87 | 239 a list item in the list will also change the item in the copied list: > |
| 85 | 240 :let aa = [[1, 'a'], 2, 3] |
| 241 :let bb = copy(aa) | |
| 114 | 242 :call add(aa, 4) |
| 85 | 243 :let aa[0][1] = 'aaa' |
| 244 :echo aa | |
| 114 | 245 < [[1, aaa], 2, 3, 4] > |
| 85 | 246 :echo bb |
| 114 | 247 < [[1, aaa], 2, 3] |
| 85 | 248 |
| 87 | 249 To make a completely independent list use |deepcopy()|. This also makes a |
| 114 | 250 copy of the values in the list, recursively. Up to a hundred levels deep. |
| 85 | 251 |
| 252 The operator "is" can be used to check if two variables refer to the same | |
| 114 | 253 List. "isnot" does the opposite. In contrast "==" compares if two lists have |
| 87 | 254 the same value. > |
| 255 :let alist = [1, 2, 3] | |
| 256 :let blist = [1, 2, 3] | |
| 257 :echo alist is blist | |
| 114 | 258 < 0 > |
| 87 | 259 :echo alist == blist |
| 114 | 260 < 1 |
| 85 | 261 |
| 323 | 262 Note about comparing lists: Two lists are considered equal if they have the |
| 263 same length and all items compare equal, as with using "==". There is one | |
| 388 | 264 exception: When comparing a number with a string they are considered |
| 265 different. There is no automatic type conversion, as with using "==" on | |
| 266 variables. Example: > | |
| 267 echo 4 == "4" | |
| 323 | 268 < 1 > |
| 388 | 269 echo [4] == ["4"] |
| 323 | 270 < 0 |
| 271 | |
| 388 | 272 Thus comparing Lists is more strict than comparing numbers and strings. You |
| 1621 | 273 can compare simple values this way too by putting them in a list: > |
| 388 | 274 |
| 275 :let a = 5 | |
| 276 :let b = "5" | |
| 1621 | 277 :echo a == b |
| 388 | 278 < 1 > |
| 1621 | 279 :echo [a] == [b] |
| 388 | 280 < 0 |
| 323 | 281 |
| 85 | 282 |
| 283 List unpack ~ | |
| 284 | |
| 285 To unpack the items in a list to individual variables, put the variables in | |
| 286 square brackets, like list items: > | |
| 287 :let [var1, var2] = mylist | |
| 288 | |
| 289 When the number of variables does not match the number of items in the list | |
| 290 this produces an error. To handle any extra items from the list append ";" | |
| 291 and a variable name: > | |
| 292 :let [var1, var2; rest] = mylist | |
| 293 | |
| 294 This works like: > | |
| 295 :let var1 = mylist[0] | |
| 296 :let var2 = mylist[1] | |
| 95 | 297 :let rest = mylist[2:] |
| 85 | 298 |
| 299 Except that there is no error if there are only two items. "rest" will be an | |
| 300 empty list then. | |
| 301 | |
| 302 | |
| 303 List modification ~ | |
| 304 *list-modification* | |
| 87 | 305 To change a specific item of a list use |:let| this way: > |
| 85 | 306 :let list[4] = "four" |
| 307 :let listlist[0][3] = item | |
| 308 | |
| 87 | 309 To change part of a list you can specify the first and last item to be |
| 114 | 310 modified. The value must at least have the number of items in the range: > |
| 87 | 311 :let list[3:5] = [3, 4, 5] |
| 312 | |
| 85 | 313 Adding and removing items from a list is done with functions. Here are a few |
| 314 examples: > | |
| 315 :call insert(list, 'a') " prepend item 'a' | |
| 316 :call insert(list, 'a', 3) " insert item 'a' before list[3] | |
| 317 :call add(list, "new") " append String item | |
| 114 | 318 :call add(list, [1, 2]) " append a List as one new item |
| 85 | 319 :call extend(list, [1, 2]) " extend the list with two more items |
| 320 :let i = remove(list, 3) " remove item 3 | |
| 108 | 321 :unlet list[3] " idem |
| 85 | 322 :let l = remove(list, 3, -1) " remove items 3 to last item |
| 108 | 323 :unlet list[3 : ] " idem |
| 114 | 324 :call filter(list, 'v:val !~ "x"') " remove items with an 'x' |
| 325 | |
| 326 Changing the order of items in a list: > | |
| 87 | 327 :call sort(list) " sort a list alphabetically |
| 328 :call reverse(list) " reverse the order of items | |
| 329 | |
| 85 | 330 |
| 331 For loop ~ | |
| 332 | |
| 87 | 333 The |:for| loop executes commands for each item in a list. A variable is set |
| 334 to each item in the list in sequence. Example: > | |
| 114 | 335 :for item in mylist |
| 336 : call Doit(item) | |
| 85 | 337 :endfor |
| 338 | |
| 339 This works like: > | |
| 340 :let index = 0 | |
| 341 :while index < len(mylist) | |
| 114 | 342 : let item = mylist[index] |
| 343 : :call Doit(item) | |
| 85 | 344 : let index = index + 1 |
| 345 :endwhile | |
| 346 | |
| 347 Note that all items in the list should be of the same type, otherwise this | |
| 114 | 348 results in error |E706|. To avoid this |:unlet| the variable at the end of |
| 87 | 349 the loop. |
| 85 | 350 |
| 95 | 351 If all you want to do is modify each item in the list then the |map()| |
| 114 | 352 function will be a simpler method than a for loop. |
| 95 | 353 |
| 1621 | 354 Just like the |:let| command, |:for| also accepts a list of variables. This |
| 85 | 355 requires the argument to be a list of lists. > |
| 356 :for [lnum, col] in [[1, 3], [2, 8], [3, 0]] | |
| 357 : call Doit(lnum, col) | |
| 358 :endfor | |
| 359 | |
| 360 This works like a |:let| command is done for each list item. Again, the types | |
| 361 must remain the same to avoid an error. | |
| 362 | |
| 114 | 363 It is also possible to put remaining items in a List variable: > |
| 85 | 364 :for [i, j; rest] in listlist |
| 365 : call Doit(i, j) | |
| 366 : if !empty(rest) | |
| 367 : echo "remainder: " . string(rest) | |
| 368 : endif | |
| 369 :endfor | |
| 370 | |
| 371 | |
| 372 List functions ~ | |
| 114 | 373 *E714* |
| 85 | 374 Functions that are useful with a List: > |
| 87 | 375 :let r = call(funcname, list) " call a function with an argument list |
| 85 | 376 :if empty(list) " check if list is empty |
| 102 | 377 :let l = len(list) " number of items in list |
| 378 :let big = max(list) " maximum value in list | |
| 379 :let small = min(list) " minimum value in list | |
| 87 | 380 :let xs = count(list, 'x') " count nr of times 'x' appears in list |
| 381 :let i = index(list, 'x') " index of first 'x' in list | |
| 85 | 382 :let lines = getline(1, 10) " get ten text lines from buffer |
| 383 :call append('$', lines) " append text lines in buffer | |
| 95 | 384 :let list = split("a b c") " create list from items in a string |
| 385 :let string = join(list, ', ') " create string from list items | |
| 102 | 386 :let s = string(list) " String representation of list |
| 387 :call map(list, '">> " . v:val') " prepend ">> " to each item | |
| 99 | 388 |
| 258 | 389 Don't forget that a combination of features can make things simple. For |
| 390 example, to add up all the numbers in a list: > | |
| 391 :exe 'let sum = ' . join(nrlist, '+') | |
| 392 | |
| 99 | 393 |
| 394 1.4 Dictionaries ~ | |
| 114 | 395 *Dictionaries* *Dictionary* |
| 99 | 396 A Dictionary is an associative array: Each entry has a key and a value. The |
| 114 | 397 entry can be located with the key. The entries are stored without a specific |
| 398 ordering. | |
| 99 | 399 |
| 400 | |
| 401 Dictionary creation ~ | |
| 114 | 402 *E720* *E721* *E722* *E723* |
| 99 | 403 A Dictionary is created with a comma separated list of entries in curly |
| 114 | 404 braces. Each entry has a key and a value, separated by a colon. Each key can |
| 405 only appear once. Examples: > | |
| 99 | 406 :let mydict = {1: 'one', 2: 'two', 3: 'three'} |
| 407 :let emptydict = {} | |
| 114 | 408 < *E713* *E716* *E717* |
| 99 | 409 A key is always a String. You can use a Number, it will be converted to a |
| 410 String automatically. Thus the String '4' and the number 4 will find the same | |
| 1621 | 411 entry. Note that the String '04' and the Number 04 are different, since the |
| 114 | 412 Number will be converted to the String '4'. |
| 413 | |
| 1621 | 414 A value can be any expression. Using a Dictionary for a value creates a |
| 99 | 415 nested Dictionary: > |
| 416 :let nestdict = {1: {11: 'a', 12: 'b'}, 2: {21: 'c'}} | |
| 417 | |
| 418 An extra comma after the last entry is ignored. | |
| 419 | |
| 420 | |
| 421 Accessing entries ~ | |
| 422 | |
| 423 The normal way to access an entry is by putting the key in square brackets: > | |
| 424 :let val = mydict["one"] | |
| 425 :let mydict["four"] = 4 | |
| 426 | |
| 114 | 427 You can add new entries to an existing Dictionary this way, unlike Lists. |
| 99 | 428 |
| 429 For keys that consist entirely of letters, digits and underscore the following | |
| 430 form can be used |expr-entry|: > | |
| 431 :let val = mydict.one | |
| 432 :let mydict.four = 4 | |
| 433 | |
| 434 Since an entry can be any type, also a List and a Dictionary, the indexing and | |
| 435 key lookup can be repeated: > | |
| 114 | 436 :echo dict.key[idx].key |
| 99 | 437 |
| 438 | |
| 439 Dictionary to List conversion ~ | |
| 440 | |
| 1621 | 441 You may want to loop over the entries in a dictionary. For this you need to |
| 99 | 442 turn the Dictionary into a List and pass it to |:for|. |
| 443 | |
| 444 Most often you want to loop over the keys, using the |keys()| function: > | |
| 445 :for key in keys(mydict) | |
| 446 : echo key . ': ' . mydict[key] | |
| 447 :endfor | |
| 448 | |
| 449 The List of keys is unsorted. You may want to sort them first: > | |
| 450 :for key in sort(keys(mydict)) | |
| 451 | |
| 452 To loop over the values use the |values()| function: > | |
| 453 :for v in values(mydict) | |
| 454 : echo "value: " . v | |
| 455 :endfor | |
| 456 | |
| 457 If you want both the key and the value use the |items()| function. It returns | |
| 1621 | 458 a List in which each item is a List with two items, the key and the value: > |
| 1156 | 459 :for [key, value] in items(mydict) |
| 460 : echo key . ': ' . value | |
| 99 | 461 :endfor |
| 462 | |
| 463 | |
| 464 Dictionary identity ~ | |
| 161 | 465 *dict-identity* |
| 99 | 466 Just like Lists you need to use |copy()| and |deepcopy()| to make a copy of a |
| 467 Dictionary. Otherwise, assignment results in referring to the same | |
| 468 Dictionary: > | |
| 469 :let onedict = {'a': 1, 'b': 2} | |
| 470 :let adict = onedict | |
| 471 :let adict['a'] = 11 | |
| 472 :echo onedict['a'] | |
| 473 11 | |
| 474 | |
| 327 | 475 Two Dictionaries compare equal if all the key-value pairs compare equal. For |
| 476 more info see |list-identity|. | |
| 99 | 477 |
| 478 | |
| 479 Dictionary modification ~ | |
| 480 *dict-modification* | |
| 481 To change an already existing entry of a Dictionary, or to add a new entry, | |
| 482 use |:let| this way: > | |
| 483 :let dict[4] = "four" | |
| 484 :let dict['one'] = item | |
| 485 | |
| 108 | 486 Removing an entry from a Dictionary is done with |remove()| or |:unlet|. |
| 487 Three ways to remove the entry with key "aaa" from dict: > | |
| 488 :let i = remove(dict, 'aaa') | |
| 489 :unlet dict.aaa | |
| 490 :unlet dict['aaa'] | |
| 99 | 491 |
| 492 Merging a Dictionary with another is done with |extend()|: > | |
| 114 | 493 :call extend(adict, bdict) |
| 494 This extends adict with all entries from bdict. Duplicate keys cause entries | |
| 495 in adict to be overwritten. An optional third argument can change this. | |
| 119 | 496 Note that the order of entries in a Dictionary is irrelevant, thus don't |
| 497 expect ":echo adict" to show the items from bdict after the older entries in | |
| 498 adict. | |
| 99 | 499 |
| 500 Weeding out entries from a Dictionary can be done with |filter()|: > | |
| 1156 | 501 :call filter(dict, 'v:val =~ "x"') |
| 114 | 502 This removes all entries from "dict" with a value not matching 'x'. |
| 102 | 503 |
| 504 | |
| 505 Dictionary function ~ | |
| 4159 | 506 *Dictionary-function* *self* *E725* *E862* |
| 102 | 507 When a function is defined with the "dict" attribute it can be used in a |
| 1621 | 508 special way with a dictionary. Example: > |
| 102 | 509 :function Mylen() dict |
| 114 | 510 : return len(self.data) |
| 102 | 511 :endfunction |
| 114 | 512 :let mydict = {'data': [0, 1, 2, 3], 'len': function("Mylen")} |
| 513 :echo mydict.len() | |
| 102 | 514 |
| 515 This is like a method in object oriented programming. The entry in the | |
| 516 Dictionary is a |Funcref|. The local variable "self" refers to the dictionary | |
| 517 the function was invoked from. | |
| 518 | |
| 114 | 519 It is also possible to add a function without the "dict" attribute as a |
| 520 Funcref to a Dictionary, but the "self" variable is not available then. | |
| 521 | |
| 819 | 522 *numbered-function* *anonymous-function* |
| 102 | 523 To avoid the extra name for the function it can be defined and directly |
| 524 assigned to a Dictionary in this way: > | |
| 114 | 525 :let mydict = {'data': [0, 1, 2, 3]} |
| 526 :function mydict.len() dict | |
| 527 : return len(self.data) | |
| 102 | 528 :endfunction |
| 114 | 529 :echo mydict.len() |
| 530 | |
| 531 The function will then get a number and the value of dict.len is a |Funcref| | |
| 1621 | 532 that references this function. The function can only be used through a |
| 114 | 533 |Funcref|. It will automatically be deleted when there is no |Funcref| |
| 534 remaining that refers to it. | |
| 535 | |
| 536 It is not necessary to use the "dict" attribute for a numbered function. | |
| 102 | 537 |
|
2488
def0e3934129
Preparations for 7.3d release.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2465
diff
changeset
|
538 If you get an error for a numbered function, you can find out what it is with |
|
def0e3934129
Preparations for 7.3d release.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2465
diff
changeset
|
539 a trick. Assuming the function is 42, the command is: > |
|
def0e3934129
Preparations for 7.3d release.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2465
diff
changeset
|
540 :function {42} |
|
def0e3934129
Preparations for 7.3d release.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2465
diff
changeset
|
541 |
| 102 | 542 |
| 543 Functions for Dictionaries ~ | |
| 114 | 544 *E715* |
| 545 Functions that can be used with a Dictionary: > | |
| 102 | 546 :if has_key(dict, 'foo') " TRUE if dict has entry with key "foo" |
| 547 :if empty(dict) " TRUE if dict is empty | |
| 548 :let l = len(dict) " number of items in dict | |
| 549 :let big = max(dict) " maximum value in dict | |
| 550 :let small = min(dict) " minimum value in dict | |
| 551 :let xs = count(dict, 'x') " count nr of times 'x' appears in dict | |
| 552 :let s = string(dict) " String representation of dict | |
| 553 :call map(dict, '">> " . v:val') " prepend ">> " to each item | |
| 99 | 554 |
| 555 | |
| 556 1.5 More about variables ~ | |
| 85 | 557 *more-variables* |
| 7 | 558 If you need to know the type of a variable or expression, use the |type()| |
| 559 function. | |
| 560 | |
| 561 When the '!' flag is included in the 'viminfo' option, global variables that | |
| 562 start with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase letter, are | |
| 563 stored in the viminfo file |viminfo-file|. | |
| 564 | |
| 565 When the 'sessionoptions' option contains "global", global variables that | |
| 566 start with an uppercase letter and contain at least one lowercase letter are | |
| 567 stored in the session file |session-file|. | |
| 568 | |
| 569 variable name can be stored where ~ | |
| 570 my_var_6 not | |
| 571 My_Var_6 session file | |
| 572 MY_VAR_6 viminfo file | |
| 573 | |
| 574 | |
| 575 It's possible to form a variable name with curly braces, see | |
| 576 |curly-braces-names|. | |
| 577 | |
| 578 ============================================================================== | |
| 579 2. Expression syntax *expression-syntax* | |
| 580 | |
| 581 Expression syntax summary, from least to most significant: | |
| 582 | |
| 583 |expr1| expr2 ? expr1 : expr1 if-then-else | |
| 584 | |
| 585 |expr2| expr3 || expr3 .. logical OR | |
| 586 | |
| 587 |expr3| expr4 && expr4 .. logical AND | |
| 588 | |
| 589 |expr4| expr5 == expr5 equal | |
| 590 expr5 != expr5 not equal | |
| 591 expr5 > expr5 greater than | |
| 592 expr5 >= expr5 greater than or equal | |
| 593 expr5 < expr5 smaller than | |
| 594 expr5 <= expr5 smaller than or equal | |
| 595 expr5 =~ expr5 regexp matches | |
| 596 expr5 !~ expr5 regexp doesn't match | |
| 597 | |
| 598 expr5 ==? expr5 equal, ignoring case | |
| 599 expr5 ==# expr5 equal, match case | |
| 600 etc. As above, append ? for ignoring case, # for | |
| 601 matching case | |
| 602 | |
| 685 | 603 expr5 is expr5 same |List| instance |
| 604 expr5 isnot expr5 different |List| instance | |
| 79 | 605 |
| 606 |expr5| expr6 + expr6 .. number addition or list concatenation | |
| 7 | 607 expr6 - expr6 .. number subtraction |
| 608 expr6 . expr6 .. string concatenation | |
| 609 | |
| 610 |expr6| expr7 * expr7 .. number multiplication | |
| 611 expr7 / expr7 .. number division | |
| 612 expr7 % expr7 .. number modulo | |
| 613 | |
| 614 |expr7| ! expr7 logical NOT | |
| 615 - expr7 unary minus | |
| 616 + expr7 unary plus | |
| 102 | 617 |
| 685 | 618 |expr8| expr8[expr1] byte of a String or item of a |List| |
| 619 expr8[expr1 : expr1] substring of a String or sublist of a |List| | |
| 620 expr8.name entry in a |Dictionary| | |
| 621 expr8(expr1, ...) function call with |Funcref| variable | |
| 102 | 622 |
| 623 |expr9| number number constant | |
| 26 | 624 "string" string constant, backslash is special |
| 99 | 625 'string' string constant, ' is doubled |
| 685 | 626 [expr1, ...] |List| |
| 627 {expr1: expr1, ...} |Dictionary| | |
| 7 | 628 &option option value |
| 629 (expr1) nested expression | |
| 630 variable internal variable | |
| 631 va{ria}ble internal variable with curly braces | |
| 632 $VAR environment variable | |
| 633 @r contents of register 'r' | |
| 634 function(expr1, ...) function call | |
| 635 func{ti}on(expr1, ...) function call with curly braces | |
| 636 | |
| 637 | |
| 638 ".." indicates that the operations in this level can be concatenated. | |
| 639 Example: > | |
| 640 &nu || &list && &shell == "csh" | |
| 641 | |
| 642 All expressions within one level are parsed from left to right. | |
| 643 | |
| 644 | |
| 645 expr1 *expr1* *E109* | |
| 646 ----- | |
| 647 | |
| 648 expr2 ? expr1 : expr1 | |
| 649 | |
| 650 The expression before the '?' is evaluated to a number. If it evaluates to | |
| 651 non-zero, the result is the value of the expression between the '?' and ':', | |
| 652 otherwise the result is the value of the expression after the ':'. | |
| 653 Example: > | |
| 654 :echo lnum == 1 ? "top" : lnum | |
| 655 | |
| 656 Since the first expression is an "expr2", it cannot contain another ?:. The | |
| 657 other two expressions can, thus allow for recursive use of ?:. | |
| 658 Example: > | |
| 659 :echo lnum == 1 ? "top" : lnum == 1000 ? "last" : lnum | |
| 660 | |
| 661 To keep this readable, using |line-continuation| is suggested: > | |
| 662 :echo lnum == 1 | |
| 663 :\ ? "top" | |
| 664 :\ : lnum == 1000 | |
| 665 :\ ? "last" | |
| 666 :\ : lnum | |
| 667 | |
| 1156 | 668 You should always put a space before the ':', otherwise it can be mistaken for |
| 669 use in a variable such as "a:1". | |
| 670 | |
| 7 | 671 |
| 672 expr2 and expr3 *expr2* *expr3* | |
| 673 --------------- | |
| 674 | |
| 675 *expr-barbar* *expr-&&* | |
| 676 The "||" and "&&" operators take one argument on each side. The arguments | |
| 677 are (converted to) Numbers. The result is: | |
| 678 | |
| 679 input output ~ | |
| 680 n1 n2 n1 || n2 n1 && n2 ~ | |
| 681 zero zero zero zero | |
| 682 zero non-zero non-zero zero | |
| 683 non-zero zero non-zero zero | |
| 684 non-zero non-zero non-zero non-zero | |
| 685 | |
| 686 The operators can be concatenated, for example: > | |
| 687 | |
| 688 &nu || &list && &shell == "csh" | |
| 689 | |
| 690 Note that "&&" takes precedence over "||", so this has the meaning of: > | |
| 691 | |
| 692 &nu || (&list && &shell == "csh") | |
| 693 | |
| 694 Once the result is known, the expression "short-circuits", that is, further | |
| 695 arguments are not evaluated. This is like what happens in C. For example: > | |
| 696 | |
| 697 let a = 1 | |
| 698 echo a || b | |
| 699 | |
| 700 This is valid even if there is no variable called "b" because "a" is non-zero, | |
| 701 so the result must be non-zero. Similarly below: > | |
| 702 | |
| 703 echo exists("b") && b == "yes" | |
| 704 | |
| 705 This is valid whether "b" has been defined or not. The second clause will | |
| 706 only be evaluated if "b" has been defined. | |
| 707 | |
| 708 | |
| 709 expr4 *expr4* | |
| 710 ----- | |
| 711 | |
| 712 expr5 {cmp} expr5 | |
| 713 | |
| 714 Compare two expr5 expressions, resulting in a 0 if it evaluates to false, or 1 | |
| 715 if it evaluates to true. | |
| 716 | |
| 1621 | 717 *expr-==* *expr-!=* *expr->* *expr->=* |
| 7 | 718 *expr-<* *expr-<=* *expr-=~* *expr-!~* |
| 719 *expr-==#* *expr-!=#* *expr->#* *expr->=#* | |
| 720 *expr-<#* *expr-<=#* *expr-=~#* *expr-!~#* | |
| 721 *expr-==?* *expr-!=?* *expr->?* *expr->=?* | |
| 722 *expr-<?* *expr-<=?* *expr-=~?* *expr-!~?* | |
| 2908 | 723 *expr-is* *expr-isnot* *expr-is#* *expr-isnot#* |
| 724 *expr-is?* *expr-isnot?* | |
| 7 | 725 use 'ignorecase' match case ignore case ~ |
| 726 equal == ==# ==? | |
| 727 not equal != !=# !=? | |
| 728 greater than > ># >? | |
| 729 greater than or equal >= >=# >=? | |
| 730 smaller than < <# <? | |
| 731 smaller than or equal <= <=# <=? | |
| 732 regexp matches =~ =~# =~? | |
| 733 regexp doesn't match !~ !~# !~? | |
| 2908 | 734 same instance is is# is? |
| 735 different instance isnot isnot# isnot? | |
| 7 | 736 |
| 737 Examples: | |
| 738 "abc" ==# "Abc" evaluates to 0 | |
| 739 "abc" ==? "Abc" evaluates to 1 | |
| 740 "abc" == "Abc" evaluates to 1 if 'ignorecase' is set, 0 otherwise | |
| 741 | |
| 85 | 742 *E691* *E692* |
| 685 | 743 A |List| can only be compared with a |List| and only "equal", "not equal" and |
| 744 "is" can be used. This compares the values of the list, recursively. | |
| 745 Ignoring case means case is ignored when comparing item values. | |
| 79 | 746 |
| 114 | 747 *E735* *E736* |
| 685 | 748 A |Dictionary| can only be compared with a |Dictionary| and only "equal", "not |
| 749 equal" and "is" can be used. This compares the key/values of the |Dictionary| | |
| 114 | 750 recursively. Ignoring case means case is ignored when comparing item values. |
| 751 | |
| 85 | 752 *E693* *E694* |
| 685 | 753 A |Funcref| can only be compared with a |Funcref| and only "equal" and "not |
| 754 equal" can be used. Case is never ignored. | |
| 755 | |
| 2908 | 756 When using "is" or "isnot" with a |List| or a |Dictionary| this checks if the |
| 757 expressions are referring to the same |List| or |Dictionary| instance. A copy | |
| 758 of a |List| is different from the original |List|. When using "is" without | |
| 759 a |List| or a |Dictionary| it is equivalent to using "equal", using "isnot" | |
| 760 equivalent to using "not equal". Except that a different type means the | |
| 761 values are different: "4 == '4'" is true, "4 is '4'" is false and "0 is []" is | |
| 3830 | 762 false and not an error. "is#"/"isnot#" and "is?"/"isnot?" can be used to match |
| 2908 | 763 and ignore case. |
| 79 | 764 |
| 7 | 765 When comparing a String with a Number, the String is converted to a Number, |
| 1621 | 766 and the comparison is done on Numbers. This means that "0 == 'x'" is TRUE, |
| 7 | 767 because 'x' converted to a Number is zero. |
| 768 | |
| 769 When comparing two Strings, this is done with strcmp() or stricmp(). This | |
| 770 results in the mathematical difference (comparing byte values), not | |
| 771 necessarily the alphabetical difference in the local language. | |
| 772 | |
| 1621 | 773 When using the operators with a trailing '#', or the short version and |
| 1156 | 774 'ignorecase' is off, the comparing is done with strcmp(): case matters. |
| 7 | 775 |
| 776 When using the operators with a trailing '?', or the short version and | |
| 1156 | 777 'ignorecase' is set, the comparing is done with stricmp(): case is ignored. |
| 778 | |
| 779 'smartcase' is not used. | |
| 7 | 780 |
| 781 The "=~" and "!~" operators match the lefthand argument with the righthand | |
| 782 argument, which is used as a pattern. See |pattern| for what a pattern is. | |
| 783 This matching is always done like 'magic' was set and 'cpoptions' is empty, no | |
| 784 matter what the actual value of 'magic' or 'cpoptions' is. This makes scripts | |
| 785 portable. To avoid backslashes in the regexp pattern to be doubled, use a | |
| 786 single-quote string, see |literal-string|. | |
| 787 Since a string is considered to be a single line, a multi-line pattern | |
| 788 (containing \n, backslash-n) will not match. However, a literal NL character | |
| 789 can be matched like an ordinary character. Examples: | |
| 790 "foo\nbar" =~ "\n" evaluates to 1 | |
| 791 "foo\nbar" =~ "\\n" evaluates to 0 | |
| 792 | |
| 793 | |
| 794 expr5 and expr6 *expr5* *expr6* | |
| 795 --------------- | |
| 685 | 796 expr6 + expr6 .. Number addition or |List| concatenation *expr-+* |
| 79 | 797 expr6 - expr6 .. Number subtraction *expr--* |
| 798 expr6 . expr6 .. String concatenation *expr-.* | |
| 799 | |
| 692 | 800 For |Lists| only "+" is possible and then both expr6 must be a list. The |
| 685 | 801 result is a new list with the two lists Concatenated. |
| 79 | 802 |
| 3214 | 803 expr7 * expr7 .. Number multiplication *expr-star* |
| 804 expr7 / expr7 .. Number division *expr-/* | |
| 805 expr7 % expr7 .. Number modulo *expr-%* | |
| 7 | 806 |
| 807 For all, except ".", Strings are converted to Numbers. | |
| 3214 | 808 For bitwise operators see |and()|, |or()| and |xor()|. |
| 7 | 809 |
| 810 Note the difference between "+" and ".": | |
| 811 "123" + "456" = 579 | |
| 812 "123" . "456" = "123456" | |
| 813 | |
| 1621 | 814 Since '.' has the same precedence as '+' and '-', you need to read: > |
| 815 1 . 90 + 90.0 | |
| 816 As: > | |
| 817 (1 . 90) + 90.0 | |
| 818 That works, since the String "190" is automatically converted to the Number | |
| 819 190, which can be added to the Float 90.0. However: > | |
| 820 1 . 90 * 90.0 | |
| 821 Should be read as: > | |
| 822 1 . (90 * 90.0) | |
| 823 Since '.' has lower precedence than '*'. This does NOT work, since this | |
| 824 attempts to concatenate a Float and a String. | |
| 825 | |
| 826 When dividing a Number by zero the result depends on the value: | |
| 827 0 / 0 = -0x80000000 (like NaN for Float) | |
| 828 >0 / 0 = 0x7fffffff (like positive infinity) | |
| 829 <0 / 0 = -0x7fffffff (like negative infinity) | |
| 830 (before Vim 7.2 it was always 0x7fffffff) | |
| 831 | |
| 7 | 832 When the righthand side of '%' is zero, the result is 0. |
| 833 | |
| 685 | 834 None of these work for |Funcref|s. |
| 79 | 835 |
| 1621 | 836 . and % do not work for Float. *E804* |
| 837 | |
| 7 | 838 |
| 839 expr7 *expr7* | |
| 840 ----- | |
| 841 ! expr7 logical NOT *expr-!* | |
| 842 - expr7 unary minus *expr-unary--* | |
| 843 + expr7 unary plus *expr-unary-+* | |
| 844 | |
| 845 For '!' non-zero becomes zero, zero becomes one. | |
| 846 For '-' the sign of the number is changed. | |
| 847 For '+' the number is unchanged. | |
| 848 | |
| 849 A String will be converted to a Number first. | |
| 850 | |
| 1621 | 851 These three can be repeated and mixed. Examples: |
| 7 | 852 !-1 == 0 |
| 853 !!8 == 1 | |
| 854 --9 == 9 | |
| 855 | |
| 856 | |
| 857 expr8 *expr8* | |
| 858 ----- | |
| 685 | 859 expr8[expr1] item of String or |List| *expr-[]* *E111* |
| 102 | 860 |
| 861 If expr8 is a Number or String this results in a String that contains the | |
| 862 expr1'th single byte from expr8. expr8 is used as a String, expr1 as a | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
863 Number. This doesn't recognize multi-byte encodings, see |byteidx()| for |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
864 an alternative. |
| 55 | 865 |
| 866 Index zero gives the first character. This is like it works in C. Careful: | |
| 867 text column numbers start with one! Example, to get the character under the | |
| 868 cursor: > | |
| 823 | 869 :let c = getline(".")[col(".") - 1] |
| 7 | 870 |
| 871 If the length of the String is less than the index, the result is an empty | |
| 55 | 872 String. A negative index always results in an empty string (reason: backwards |
| 873 compatibility). Use [-1:] to get the last byte. | |
| 874 | |
| 685 | 875 If expr8 is a |List| then it results the item at index expr1. See |list-index| |
| 55 | 876 for possible index values. If the index is out of range this results in an |
| 1621 | 877 error. Example: > |
| 55 | 878 :let item = mylist[-1] " get last item |
| 879 | |
| 685 | 880 Generally, if a |List| index is equal to or higher than the length of the |
| 881 |List|, or more negative than the length of the |List|, this results in an | |
| 882 error. | |
| 55 | 883 |
| 99 | 884 |
| 102 | 885 expr8[expr1a : expr1b] substring or sublist *expr-[:]* |
| 886 | |
| 887 If expr8 is a Number or String this results in the substring with the bytes | |
| 888 from expr1a to and including expr1b. expr8 is used as a String, expr1a and | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
889 expr1b are used as a Number. This doesn't recognize multi-byte encodings, see |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
890 |byteidx()| for computing the indexes. |
| 55 | 891 |
| 892 If expr1a is omitted zero is used. If expr1b is omitted the length of the | |
| 893 string minus one is used. | |
| 894 | |
| 895 A negative number can be used to measure from the end of the string. -1 is | |
| 896 the last character, -2 the last but one, etc. | |
| 897 | |
| 898 If an index goes out of range for the string characters are omitted. If | |
| 899 expr1b is smaller than expr1a the result is an empty string. | |
| 900 | |
| 901 Examples: > | |
| 902 :let c = name[-1:] " last byte of a string | |
| 903 :let c = name[-2:-2] " last but one byte of a string | |
| 904 :let s = line(".")[4:] " from the fifth byte to the end | |
| 905 :let s = s[:-3] " remove last two bytes | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
906 < |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
907 *sublist* *slice* |
| 685 | 908 If expr8 is a |List| this results in a new |List| with the items indicated by |
| 1621 | 909 the indexes expr1a and expr1b. This works like with a String, as explained |
| 685 | 910 just above, except that indexes out of range cause an error. Examples: > |
| 55 | 911 :let l = mylist[:3] " first four items |
| 912 :let l = mylist[4:4] " List with one item | |
| 913 :let l = mylist[:] " shallow copy of a List | |
| 914 | |
| 685 | 915 Using expr8[expr1] or expr8[expr1a : expr1b] on a |Funcref| results in an |
| 916 error. | |
| 917 | |
| 918 | |
| 919 expr8.name entry in a |Dictionary| *expr-entry* | |
| 920 | |
| 921 If expr8 is a |Dictionary| and it is followed by a dot, then the following | |
| 922 name will be used as a key in the |Dictionary|. This is just like: | |
| 923 expr8[name]. | |
| 99 | 924 |
| 925 The name must consist of alphanumeric characters, just like a variable name, | |
| 926 but it may start with a number. Curly braces cannot be used. | |
| 927 | |
| 928 There must not be white space before or after the dot. | |
| 929 | |
| 930 Examples: > | |
| 931 :let dict = {"one": 1, 2: "two"} | |
| 932 :echo dict.one | |
| 933 :echo dict .2 | |
| 934 | |
| 935 Note that the dot is also used for String concatenation. To avoid confusion | |
| 936 always put spaces around the dot for String concatenation. | |
| 937 | |
| 938 | |
| 685 | 939 expr8(expr1, ...) |Funcref| function call |
| 102 | 940 |
| 941 When expr8 is a |Funcref| type variable, invoke the function it refers to. | |
| 942 | |
| 943 | |
| 944 | |
| 945 *expr9* | |
| 7 | 946 number |
| 947 ------ | |
| 3224 | 948 number number constant *expr-number* |
| 949 *hex-number* *octal-number* | |
| 7 | 950 |
| 951 Decimal, Hexadecimal (starting with 0x or 0X), or Octal (starting with 0). | |
| 952 | |
| 1621 | 953 *floating-point-format* |
| 954 Floating point numbers can be written in two forms: | |
| 955 | |
| 956 [-+]{N}.{M} | |
| 957 [-+]{N}.{M}e[-+]{exp} | |
| 958 | |
| 959 {N} and {M} are numbers. Both {N} and {M} must be present and can only | |
| 960 contain digits. | |
| 961 [-+] means there is an optional plus or minus sign. | |
| 962 {exp} is the exponent, power of 10. | |
| 963 Only a decimal point is accepted, not a comma. No matter what the current | |
| 964 locale is. | |
| 965 {only when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 966 | |
| 967 Examples: | |
| 968 123.456 | |
| 969 +0.0001 | |
| 970 55.0 | |
| 971 -0.123 | |
| 972 1.234e03 | |
| 973 1.0E-6 | |
| 974 -3.1416e+88 | |
| 975 | |
| 976 These are INVALID: | |
| 977 3. empty {M} | |
| 978 1e40 missing .{M} | |
| 979 | |
| 1698 | 980 *float-pi* *float-e* |
| 981 A few useful values to copy&paste: > | |
| 982 :let pi = 3.14159265359 | |
| 983 :let e = 2.71828182846 | |
| 984 | |
| 1621 | 985 Rationale: |
| 986 Before floating point was introduced, the text "123.456" was interpreted as | |
| 987 the two numbers "123" and "456", both converted to a string and concatenated, | |
| 988 resulting in the string "123456". Since this was considered pointless, and we | |
| 1698 | 989 could not find it intentionally being used in Vim scripts, this backwards |
| 1621 | 990 incompatibility was accepted in favor of being able to use the normal notation |
| 991 for floating point numbers. | |
| 992 | |
| 993 *floating-point-precision* | |
| 994 The precision and range of floating points numbers depends on what "double" | |
| 995 means in the library Vim was compiled with. There is no way to change this at | |
| 996 runtime. | |
| 997 | |
| 998 The default for displaying a |Float| is to use 6 decimal places, like using | |
| 999 printf("%g", f). You can select something else when using the |printf()| | |
| 1000 function. Example: > | |
| 1001 :echo printf('%.15e', atan(1)) | |
| 1002 < 7.853981633974483e-01 | |
| 1003 | |
| 1004 | |
| 7 | 1005 |
| 1006 string *expr-string* *E114* | |
| 1007 ------ | |
| 1008 "string" string constant *expr-quote* | |
| 1009 | |
| 1010 Note that double quotes are used. | |
| 1011 | |
| 1012 A string constant accepts these special characters: | |
| 1013 \... three-digit octal number (e.g., "\316") | |
| 1014 \.. two-digit octal number (must be followed by non-digit) | |
| 1015 \. one-digit octal number (must be followed by non-digit) | |
| 1016 \x.. byte specified with two hex numbers (e.g., "\x1f") | |
| 1017 \x. byte specified with one hex number (must be followed by non-hex char) | |
| 1018 \X.. same as \x.. | |
| 1019 \X. same as \x. | |
| 1621 | 1020 \u.... character specified with up to 4 hex numbers, stored according to the |
| 7 | 1021 current value of 'encoding' (e.g., "\u02a4") |
| 1022 \U.... same as \u.... | |
| 1023 \b backspace <BS> | |
| 1024 \e escape <Esc> | |
| 1025 \f formfeed <FF> | |
| 1026 \n newline <NL> | |
| 1027 \r return <CR> | |
| 1028 \t tab <Tab> | |
| 1029 \\ backslash | |
| 1030 \" double quote | |
| 2152 | 1031 \<xxx> Special key named "xxx". e.g. "\<C-W>" for CTRL-W. This is for use |
| 1032 in mappings, the 0x80 byte is escaped. Don't use <Char-xxxx> to get a | |
| 1033 utf-8 character, use \uxxxx as mentioned above. | |
| 7 | 1034 |
| 1156 | 1035 Note that "\xff" is stored as the byte 255, which may be invalid in some |
| 1036 encodings. Use "\u00ff" to store character 255 according to the current value | |
| 1037 of 'encoding'. | |
| 1038 | |
| 7 | 1039 Note that "\000" and "\x00" force the end of the string. |
| 1040 | |
| 1041 | |
| 1042 literal-string *literal-string* *E115* | |
| 1043 --------------- | |
| 26 | 1044 'string' string constant *expr-'* |
| 7 | 1045 |
| 1046 Note that single quotes are used. | |
| 1047 | |
| 1621 | 1048 This string is taken as it is. No backslashes are removed or have a special |
| 99 | 1049 meaning. The only exception is that two quotes stand for one quote. |
| 26 | 1050 |
| 1051 Single quoted strings are useful for patterns, so that backslashes do not need | |
| 1621 | 1052 to be doubled. These two commands are equivalent: > |
| 26 | 1053 if a =~ "\\s*" |
| 1054 if a =~ '\s*' | |
| 7 | 1055 |
| 1056 | |
| 1057 option *expr-option* *E112* *E113* | |
| 1058 ------ | |
| 1059 &option option value, local value if possible | |
| 1060 &g:option global option value | |
| 1061 &l:option local option value | |
| 1062 | |
| 1063 Examples: > | |
| 1064 echo "tabstop is " . &tabstop | |
| 1065 if &insertmode | |
| 1066 | |
| 1067 Any option name can be used here. See |options|. When using the local value | |
| 1068 and there is no buffer-local or window-local value, the global value is used | |
| 1069 anyway. | |
| 1070 | |
| 1071 | |
| 1156 | 1072 register *expr-register* *@r* |
| 7 | 1073 -------- |
| 1074 @r contents of register 'r' | |
| 1075 | |
| 1076 The result is the contents of the named register, as a single string. | |
| 1077 Newlines are inserted where required. To get the contents of the unnamed | |
| 1621 | 1078 register use @" or @@. See |registers| for an explanation of the available |
| 336 | 1079 registers. |
| 1080 | |
| 1081 When using the '=' register you get the expression itself, not what it | |
| 1082 evaluates to. Use |eval()| to evaluate it. | |
| 7 | 1083 |
| 1084 | |
| 1085 nesting *expr-nesting* *E110* | |
| 1086 ------- | |
| 1087 (expr1) nested expression | |
| 1088 | |
| 1089 | |
| 1090 environment variable *expr-env* | |
| 1091 -------------------- | |
| 1092 $VAR environment variable | |
| 1093 | |
| 1094 The String value of any environment variable. When it is not defined, the | |
| 1095 result is an empty string. | |
| 1096 *expr-env-expand* | |
| 1097 Note that there is a difference between using $VAR directly and using | |
| 1098 expand("$VAR"). Using it directly will only expand environment variables that | |
| 1099 are known inside the current Vim session. Using expand() will first try using | |
| 1100 the environment variables known inside the current Vim session. If that | |
| 1101 fails, a shell will be used to expand the variable. This can be slow, but it | |
| 1102 does expand all variables that the shell knows about. Example: > | |
| 1103 :echo $version | |
| 1104 :echo expand("$version") | |
| 1105 The first one probably doesn't echo anything, the second echoes the $version | |
| 1106 variable (if your shell supports it). | |
| 1107 | |
| 1108 | |
| 1109 internal variable *expr-variable* | |
| 1110 ----------------- | |
| 1111 variable internal variable | |
| 1112 See below |internal-variables|. | |
| 1113 | |
| 1114 | |
| 170 | 1115 function call *expr-function* *E116* *E118* *E119* *E120* |
| 7 | 1116 ------------- |
| 1117 function(expr1, ...) function call | |
| 1118 See below |functions|. | |
| 1119 | |
| 1120 | |
| 1121 ============================================================================== | |
| 2596 | 1122 3. Internal variable *internal-variables* *E461* |
| 1123 | |
| 7 | 1124 An internal variable name can be made up of letters, digits and '_'. But it |
| 1125 cannot start with a digit. It's also possible to use curly braces, see | |
| 1126 |curly-braces-names|. | |
| 1127 | |
| 1128 An internal variable is created with the ":let" command |:let|. | |
| 87 | 1129 An internal variable is explicitly destroyed with the ":unlet" command |
| 1130 |:unlet|. | |
| 1131 Using a name that is not an internal variable or refers to a variable that has | |
| 1132 been destroyed results in an error. | |
| 7 | 1133 |
| 1134 There are several name spaces for variables. Which one is to be used is | |
| 1135 specified by what is prepended: | |
| 1136 | |
| 1137 (nothing) In a function: local to a function; otherwise: global | |
| 1138 |buffer-variable| b: Local to the current buffer. | |
| 1139 |window-variable| w: Local to the current window. | |
| 819 | 1140 |tabpage-variable| t: Local to the current tab page. |
| 7 | 1141 |global-variable| g: Global. |
| 1142 |local-variable| l: Local to a function. | |
| 1143 |script-variable| s: Local to a |:source|'ed Vim script. | |
| 1144 |function-argument| a: Function argument (only inside a function). | |
| 1621 | 1145 |vim-variable| v: Global, predefined by Vim. |
| 7 | 1146 |
| 685 | 1147 The scope name by itself can be used as a |Dictionary|. For example, to |
| 1148 delete all script-local variables: > | |
| 133 | 1149 :for k in keys(s:) |
| 1150 : unlet s:[k] | |
| 1151 :endfor | |
| 1152 < | |
| 4358 | 1153 *buffer-variable* *b:var* *b:* |
| 7 | 1154 A variable name that is preceded with "b:" is local to the current buffer. |
| 1155 Thus you can have several "b:foo" variables, one for each buffer. | |
| 1156 This kind of variable is deleted when the buffer is wiped out or deleted with | |
| 1157 |:bdelete|. | |
| 1158 | |
| 1159 One local buffer variable is predefined: | |
| 4264 | 1160 *b:changedtick* *changetick* |
| 7 | 1161 b:changedtick The total number of changes to the current buffer. It is |
| 1162 incremented for each change. An undo command is also a change | |
| 1163 in this case. This can be used to perform an action only when | |
| 1164 the buffer has changed. Example: > | |
| 1165 :if my_changedtick != b:changedtick | |
| 1621 | 1166 : let my_changedtick = b:changedtick |
| 1167 : call My_Update() | |
| 7 | 1168 :endif |
| 1169 < | |
| 4358 | 1170 *window-variable* *w:var* *w:* |
| 7 | 1171 A variable name that is preceded with "w:" is local to the current window. It |
| 1172 is deleted when the window is closed. | |
| 1173 | |
| 4437 | 1174 *tabpage-variable* *t:var* *t:* |
| 819 | 1175 A variable name that is preceded with "t:" is local to the current tab page, |
| 1176 It is deleted when the tab page is closed. {not available when compiled | |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
1177 without the |+windows| feature} |
| 819 | 1178 |
| 4358 | 1179 *global-variable* *g:var* *g:* |
| 7 | 1180 Inside functions global variables are accessed with "g:". Omitting this will |
| 1621 | 1181 access a variable local to a function. But "g:" can also be used in any other |
| 7 | 1182 place if you like. |
| 1183 | |
| 4358 | 1184 *local-variable* *l:var* *l:* |
| 7 | 1185 Inside functions local variables are accessed without prepending anything. |
| 1156 | 1186 But you can also prepend "l:" if you like. However, without prepending "l:" |
| 1187 you may run into reserved variable names. For example "count". By itself it | |
| 1188 refers to "v:count". Using "l:count" you can have a local variable with the | |
| 1189 same name. | |
| 7 | 1190 |
| 1191 *script-variable* *s:var* | |
| 1192 In a Vim script variables starting with "s:" can be used. They cannot be | |
| 1193 accessed from outside of the scripts, thus are local to the script. | |
| 1194 | |
| 1195 They can be used in: | |
| 1196 - commands executed while the script is sourced | |
| 1197 - functions defined in the script | |
| 1198 - autocommands defined in the script | |
| 1199 - functions and autocommands defined in functions and autocommands which were | |
| 1200 defined in the script (recursively) | |
| 1201 - user defined commands defined in the script | |
| 1202 Thus not in: | |
| 1203 - other scripts sourced from this one | |
| 1204 - mappings | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1205 - menus |
| 7 | 1206 - etc. |
| 1207 | |
| 1156 | 1208 Script variables can be used to avoid conflicts with global variable names. |
| 1209 Take this example: > | |
| 7 | 1210 |
| 1211 let s:counter = 0 | |
| 1212 function MyCounter() | |
| 1213 let s:counter = s:counter + 1 | |
| 1214 echo s:counter | |
| 1215 endfunction | |
| 1216 command Tick call MyCounter() | |
| 1217 | |
| 1218 You can now invoke "Tick" from any script, and the "s:counter" variable in | |
| 1219 that script will not be changed, only the "s:counter" in the script where | |
| 1220 "Tick" was defined is used. | |
| 1221 | |
| 1222 Another example that does the same: > | |
| 1223 | |
| 1224 let s:counter = 0 | |
| 1225 command Tick let s:counter = s:counter + 1 | echo s:counter | |
| 1226 | |
| 1227 When calling a function and invoking a user-defined command, the context for | |
| 9 | 1228 script variables is set to the script where the function or command was |
| 7 | 1229 defined. |
| 1230 | |
| 1231 The script variables are also available when a function is defined inside a | |
| 1232 function that is defined in a script. Example: > | |
| 1233 | |
| 1234 let s:counter = 0 | |
| 1235 function StartCounting(incr) | |
| 1236 if a:incr | |
| 1237 function MyCounter() | |
| 1238 let s:counter = s:counter + 1 | |
| 1239 endfunction | |
| 1240 else | |
| 1241 function MyCounter() | |
| 1242 let s:counter = s:counter - 1 | |
| 1243 endfunction | |
| 1244 endif | |
| 1245 endfunction | |
| 1246 | |
| 1247 This defines the MyCounter() function either for counting up or counting down | |
| 1248 when calling StartCounting(). It doesn't matter from where StartCounting() is | |
| 1249 called, the s:counter variable will be accessible in MyCounter(). | |
| 1250 | |
| 1251 When the same script is sourced again it will use the same script variables. | |
| 1252 They will remain valid as long as Vim is running. This can be used to | |
| 1253 maintain a counter: > | |
| 1254 | |
| 1255 if !exists("s:counter") | |
| 1256 let s:counter = 1 | |
| 1257 echo "script executed for the first time" | |
| 1258 else | |
| 1259 let s:counter = s:counter + 1 | |
| 1260 echo "script executed " . s:counter . " times now" | |
| 1261 endif | |
| 1262 | |
| 1263 Note that this means that filetype plugins don't get a different set of script | |
| 1264 variables for each buffer. Use local buffer variables instead |b:var|. | |
| 1265 | |
| 1266 | |
| 4358 | 1267 Predefined Vim variables: *vim-variable* *v:var* *v:* |
| 7 | 1268 |
| 189 | 1269 *v:beval_col* *beval_col-variable* |
| 1270 v:beval_col The number of the column, over which the mouse pointer is. | |
| 1271 This is the byte index in the |v:beval_lnum| line. | |
| 1272 Only valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option. | |
| 1273 | |
| 1274 *v:beval_bufnr* *beval_bufnr-variable* | |
| 1275 v:beval_bufnr The number of the buffer, over which the mouse pointer is. Only | |
| 1276 valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option. | |
| 1277 | |
| 1278 *v:beval_lnum* *beval_lnum-variable* | |
| 1279 v:beval_lnum The number of the line, over which the mouse pointer is. Only | |
| 1280 valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option. | |
| 1281 | |
| 1282 *v:beval_text* *beval_text-variable* | |
| 374 | 1283 v:beval_text The text under or after the mouse pointer. Usually a word as |
| 1284 it is useful for debugging a C program. 'iskeyword' applies, | |
| 1285 but a dot and "->" before the position is included. When on a | |
| 1286 ']' the text before it is used, including the matching '[' and | |
| 189 | 1287 word before it. When on a Visual area within one line the |
| 1288 highlighted text is used. | |
| 1289 Only valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option. | |
| 1290 | |
| 1291 *v:beval_winnr* *beval_winnr-variable* | |
| 1292 v:beval_winnr The number of the window, over which the mouse pointer is. Only | |
| 2709 | 1293 valid while evaluating the 'balloonexpr' option. The first |
| 1294 window has number zero (unlike most other places where a | |
| 1295 window gets a number). | |
| 189 | 1296 |
| 844 | 1297 *v:char* *char-variable* |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1298 v:char Argument for evaluating 'formatexpr' and used for the typed |
|
2249
6d3d35ff2c2b
Use full path in undofile(). Updated docs.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2236
diff
changeset
|
1299 character when using <expr> in an abbreviation |:map-<expr>|. |
|
4502
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4437
diff
changeset
|
1300 It is also used by the |InsertCharPre| and |InsertEnter| events. |
| 844 | 1301 |
| 7 | 1302 *v:charconvert_from* *charconvert_from-variable* |
| 1303 v:charconvert_from | |
| 1304 The name of the character encoding of a file to be converted. | |
| 1305 Only valid while evaluating the 'charconvert' option. | |
| 1306 | |
| 1307 *v:charconvert_to* *charconvert_to-variable* | |
| 1308 v:charconvert_to | |
| 1309 The name of the character encoding of a file after conversion. | |
| 1310 Only valid while evaluating the 'charconvert' option. | |
| 1311 | |
| 1312 *v:cmdarg* *cmdarg-variable* | |
| 1313 v:cmdarg This variable is used for two purposes: | |
| 1314 1. The extra arguments given to a file read/write command. | |
| 1315 Currently these are "++enc=" and "++ff=". This variable is | |
| 1316 set before an autocommand event for a file read/write | |
| 1317 command is triggered. There is a leading space to make it | |
| 1318 possible to append this variable directly after the | |
| 1621 | 1319 read/write command. Note: The "+cmd" argument isn't |
| 7 | 1320 included here, because it will be executed anyway. |
| 1321 2. When printing a PostScript file with ":hardcopy" this is | |
| 1322 the argument for the ":hardcopy" command. This can be used | |
| 1323 in 'printexpr'. | |
| 1324 | |
| 1325 *v:cmdbang* *cmdbang-variable* | |
| 1326 v:cmdbang Set like v:cmdarg for a file read/write command. When a "!" | |
| 1327 was used the value is 1, otherwise it is 0. Note that this | |
| 1328 can only be used in autocommands. For user commands |<bang>| | |
| 1329 can be used. | |
| 1330 | |
| 1331 *v:count* *count-variable* | |
| 1332 v:count The count given for the last Normal mode command. Can be used | |
| 1621 | 1333 to get the count before a mapping. Read-only. Example: > |
| 7 | 1334 :map _x :<C-U>echo "the count is " . v:count<CR> |
| 1335 < Note: The <C-U> is required to remove the line range that you | |
| 1336 get when typing ':' after a count. | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1337 When there are two counts, as in "3d2w", they are multiplied, |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1338 just like what happens in the command, "d6w" for the example. |
| 667 | 1339 Also used for evaluating the 'formatexpr' option. |
| 7 | 1340 "count" also works, for backwards compatibility. |
| 1341 | |
| 1342 *v:count1* *count1-variable* | |
| 1343 v:count1 Just like "v:count", but defaults to one when no count is | |
| 1344 used. | |
| 1345 | |
| 1346 *v:ctype* *ctype-variable* | |
| 1347 v:ctype The current locale setting for characters of the runtime | |
| 1348 environment. This allows Vim scripts to be aware of the | |
| 1349 current locale encoding. Technical: it's the value of | |
| 1350 LC_CTYPE. When not using a locale the value is "C". | |
| 1351 This variable can not be set directly, use the |:language| | |
| 1352 command. | |
| 1353 See |multi-lang|. | |
| 1354 | |
| 1355 *v:dying* *dying-variable* | |
| 1621 | 1356 v:dying Normally zero. When a deadly signal is caught it's set to |
| 7 | 1357 one. When multiple signals are caught the number increases. |
| 1358 Can be used in an autocommand to check if Vim didn't | |
| 1359 terminate normally. {only works on Unix} | |
| 1360 Example: > | |
| 1361 :au VimLeave * if v:dying | echo "\nAAAAaaaarrrggghhhh!!!\n" | endif | |
|
2226
36a9ac99e1ca
Don't execute some autocommands when v:dying is 2 or more.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
1362 < Note: if another deadly signal is caught when v:dying is one, |
|
36a9ac99e1ca
Don't execute some autocommands when v:dying is 2 or more.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
1363 VimLeave autocommands will not be executed. |
|
36a9ac99e1ca
Don't execute some autocommands when v:dying is 2 or more.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2214
diff
changeset
|
1364 |
| 7 | 1365 *v:errmsg* *errmsg-variable* |
| 1366 v:errmsg Last given error message. It's allowed to set this variable. | |
| 1367 Example: > | |
| 1368 :let v:errmsg = "" | |
| 1369 :silent! next | |
| 1370 :if v:errmsg != "" | |
| 1371 : ... handle error | |
| 1372 < "errmsg" also works, for backwards compatibility. | |
| 1373 | |
| 1374 *v:exception* *exception-variable* | |
| 1375 v:exception The value of the exception most recently caught and not | |
| 1376 finished. See also |v:throwpoint| and |throw-variables|. | |
| 1377 Example: > | |
| 1378 :try | |
| 1379 : throw "oops" | |
| 1380 :catch /.*/ | |
| 1381 : echo "caught" v:exception | |
| 1382 :endtry | |
| 1383 < Output: "caught oops". | |
| 1384 | |
| 179 | 1385 *v:fcs_reason* *fcs_reason-variable* |
| 1386 v:fcs_reason The reason why the |FileChangedShell| event was triggered. | |
| 1387 Can be used in an autocommand to decide what to do and/or what | |
| 1388 to set v:fcs_choice to. Possible values: | |
| 1389 deleted file no longer exists | |
| 1390 conflict file contents, mode or timestamp was | |
| 1391 changed and buffer is modified | |
| 1392 changed file contents has changed | |
| 1393 mode mode of file changed | |
| 1394 time only file timestamp changed | |
| 1395 | |
| 1396 *v:fcs_choice* *fcs_choice-variable* | |
| 1397 v:fcs_choice What should happen after a |FileChangedShell| event was | |
| 1398 triggered. Can be used in an autocommand to tell Vim what to | |
| 1399 do with the affected buffer: | |
| 1400 reload Reload the buffer (does not work if | |
| 1401 the file was deleted). | |
| 1402 ask Ask the user what to do, as if there | |
| 1403 was no autocommand. Except that when | |
| 1404 only the timestamp changed nothing | |
| 1405 will happen. | |
| 1406 <empty> Nothing, the autocommand should do | |
| 1407 everything that needs to be done. | |
| 1408 The default is empty. If another (invalid) value is used then | |
| 1409 Vim behaves like it is empty, there is no warning message. | |
| 1410 | |
| 7 | 1411 *v:fname_in* *fname_in-variable* |
| 579 | 1412 v:fname_in The name of the input file. Valid while evaluating: |
| 7 | 1413 option used for ~ |
| 1414 'charconvert' file to be converted | |
| 1415 'diffexpr' original file | |
| 1416 'patchexpr' original file | |
| 1417 'printexpr' file to be printed | |
| 593 | 1418 And set to the swap file name for |SwapExists|. |
| 7 | 1419 |
| 1420 *v:fname_out* *fname_out-variable* | |
| 1421 v:fname_out The name of the output file. Only valid while | |
| 1422 evaluating: | |
| 1423 option used for ~ | |
| 1424 'charconvert' resulting converted file (*) | |
| 1425 'diffexpr' output of diff | |
| 1426 'patchexpr' resulting patched file | |
| 1427 (*) When doing conversion for a write command (e.g., ":w | |
| 1621 | 1428 file") it will be equal to v:fname_in. When doing conversion |
| 7 | 1429 for a read command (e.g., ":e file") it will be a temporary |
| 1430 file and different from v:fname_in. | |
| 1431 | |
| 1432 *v:fname_new* *fname_new-variable* | |
| 1433 v:fname_new The name of the new version of the file. Only valid while | |
| 1434 evaluating 'diffexpr'. | |
| 1435 | |
| 1436 *v:fname_diff* *fname_diff-variable* | |
| 1437 v:fname_diff The name of the diff (patch) file. Only valid while | |
| 1438 evaluating 'patchexpr'. | |
| 1439 | |
| 1440 *v:folddashes* *folddashes-variable* | |
| 1441 v:folddashes Used for 'foldtext': dashes representing foldlevel of a closed | |
| 1442 fold. | |
| 29 | 1443 Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext| |
| 7 | 1444 |
| 1445 *v:foldlevel* *foldlevel-variable* | |
| 1446 v:foldlevel Used for 'foldtext': foldlevel of closed fold. | |
| 29 | 1447 Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext| |
| 7 | 1448 |
| 1449 *v:foldend* *foldend-variable* | |
| 1450 v:foldend Used for 'foldtext': last line of closed fold. | |
| 29 | 1451 Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext| |
| 7 | 1452 |
| 1453 *v:foldstart* *foldstart-variable* | |
| 1454 v:foldstart Used for 'foldtext': first line of closed fold. | |
| 29 | 1455 Read-only in the |sandbox|. |fold-foldtext| |
| 7 | 1456 |
| 11 | 1457 *v:insertmode* *insertmode-variable* |
| 1458 v:insertmode Used for the |InsertEnter| and |InsertChange| autocommand | |
| 1459 events. Values: | |
| 1460 i Insert mode | |
| 1461 r Replace mode | |
| 1462 v Virtual Replace mode | |
| 1463 | |
| 102 | 1464 *v:key* *key-variable* |
| 685 | 1465 v:key Key of the current item of a |Dictionary|. Only valid while |
| 102 | 1466 evaluating the expression used with |map()| and |filter()|. |
| 1467 Read-only. | |
| 1468 | |
| 7 | 1469 *v:lang* *lang-variable* |
| 1470 v:lang The current locale setting for messages of the runtime | |
| 1471 environment. This allows Vim scripts to be aware of the | |
| 1472 current language. Technical: it's the value of LC_MESSAGES. | |
| 1473 The value is system dependent. | |
| 1474 This variable can not be set directly, use the |:language| | |
| 1475 command. | |
| 1476 It can be different from |v:ctype| when messages are desired | |
| 1477 in a different language than what is used for character | |
| 1478 encoding. See |multi-lang|. | |
| 1479 | |
| 1480 *v:lc_time* *lc_time-variable* | |
| 1481 v:lc_time The current locale setting for time messages of the runtime | |
| 1482 environment. This allows Vim scripts to be aware of the | |
| 1483 current language. Technical: it's the value of LC_TIME. | |
| 1484 This variable can not be set directly, use the |:language| | |
| 1485 command. See |multi-lang|. | |
| 1486 | |
| 1487 *v:lnum* *lnum-variable* | |
|
2350
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
1488 v:lnum Line number for the 'foldexpr' |fold-expr|, 'formatexpr' and |
|
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
1489 'indentexpr' expressions, tab page number for 'guitablabel' |
|
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
1490 and 'guitabtooltip'. Only valid while one of these |
|
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
1491 expressions is being evaluated. Read-only when in the |
|
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
1492 |sandbox|. |
| 7 | 1493 |
| 1029 | 1494 *v:mouse_win* *mouse_win-variable* |
| 1495 v:mouse_win Window number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|. | |
| 1496 First window has number 1, like with |winnr()|. The value is | |
| 1497 zero when there was no mouse button click. | |
| 1498 | |
| 1499 *v:mouse_lnum* *mouse_lnum-variable* | |
| 1500 v:mouse_lnum Line number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|. | |
| 1501 This is the text line number, not the screen line number. The | |
| 1502 value is zero when there was no mouse button click. | |
| 1503 | |
| 1504 *v:mouse_col* *mouse_col-variable* | |
| 1505 v:mouse_col Column number for a mouse click obtained with |getchar()|. | |
| 1506 This is the screen column number, like with |virtcol()|. The | |
| 1507 value is zero when there was no mouse button click. | |
| 1508 | |
| 1733 | 1509 *v:oldfiles* *oldfiles-variable* |
| 1510 v:oldfiles List of file names that is loaded from the |viminfo| file on | |
| 1511 startup. These are the files that Vim remembers marks for. | |
| 1512 The length of the List is limited by the ' argument of the | |
| 1513 'viminfo' option (default is 100). | |
| 1514 Also see |:oldfiles| and |c_#<|. | |
| 1515 The List can be modified, but this has no effect on what is | |
| 1516 stored in the |viminfo| file later. If you use values other | |
| 1517 than String this will cause trouble. | |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
1518 {only when compiled with the |+viminfo| feature} |
| 1733 | 1519 |
| 1490 | 1520 *v:operator* *operator-variable* |
| 1521 v:operator The last operator given in Normal mode. This is a single | |
| 1522 character except for commands starting with <g> or <z>, | |
| 1523 in which case it is two characters. Best used alongside | |
| 1524 |v:prevcount| and |v:register|. Useful if you want to cancel | |
| 1525 Operator-pending mode and then use the operator, e.g.: > | |
| 1526 :omap O <Esc>:call MyMotion(v:operator)<CR> | |
| 1527 < The value remains set until another operator is entered, thus | |
| 1528 don't expect it to be empty. | |
| 1529 v:operator is not set for |:delete|, |:yank| or other Ex | |
| 1530 commands. | |
| 1531 Read-only. | |
| 1532 | |
| 7 | 1533 *v:prevcount* *prevcount-variable* |
| 1534 v:prevcount The count given for the last but one Normal mode command. | |
| 1535 This is the v:count value of the previous command. Useful if | |
| 1490 | 1536 you want to cancel Visual or Operator-pending mode and then |
| 1537 use the count, e.g.: > | |
| 7 | 1538 :vmap % <Esc>:call MyFilter(v:prevcount)<CR> |
| 1539 < Read-only. | |
| 1540 | |
| 170 | 1541 *v:profiling* *profiling-variable* |
| 1621 | 1542 v:profiling Normally zero. Set to one after using ":profile start". |
| 170 | 1543 See |profiling|. |
| 1544 | |
| 7 | 1545 *v:progname* *progname-variable* |
| 1546 v:progname Contains the name (with path removed) with which Vim was | |
| 3492 | 1547 invoked. Allows you to do special initialisations for |view|, |
| 1548 |evim| etc., or any other name you might symlink to Vim. | |
| 7 | 1549 Read-only. |
| 1550 | |
| 1551 *v:register* *register-variable* | |
|
2698
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
1552 v:register The name of the register in effect for the current normal mode |
| 3492 | 1553 command (regardless of whether that command actually used a |
| 1554 register). Or for the currently executing normal mode mapping | |
| 1555 (use this in custom commands that take a register). | |
| 1556 If none is supplied it is the default register '"', unless | |
| 1557 'clipboard' contains "unnamed" or "unnamedplus", then it is | |
| 1558 '*' or '+'. | |
|
2698
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
1559 Also see |getreg()| and |setreg()| |
| 7 | 1560 |
| 540 | 1561 *v:scrollstart* *scrollstart-variable* |
| 1562 v:scrollstart String describing the script or function that caused the | |
| 1563 screen to scroll up. It's only set when it is empty, thus the | |
| 1564 first reason is remembered. It is set to "Unknown" for a | |
| 1565 typed command. | |
| 1566 This can be used to find out why your script causes the | |
| 1567 hit-enter prompt. | |
| 1568 | |
| 7 | 1569 *v:servername* *servername-variable* |
| 1570 v:servername The resulting registered |x11-clientserver| name if any. | |
| 1571 Read-only. | |
| 1572 | |
| 1621 | 1573 |
| 1574 v:searchforward *v:searchforward* *searchforward-variable* | |
| 1575 Search direction: 1 after a forward search, 0 after a | |
| 1576 backward search. It is reset to forward when directly setting | |
| 1577 the last search pattern, see |quote/|. | |
| 1578 Note that the value is restored when returning from a | |
| 1579 function. |function-search-undo|. | |
| 1580 Read-write. | |
| 1581 | |
| 7 | 1582 *v:shell_error* *shell_error-variable* |
| 1583 v:shell_error Result of the last shell command. When non-zero, the last | |
| 1584 shell command had an error. When zero, there was no problem. | |
| 1585 This only works when the shell returns the error code to Vim. | |
| 1586 The value -1 is often used when the command could not be | |
| 1587 executed. Read-only. | |
| 1588 Example: > | |
| 1589 :!mv foo bar | |
| 1590 :if v:shell_error | |
| 1591 : echo 'could not rename "foo" to "bar"!' | |
| 1592 :endif | |
| 1593 < "shell_error" also works, for backwards compatibility. | |
| 1594 | |
| 1595 *v:statusmsg* *statusmsg-variable* | |
| 1596 v:statusmsg Last given status message. It's allowed to set this variable. | |
| 1597 | |
| 579 | 1598 *v:swapname* *swapname-variable* |
| 1599 v:swapname Only valid when executing |SwapExists| autocommands: Name of | |
| 1600 the swap file found. Read-only. | |
| 1601 | |
| 1602 *v:swapchoice* *swapchoice-variable* | |
| 1603 v:swapchoice |SwapExists| autocommands can set this to the selected choice | |
| 1604 for handling an existing swap file: | |
| 1605 'o' Open read-only | |
| 1606 'e' Edit anyway | |
| 1607 'r' Recover | |
| 1608 'd' Delete swapfile | |
| 1609 'q' Quit | |
| 1610 'a' Abort | |
| 1621 | 1611 The value should be a single-character string. An empty value |
| 579 | 1612 results in the user being asked, as would happen when there is |
| 1613 no SwapExists autocommand. The default is empty. | |
| 1614 | |
| 590 | 1615 *v:swapcommand* *swapcommand-variable* |
| 625 | 1616 v:swapcommand Normal mode command to be executed after a file has been |
| 590 | 1617 opened. Can be used for a |SwapExists| autocommand to have |
| 1621 | 1618 another Vim open the file and jump to the right place. For |
| 590 | 1619 example, when jumping to a tag the value is ":tag tagname\r". |
| 716 | 1620 For ":edit +cmd file" the value is ":cmd\r". |
| 590 | 1621 |
| 7 | 1622 *v:termresponse* *termresponse-variable* |
| 1623 v:termresponse The escape sequence returned by the terminal for the |t_RV| | |
| 1621 | 1624 termcap entry. It is set when Vim receives an escape sequence |
| 7 | 1625 that starts with ESC [ or CSI and ends in a 'c', with only |
| 1626 digits, ';' and '.' in between. | |
| 1627 When this option is set, the TermResponse autocommand event is | |
| 1628 fired, so that you can react to the response from the | |
| 1629 terminal. | |
| 1630 The response from a new xterm is: "<Esc>[ Pp ; Pv ; Pc c". Pp | |
| 1631 is the terminal type: 0 for vt100 and 1 for vt220. Pv is the | |
| 1632 patch level (since this was introduced in patch 95, it's | |
| 1633 always 95 or bigger). Pc is always zero. | |
| 1634 {only when compiled with |+termresponse| feature} | |
| 1635 | |
| 1636 *v:this_session* *this_session-variable* | |
| 1637 v:this_session Full filename of the last loaded or saved session file. See | |
| 1638 |:mksession|. It is allowed to set this variable. When no | |
| 1639 session file has been saved, this variable is empty. | |
| 1640 "this_session" also works, for backwards compatibility. | |
| 1641 | |
| 1642 *v:throwpoint* *throwpoint-variable* | |
| 1643 v:throwpoint The point where the exception most recently caught and not | |
| 1621 | 1644 finished was thrown. Not set when commands are typed. See |
| 7 | 1645 also |v:exception| and |throw-variables|. |
| 1646 Example: > | |
| 1647 :try | |
| 1648 : throw "oops" | |
| 1649 :catch /.*/ | |
| 1650 : echo "Exception from" v:throwpoint | |
| 1651 :endtry | |
| 1652 < Output: "Exception from test.vim, line 2" | |
| 1653 | |
| 102 | 1654 *v:val* *val-variable* |
| 1621 | 1655 v:val Value of the current item of a |List| or |Dictionary|. Only |
| 685 | 1656 valid while evaluating the expression used with |map()| and |
| 102 | 1657 |filter()|. Read-only. |
| 1658 | |
| 7 | 1659 *v:version* *version-variable* |
| 1660 v:version Version number of Vim: Major version number times 100 plus | |
| 1661 minor version number. Version 5.0 is 500. Version 5.1 (5.01) | |
| 1662 is 501. Read-only. "version" also works, for backwards | |
| 1663 compatibility. | |
| 1664 Use |has()| to check if a certain patch was included, e.g.: > | |
| 1665 if has("patch123") | |
| 1666 < Note that patch numbers are specific to the version, thus both | |
| 1667 version 5.0 and 5.1 may have a patch 123, but these are | |
| 1668 completely different. | |
| 1669 | |
| 1670 *v:warningmsg* *warningmsg-variable* | |
| 1671 v:warningmsg Last given warning message. It's allowed to set this variable. | |
| 1672 | |
| 2609 | 1673 *v:windowid* *windowid-variable* |
| 1674 v:windowid When any X11 based GUI is running or when running in a | |
| 1675 terminal and Vim connects to the X server (|-X|) this will be | |
| 2616 | 1676 set to the window ID. |
| 1677 When an MS-Windows GUI is running this will be set to the | |
| 1678 window handle. | |
| 1679 Otherwise the value is zero. | |
| 1680 Note: for windows inside Vim use |winnr()|. | |
| 2609 | 1681 |
| 7 | 1682 ============================================================================== |
| 1683 4. Builtin Functions *functions* | |
| 1684 | |
| 1685 See |function-list| for a list grouped by what the function is used for. | |
| 1686 | |
| 236 | 1687 (Use CTRL-] on the function name to jump to the full explanation.) |
| 7 | 1688 |
| 1689 USAGE RESULT DESCRIPTION ~ | |
| 1690 | |
| 1621 | 1691 abs( {expr}) Float or Number absolute value of {expr} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1692 acos( {expr}) Float arc cosine of {expr} |
| 685 | 1693 add( {list}, {item}) List append {item} to |List| {list} |
| 3214 | 1694 and( {expr}, {expr}) Number bitwise AND |
| 55 | 1695 append( {lnum}, {string}) Number append {string} below line {lnum} |
| 161 | 1696 append( {lnum}, {list}) Number append lines {list} below line {lnum} |
| 7 | 1697 argc() Number number of files in the argument list |
| 55 | 1698 argidx() Number current index in the argument list |
| 7 | 1699 argv( {nr}) String {nr} entry of the argument list |
| 818 | 1700 argv( ) List the argument list |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1701 asin( {expr}) Float arc sine of {expr} |
| 1621 | 1702 atan( {expr}) Float arc tangent of {expr} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1703 atan2( {expr}, {expr}) Float arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2} |
| 7 | 1704 browse( {save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default}) |
| 1705 String put up a file requester | |
| 1621 | 1706 browsedir( {title}, {initdir}) String put up a directory requester |
| 7 | 1707 bufexists( {expr}) Number TRUE if buffer {expr} exists |
| 55 | 1708 buflisted( {expr}) Number TRUE if buffer {expr} is listed |
| 1709 bufloaded( {expr}) Number TRUE if buffer {expr} is loaded | |
| 7 | 1710 bufname( {expr}) String Name of the buffer {expr} |
| 1711 bufnr( {expr}) Number Number of the buffer {expr} | |
| 1712 bufwinnr( {expr}) Number window number of buffer {expr} | |
| 1713 byte2line( {byte}) Number line number at byte count {byte} | |
| 55 | 1714 byteidx( {expr}, {nr}) Number byte index of {nr}'th char in {expr} |
| 102 | 1715 call( {func}, {arglist} [, {dict}]) |
| 1716 any call {func} with arguments {arglist} | |
| 1621 | 1717 ceil( {expr}) Float round {expr} up |
| 1718 changenr() Number current change number | |
| 4051 | 1719 char2nr( {expr}[, {utf8}]) Number ASCII/UTF8 value of first char in {expr} |
| 55 | 1720 cindent( {lnum}) Number C indent for line {lnum} |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1721 clearmatches() none clear all matches |
| 7 | 1722 col( {expr}) Number column nr of cursor or mark |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1723 complete( {startcol}, {matches}) none set Insert mode completion |
| 464 | 1724 complete_add( {expr}) Number add completion match |
| 1621 | 1725 complete_check() Number check for key typed during completion |
| 7 | 1726 confirm( {msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]]) |
| 1727 Number number of choice picked by user | |
| 55 | 1728 copy( {expr}) any make a shallow copy of {expr} |
| 1621 | 1729 cos( {expr}) Float cosine of {expr} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1730 cosh( {expr}) Float hyperbolic cosine of {expr} |
| 95 | 1731 count( {list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]]) |
| 1732 Number count how many {expr} are in {list} | |
| 7 | 1733 cscope_connection( [{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]]) |
| 1734 Number checks existence of cscope connection | |
| 703 | 1735 cursor( {lnum}, {col} [, {coladd}]) |
| 1736 Number move cursor to {lnum}, {col}, {coladd} | |
| 1737 cursor( {list}) Number move cursor to position in {list} | |
| 55 | 1738 deepcopy( {expr}) any make a full copy of {expr} |
| 7 | 1739 delete( {fname}) Number delete file {fname} |
| 1740 did_filetype() Number TRUE if FileType autocommand event used | |
| 55 | 1741 diff_filler( {lnum}) Number diff filler lines about {lnum} |
| 1742 diff_hlID( {lnum}, {col}) Number diff highlighting at {lnum}/{col} | |
| 85 | 1743 empty( {expr}) Number TRUE if {expr} is empty |
| 7 | 1744 escape( {string}, {chars}) String escape {chars} in {string} with '\' |
| 205 | 1745 eval( {string}) any evaluate {string} into its value |
| 55 | 1746 eventhandler( ) Number TRUE if inside an event handler |
| 7 | 1747 executable( {expr}) Number 1 if executable {expr} exists |
| 1748 exists( {expr}) Number TRUE if {expr} exists | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1749 extend( {expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) |
| 824 | 1750 List/Dict insert items of {expr2} into {expr1} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1751 exp( {expr}) Float exponential of {expr} |
| 3398 | 1752 expand( {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]]) |
| 1753 any expand special keywords in {expr} | |
| 1621 | 1754 feedkeys( {string} [, {mode}]) Number add key sequence to typeahead buffer |
| 7 | 1755 filereadable( {file}) Number TRUE if {file} is a readable file |
| 824 | 1756 filewritable( {file}) Number TRUE if {file} is a writable file |
| 102 | 1757 filter( {expr}, {string}) List/Dict remove items from {expr} where |
| 1758 {string} is 0 | |
| 95 | 1759 finddir( {name}[, {path}[, {count}]]) |
| 824 | 1760 String find directory {name} in {path} |
| 19 | 1761 findfile( {name}[, {path}[, {count}]]) |
| 824 | 1762 String find file {name} in {path} |
| 1621 | 1763 float2nr( {expr}) Number convert Float {expr} to a Number |
| 1764 floor( {expr}) Float round {expr} down | |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1765 fmod( {expr1}, {expr2}) Float remainder of {expr1} / {expr2} |
| 1586 | 1766 fnameescape( {fname}) String escape special characters in {fname} |
| 7 | 1767 fnamemodify( {fname}, {mods}) String modify file name |
| 55 | 1768 foldclosed( {lnum}) Number first line of fold at {lnum} if closed |
| 1769 foldclosedend( {lnum}) Number last line of fold at {lnum} if closed | |
| 7 | 1770 foldlevel( {lnum}) Number fold level at {lnum} |
| 55 | 1771 foldtext( ) String line displayed for closed fold |
| 824 | 1772 foldtextresult( {lnum}) String text for closed fold at {lnum} |
| 7 | 1773 foreground( ) Number bring the Vim window to the foreground |
| 55 | 1774 function( {name}) Funcref reference to function {name} |
| 3224 | 1775 garbagecollect( [{atexit}]) none free memory, breaking cyclic references |
| 82 | 1776 get( {list}, {idx} [, {def}]) any get item {idx} from {list} or {def} |
| 102 | 1777 get( {dict}, {key} [, {def}]) any get item {key} from {dict} or {def} |
| 435 | 1778 getbufline( {expr}, {lnum} [, {end}]) |
| 1779 List lines {lnum} to {end} of buffer {expr} | |
| 4157 | 1780 getbufvar( {expr}, {varname} [, {def}]) |
| 1781 any variable {varname} in buffer {expr} | |
| 55 | 1782 getchar( [expr]) Number get one character from the user |
| 1783 getcharmod( ) Number modifiers for the last typed character | |
| 7 | 1784 getcmdline() String return the current command-line |
| 1785 getcmdpos() Number return cursor position in command-line | |
| 531 | 1786 getcmdtype() String return the current command-line type |
| 7 | 1787 getcwd() String the current working directory |
| 20 | 1788 getfperm( {fname}) String file permissions of file {fname} |
| 1789 getfsize( {fname}) Number size in bytes of file {fname} | |
| 37 | 1790 getfontname( [{name}]) String name of font being used |
| 7 | 1791 getftime( {fname}) Number last modification time of file |
| 20 | 1792 getftype( {fname}) String description of type of file {fname} |
| 161 | 1793 getline( {lnum}) String line {lnum} of current buffer |
| 1794 getline( {lnum}, {end}) List lines {lnum} to {end} of current buffer | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1795 getloclist( {nr}) List list of location list items |
| 1326 | 1796 getmatches() List list of current matches |
| 1548 | 1797 getpid() Number process ID of Vim |
| 703 | 1798 getpos( {expr}) List position of cursor, mark, etc. |
| 230 | 1799 getqflist() List list of quickfix items |
| 282 | 1800 getreg( [{regname} [, 1]]) String contents of register |
| 55 | 1801 getregtype( [{regname}]) String type of register |
| 4157 | 1802 gettabvar( {nr}, {varname} [, {def}]) |
| 1803 any variable {varname} in tab {nr} or {def} | |
| 1804 gettabwinvar( {tabnr}, {winnr}, {name} [, {def}]) | |
| 831 | 1805 any {name} in {winnr} in tab page {tabnr} |
| 7 | 1806 getwinposx() Number X coord in pixels of GUI Vim window |
| 1807 getwinposy() Number Y coord in pixels of GUI Vim window | |
| 4157 | 1808 getwinvar( {nr}, {varname} [, {def}]) |
| 1809 any variable {varname} in window {nr} | |
| 3398 | 1810 glob( {expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]]) |
| 1811 any expand file wildcards in {expr} | |
| 1754 | 1812 globpath( {path}, {expr} [, {flag}]) |
| 1813 String do glob({expr}) for all dirs in {path} | |
| 7 | 1814 has( {feature}) Number TRUE if feature {feature} supported |
| 102 | 1815 has_key( {dict}, {key}) Number TRUE if {dict} has entry {key} |
| 1104 | 1816 haslocaldir() Number TRUE if current window executed |:lcd| |
| 782 | 1817 hasmapto( {what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) |
| 1818 Number TRUE if mapping to {what} exists | |
| 7 | 1819 histadd( {history},{item}) String add an item to a history |
| 1820 histdel( {history} [, {item}]) String remove an item from a history | |
| 1821 histget( {history} [, {index}]) String get the item {index} from a history | |
| 1822 histnr( {history}) Number highest index of a history | |
| 1823 hlexists( {name}) Number TRUE if highlight group {name} exists | |
| 1824 hlID( {name}) Number syntax ID of highlight group {name} | |
| 1825 hostname() String name of the machine Vim is running on | |
| 55 | 1826 iconv( {expr}, {from}, {to}) String convert encoding of {expr} |
| 1827 indent( {lnum}) Number indent of line {lnum} | |
| 95 | 1828 index( {list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]]) |
| 1829 Number index in {list} where {expr} appears | |
| 531 | 1830 input( {prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]]) |
| 1831 String get input from the user | |
| 7 | 1832 inputdialog( {p} [, {t} [, {c}]]) String like input() but in a GUI dialog |
| 824 | 1833 inputlist( {textlist}) Number let the user pick from a choice list |
| 55 | 1834 inputrestore() Number restore typeahead |
| 1835 inputsave() Number save and clear typeahead | |
| 7 | 1836 inputsecret( {prompt} [, {text}]) String like input() but hiding the text |
| 55 | 1837 insert( {list}, {item} [, {idx}]) List insert {item} in {list} [before {idx}] |
| 3214 | 1838 invert( {expr}) Number bitwise invert |
| 7 | 1839 isdirectory( {directory}) Number TRUE if {directory} is a directory |
| 148 | 1840 islocked( {expr}) Number TRUE if {expr} is locked |
| 685 | 1841 items( {dict}) List key-value pairs in {dict} |
| 95 | 1842 join( {list} [, {sep}]) String join {list} items into one String |
| 685 | 1843 keys( {dict}) List keys in {dict} |
| 55 | 1844 len( {expr}) Number the length of {expr} |
| 1845 libcall( {lib}, {func}, {arg}) String call {func} in library {lib} with {arg} | |
| 7 | 1846 libcallnr( {lib}, {func}, {arg}) Number idem, but return a Number |
| 1847 line( {expr}) Number line nr of cursor, last line or mark | |
| 1848 line2byte( {lnum}) Number byte count of line {lnum} | |
| 55 | 1849 lispindent( {lnum}) Number Lisp indent for line {lnum} |
| 7 | 1850 localtime() Number current time |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1851 log( {expr}) Float natural logarithm (base e) of {expr} |
| 1621 | 1852 log10( {expr}) Float logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10 |
| 3492 | 1853 luaeval( {expr}[, {expr}]) any evaluate |Lua| expression |
| 102 | 1854 map( {expr}, {string}) List/Dict change each item in {expr} to {expr} |
| 2610 | 1855 maparg( {name}[, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]]) |
| 3224 | 1856 String or Dict |
| 1857 rhs of mapping {name} in mode {mode} | |
| 782 | 1858 mapcheck( {name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) |
| 1859 String check for mappings matching {name} | |
| 19 | 1860 match( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) |
| 7 | 1861 Number position where {pat} matches in {expr} |
| 1326 | 1862 matchadd( {group}, {pattern}[, {priority}[, {id}]]) |
| 1863 Number highlight {pattern} with {group} | |
| 819 | 1864 matcharg( {nr}) List arguments of |:match| |
| 1326 | 1865 matchdelete( {id}) Number delete match identified by {id} |
| 19 | 1866 matchend( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) |
| 7 | 1867 Number position where {pat} ends in {expr} |
| 158 | 1868 matchlist( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) |
| 1869 List match and submatches of {pat} in {expr} | |
| 19 | 1870 matchstr( {expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) |
| 1871 String {count}'th match of {pat} in {expr} | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1872 max( {list}) Number maximum value of items in {list} |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1873 min( {list}) Number minimum value of items in {list} |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1874 mkdir( {name} [, {path} [, {prot}]]) |
| 168 | 1875 Number create directory {name} |
| 1621 | 1876 mode( [expr]) String current editing mode |
|
2050
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
1877 mzeval( {expr}) any evaluate |MzScheme| expression |
| 7 | 1878 nextnonblank( {lnum}) Number line nr of non-blank line >= {lnum} |
| 4051 | 1879 nr2char( {expr}[, {utf8}]) String single char with ASCII/UTF8 value {expr} |
| 3214 | 1880 or( {expr}, {expr}) Number bitwise OR |
| 819 | 1881 pathshorten( {expr}) String shorten directory names in a path |
| 1621 | 1882 pow( {x}, {y}) Float {x} to the power of {y} |
| 7 | 1883 prevnonblank( {lnum}) Number line nr of non-blank line <= {lnum} |
| 1621 | 1884 printf( {fmt}, {expr1}...) String format text |
| 1885 pumvisible() Number whether popup menu is visible | |
| 3682 | 1886 pyeval( {expr}) any evaluate |Python| expression |
| 1887 py3eval( {expr}) any evaluate |python3| expression | |
| 99 | 1888 range( {expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]]) |
| 1889 List items from {expr} to {max} | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1890 readfile( {fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]]) |
| 168 | 1891 List get list of lines from file {fname} |
| 794 | 1892 reltime( [{start} [, {end}]]) List get time value |
| 1893 reltimestr( {time}) String turn time value into a String | |
| 7 | 1894 remote_expr( {server}, {string} [, {idvar}]) |
| 1895 String send expression | |
| 1896 remote_foreground( {server}) Number bring Vim server to the foreground | |
| 1897 remote_peek( {serverid} [, {retvar}]) | |
| 1898 Number check for reply string | |
| 1899 remote_read( {serverid}) String read reply string | |
| 1900 remote_send( {server}, {string} [, {idvar}]) | |
| 1901 String send key sequence | |
| 79 | 1902 remove( {list}, {idx} [, {end}]) any remove items {idx}-{end} from {list} |
| 856 | 1903 remove( {dict}, {key}) any remove entry {key} from {dict} |
| 55 | 1904 rename( {from}, {to}) Number rename (move) file from {from} to {to} |
| 1905 repeat( {expr}, {count}) String repeat {expr} {count} times | |
| 1906 resolve( {filename}) String get filename a shortcut points to | |
| 82 | 1907 reverse( {list}) List reverse {list} in-place |
| 1621 | 1908 round( {expr}) Float round off {expr} |
|
4835
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
1909 screenattr( {row}, {col}) Number attribute at screen position |
|
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
1910 screenchar( {row}, {col}) Number character at screen position |
| 3986 | 1911 screencol() Number current cursor column |
| 1912 screenrow() Number current cursor row | |
| 1496 | 1913 search( {pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]) |
| 1914 Number search for {pattern} | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1915 searchdecl( {name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]]) |
| 1621 | 1916 Number search for variable declaration |
| 1496 | 1917 searchpair( {start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]]) |
| 55 | 1918 Number search for other end of start/end pair |
| 1496 | 1919 searchpairpos( {start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} [...]]]) |
| 667 | 1920 List search for other end of start/end pair |
| 1496 | 1921 searchpos( {pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]) |
| 667 | 1922 List search for {pattern} |
| 7 | 1923 server2client( {clientid}, {string}) |
| 1924 Number send reply string | |
| 1925 serverlist() String get a list of available servers | |
| 1926 setbufvar( {expr}, {varname}, {val}) set {varname} in buffer {expr} to {val} | |
| 1927 setcmdpos( {pos}) Number set cursor position in command-line | |
| 1928 setline( {lnum}, {line}) Number set line {lnum} to {line} | |
| 647 | 1929 setloclist( {nr}, {list}[, {action}]) |
| 1930 Number modify location list using {list} | |
| 1326 | 1931 setmatches( {list}) Number restore a list of matches |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1932 setpos( {expr}, {list}) Number set the {expr} position to {list} |
| 647 | 1933 setqflist( {list}[, {action}]) Number modify quickfix list using {list} |
| 55 | 1934 setreg( {n}, {v}[, {opt}]) Number set register to value and type |
|
2207
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
1935 settabvar( {nr}, {varname}, {val}) set {varname} in tab page {nr} to {val} |
| 831 | 1936 settabwinvar( {tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val}) set {varname} in window |
| 1937 {winnr} in tab page {tabnr} to {val} | |
| 7 | 1938 setwinvar( {nr}, {varname}, {val}) set {varname} in window {nr} to {val} |
| 4126 | 1939 sha256( {string}) String SHA256 checksum of {string} |
| 1661 | 1940 shellescape( {string} [, {special}]) |
| 1941 String escape {string} for use as shell | |
| 985 | 1942 command argument |
| 3875 | 1943 shiftwidth() Number effective value of 'shiftwidth' |
| 55 | 1944 simplify( {filename}) String simplify filename as much as possible |
| 1621 | 1945 sin( {expr}) Float sine of {expr} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1946 sinh( {expr}) Float hyperbolic sine of {expr} |
| 2902 | 1947 sort( {list} [, {func} [, {dict}]]) |
| 1948 List sort {list}, using {func} to compare | |
| 374 | 1949 soundfold( {word}) String sound-fold {word} |
| 344 | 1950 spellbadword() String badly spelled word at cursor |
| 537 | 1951 spellsuggest( {word} [, {max} [, {capital}]]) |
| 1952 List spelling suggestions | |
| 282 | 1953 split( {expr} [, {pat} [, {keepempty}]]) |
| 685 | 1954 List make |List| from {pat} separated {expr} |
|
2698
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
1955 sqrt( {expr}) Float square root of {expr} |
| 1621 | 1956 str2float( {expr}) Float convert String to Float |
| 1957 str2nr( {expr} [, {base}]) Number convert String to Number | |
|
2338
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
1958 strchars( {expr}) Number character length of the String {expr} |
|
2339
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
1959 strdisplaywidth( {expr} [, {col}]) Number display length of the String {expr} |
| 7 | 1960 strftime( {format}[, {time}]) String time in specified format |
| 133 | 1961 stridx( {haystack}, {needle}[, {start}]) |
| 1962 Number index of {needle} in {haystack} | |
| 95 | 1963 string( {expr}) String String representation of {expr} value |
| 7 | 1964 strlen( {expr}) Number length of the String {expr} |
| 1965 strpart( {src}, {start}[, {len}]) | |
| 1966 String {len} characters of {src} at {start} | |
| 140 | 1967 strridx( {haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) |
| 1968 Number last index of {needle} in {haystack} | |
| 7 | 1969 strtrans( {expr}) String translate string to make it printable |
|
2338
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
1970 strwidth( {expr}) Number display cell length of the String {expr} |
| 2908 | 1971 submatch( {nr}) String specific match in ":s" or substitute() |
| 7 | 1972 substitute( {expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags}) |
| 1973 String all {pat} in {expr} replaced with {sub} | |
| 32 | 1974 synID( {lnum}, {col}, {trans}) Number syntax ID at {lnum} and {col} |
| 7 | 1975 synIDattr( {synID}, {what} [, {mode}]) |
| 1976 String attribute {what} of syntax ID {synID} | |
| 1977 synIDtrans( {synID}) Number translated syntax ID of {synID} | |
|
2608
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
1978 synconcealed( {lnum}, {col}) List info about concealing |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
1979 synstack( {lnum}, {col}) List stack of syntax IDs at {lnum} and {col} |
| 24 | 1980 system( {expr} [, {input}]) String output of shell command/filter {expr} |
| 677 | 1981 tabpagebuflist( [{arg}]) List list of buffer numbers in tab page |
| 1982 tabpagenr( [{arg}]) Number number of current or last tab page | |
| 1983 tabpagewinnr( {tabarg}[, {arg}]) | |
| 1984 Number number of current window in tab page | |
| 1985 taglist( {expr}) List list of tags matching {expr} | |
| 1621 | 1986 tagfiles() List tags files used |
| 7 | 1987 tempname() String name for a temporary file |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1988 tan( {expr}) Float tangent of {expr} |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
1989 tanh( {expr}) Float hyperbolic tangent of {expr} |
| 7 | 1990 tolower( {expr}) String the String {expr} switched to lowercase |
| 1991 toupper( {expr}) String the String {expr} switched to uppercase | |
| 15 | 1992 tr( {src}, {fromstr}, {tostr}) String translate chars of {src} in {fromstr} |
| 1993 to chars in {tostr} | |
|
2698
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
1994 trunc( {expr}) Float truncate Float {expr} |
| 7 | 1995 type( {name}) Number type of variable {name} |
|
2236
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
1996 undofile( {name}) String undo file name for {name} |
|
2280
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
1997 undotree() List undo file tree |
| 685 | 1998 values( {dict}) List values in {dict} |
| 7 | 1999 virtcol( {expr}) Number screen column of cursor or mark |
| 2000 visualmode( [expr]) String last visual mode used | |
| 4151 | 2001 wildmenumode() Number whether 'wildmenu' mode is active |
| 7 | 2002 winbufnr( {nr}) Number buffer number of window {nr} |
| 2003 wincol() Number window column of the cursor | |
| 2004 winheight( {nr}) Number height of window {nr} | |
| 2005 winline() Number window line of the cursor | |
| 674 | 2006 winnr( [{expr}]) Number number of current window |
| 55 | 2007 winrestcmd() String returns command to restore window sizes |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
2008 winrestview( {dict}) none restore view of current window |
| 712 | 2009 winsaveview() Dict save view of current window |
| 7 | 2010 winwidth( {nr}) Number width of window {nr} |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
2011 writefile( {list}, {fname} [, {binary}]) |
| 158 | 2012 Number write list of lines to file {fname} |
| 3214 | 2013 xor( {expr}, {expr}) Number bitwise XOR |
| 7 | 2014 |
| 1621 | 2015 abs({expr}) *abs()* |
| 2016 Return the absolute value of {expr}. When {expr} evaluates to | |
| 2017 a |Float| abs() returns a |Float|. When {expr} can be | |
| 2018 converted to a |Number| abs() returns a |Number|. Otherwise | |
| 2019 abs() gives an error message and returns -1. | |
| 2020 Examples: > | |
| 2021 echo abs(1.456) | |
| 2022 < 1.456 > | |
| 2023 echo abs(-5.456) | |
| 2024 < 5.456 > | |
| 2025 echo abs(-4) | |
| 2026 < 4 | |
| 2027 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 2028 | |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2029 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2030 acos({expr}) *acos()* |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2031 Return the arc cosine of {expr} measured in radians, as a |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2032 |Float| in the range of [0, pi]. |
|
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2033 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2034 [-1, 1]. |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2035 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2036 :echo acos(0) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2037 < 1.570796 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2038 :echo acos(-0.5) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2039 < 2.094395 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
2040 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2041 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2042 |
| 82 | 2043 add({list}, {expr}) *add()* |
| 685 | 2044 Append the item {expr} to |List| {list}. Returns the |
| 2045 resulting |List|. Examples: > | |
| 82 | 2046 :let alist = add([1, 2, 3], item) |
| 2047 :call add(mylist, "woodstock") | |
| 685 | 2048 < Note that when {expr} is a |List| it is appended as a single |
| 692 | 2049 item. Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|. |
| 85 | 2050 Use |insert()| to add an item at another position. |
| 55 | 2051 |
| 82 | 2052 |
| 3214 | 2053 and({expr}, {expr}) *and()* |
| 2054 Bitwise AND on the two arguments. The arguments are converted | |
| 2055 to a number. A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. | |
| 2056 Example: > | |
| 2057 :let flag = and(bits, 0x80) | |
| 2058 | |
| 2059 | |
| 82 | 2060 append({lnum}, {expr}) *append()* |
| 685 | 2061 When {expr} is a |List|: Append each item of the |List| as a |
| 2062 text line below line {lnum} in the current buffer. | |
| 153 | 2063 Otherwise append {expr} as one text line below line {lnum} in |
| 2064 the current buffer. | |
| 2065 {lnum} can be zero to insert a line before the first one. | |
| 82 | 2066 Returns 1 for failure ({lnum} out of range or out of memory), |
| 1621 | 2067 0 for success. Example: > |
| 55 | 2068 :let failed = append(line('$'), "# THE END") |
| 82 | 2069 :let failed = append(0, ["Chapter 1", "the beginning"]) |
| 55 | 2070 < |
| 7 | 2071 *argc()* |
| 2072 argc() The result is the number of files in the argument list of the | |
| 2073 current window. See |arglist|. | |
| 2074 | |
| 2075 *argidx()* | |
| 2076 argidx() The result is the current index in the argument list. 0 is | |
| 2077 the first file. argc() - 1 is the last one. See |arglist|. | |
| 2078 | |
| 2079 *argv()* | |
| 818 | 2080 argv([{nr}]) The result is the {nr}th file in the argument list of the |
| 7 | 2081 current window. See |arglist|. "argv(0)" is the first one. |
| 2082 Example: > | |
| 2083 :let i = 0 | |
| 2084 :while i < argc() | |
| 1621 | 2085 : let f = escape(fnameescape(argv(i)), '.') |
| 7 | 2086 : exe 'amenu Arg.' . f . ' :e ' . f . '<CR>' |
| 2087 : let i = i + 1 | |
| 2088 :endwhile | |
| 818 | 2089 < Without the {nr} argument a |List| with the whole |arglist| is |
| 2090 returned. | |
| 2091 | |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2092 asin({expr}) *asin()* |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2093 Return the arc sine of {expr} measured in radians, as a |Float| |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2094 in the range of [-pi/2, pi/2]. |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2095 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2096 [-1, 1]. |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2097 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2098 :echo asin(0.8) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2099 < 0.927295 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2100 :echo asin(-0.5) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2101 < -0.523599 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
2102 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2103 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2104 |
| 1621 | 2105 atan({expr}) *atan()* |
| 2106 Return the principal value of the arc tangent of {expr}, in | |
| 2107 the range [-pi/2, +pi/2] radians, as a |Float|. | |
| 2108 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 2109 Examples: > | |
| 2110 :echo atan(100) | |
| 2111 < 1.560797 > | |
| 2112 :echo atan(-4.01) | |
| 2113 < -1.326405 | |
| 2114 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 2115 | |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2116 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2117 atan2({expr1}, {expr2}) *atan2()* |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2118 Return the arc tangent of {expr1} / {expr2}, measured in |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2119 radians, as a |Float| in the range [-pi, pi]. |
|
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2120 {expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2121 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2122 :echo atan2(-1, 1) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2123 < -0.785398 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2124 :echo atan2(1, -1) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2125 < 2.356194 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
2126 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2127 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2128 |
| 7 | 2129 *browse()* |
| 2130 browse({save}, {title}, {initdir}, {default}) | |
| 2131 Put up a file requester. This only works when "has("browse")" | |
| 2132 returns non-zero (only in some GUI versions). | |
| 2133 The input fields are: | |
| 2134 {save} when non-zero, select file to write | |
| 2135 {title} title for the requester | |
| 2136 {initdir} directory to start browsing in | |
| 2137 {default} default file name | |
| 2138 When the "Cancel" button is hit, something went wrong, or | |
| 2139 browsing is not possible, an empty string is returned. | |
| 2140 | |
| 29 | 2141 *browsedir()* |
| 2142 browsedir({title}, {initdir}) | |
| 2143 Put up a directory requester. This only works when | |
| 2144 "has("browse")" returns non-zero (only in some GUI versions). | |
| 2145 On systems where a directory browser is not supported a file | |
| 2146 browser is used. In that case: select a file in the directory | |
| 2147 to be used. | |
| 2148 The input fields are: | |
| 2149 {title} title for the requester | |
| 2150 {initdir} directory to start browsing in | |
| 2151 When the "Cancel" button is hit, something went wrong, or | |
| 2152 browsing is not possible, an empty string is returned. | |
| 2153 | |
| 7 | 2154 bufexists({expr}) *bufexists()* |
| 2155 The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a buffer called | |
| 2156 {expr} exists. | |
| 9 | 2157 If the {expr} argument is a number, buffer numbers are used. |
| 7 | 2158 If the {expr} argument is a string it must match a buffer name |
| 9 | 2159 exactly. The name can be: |
| 2160 - Relative to the current directory. | |
| 2161 - A full path. | |
| 1621 | 2162 - The name of a buffer with 'buftype' set to "nofile". |
| 9 | 2163 - A URL name. |
| 7 | 2164 Unlisted buffers will be found. |
| 2165 Note that help files are listed by their short name in the | |
| 2166 output of |:buffers|, but bufexists() requires using their | |
| 2167 long name to be able to find them. | |
| 1621 | 2168 bufexists() may report a buffer exists, but to use the name |
| 2169 with a |:buffer| command you may need to use |expand()|. Esp | |
| 2170 for MS-Windows 8.3 names in the form "c:\DOCUME~1" | |
| 7 | 2171 Use "bufexists(0)" to test for the existence of an alternate |
| 2172 file name. | |
| 2173 *buffer_exists()* | |
| 2174 Obsolete name: buffer_exists(). | |
| 2175 | |
| 2176 buflisted({expr}) *buflisted()* | |
| 2177 The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a buffer called | |
| 2178 {expr} exists and is listed (has the 'buflisted' option set). | |
| 9 | 2179 The {expr} argument is used like with |bufexists()|. |
| 7 | 2180 |
| 2181 bufloaded({expr}) *bufloaded()* | |
| 2182 The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a buffer called | |
| 2183 {expr} exists and is loaded (shown in a window or hidden). | |
| 9 | 2184 The {expr} argument is used like with |bufexists()|. |
| 7 | 2185 |
| 2186 bufname({expr}) *bufname()* | |
| 2187 The result is the name of a buffer, as it is displayed by the | |
| 2188 ":ls" command. | |
| 2189 If {expr} is a Number, that buffer number's name is given. | |
| 2190 Number zero is the alternate buffer for the current window. | |
| 2191 If {expr} is a String, it is used as a |file-pattern| to match | |
| 1621 | 2192 with the buffer names. This is always done like 'magic' is |
| 7 | 2193 set and 'cpoptions' is empty. When there is more than one |
| 2194 match an empty string is returned. | |
| 2195 "" or "%" can be used for the current buffer, "#" for the | |
| 2196 alternate buffer. | |
| 2197 A full match is preferred, otherwise a match at the start, end | |
| 1156 | 2198 or middle of the buffer name is accepted. If you only want a |
| 2199 full match then put "^" at the start and "$" at the end of the | |
| 2200 pattern. | |
| 7 | 2201 Listed buffers are found first. If there is a single match |
| 2202 with a listed buffer, that one is returned. Next unlisted | |
| 2203 buffers are searched for. | |
| 2204 If the {expr} is a String, but you want to use it as a buffer | |
| 2205 number, force it to be a Number by adding zero to it: > | |
| 2206 :echo bufname("3" + 0) | |
| 2207 < If the buffer doesn't exist, or doesn't have a name, an empty | |
| 2208 string is returned. > | |
| 2209 bufname("#") alternate buffer name | |
| 2210 bufname(3) name of buffer 3 | |
| 2211 bufname("%") name of current buffer | |
| 2212 bufname("file2") name of buffer where "file2" matches. | |
| 2213 < *buffer_name()* | |
| 2214 Obsolete name: buffer_name(). | |
| 2215 | |
| 2216 *bufnr()* | |
| 707 | 2217 bufnr({expr} [, {create}]) |
| 2218 The result is the number of a buffer, as it is displayed by | |
| 7 | 2219 the ":ls" command. For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| |
| 707 | 2220 above. |
| 2221 If the buffer doesn't exist, -1 is returned. Or, if the | |
| 2222 {create} argument is present and not zero, a new, unlisted, | |
| 2223 buffer is created and its number is returned. | |
| 7 | 2224 bufnr("$") is the last buffer: > |
| 2225 :let last_buffer = bufnr("$") | |
| 2226 < The result is a Number, which is the highest buffer number | |
| 2227 of existing buffers. Note that not all buffers with a smaller | |
| 2228 number necessarily exist, because ":bwipeout" may have removed | |
| 2229 them. Use bufexists() to test for the existence of a buffer. | |
| 2230 *buffer_number()* | |
| 2231 Obsolete name: buffer_number(). | |
| 2232 *last_buffer_nr()* | |
| 2233 Obsolete name for bufnr("$"): last_buffer_nr(). | |
| 2234 | |
| 2235 bufwinnr({expr}) *bufwinnr()* | |
| 2236 The result is a Number, which is the number of the first | |
| 2237 window associated with buffer {expr}. For the use of {expr}, | |
| 1621 | 2238 see |bufname()| above. If buffer {expr} doesn't exist or |
| 7 | 2239 there is no such window, -1 is returned. Example: > |
| 2240 | |
| 2241 echo "A window containing buffer 1 is " . (bufwinnr(1)) | |
| 2242 | |
| 2243 < The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w" | |
| 2244 |:wincmd|. | |
| 1156 | 2245 Only deals with the current tab page. |
| 7 | 2246 |
| 2247 | |
| 2248 byte2line({byte}) *byte2line()* | |
| 2249 Return the line number that contains the character at byte | |
| 2250 count {byte} in the current buffer. This includes the | |
| 2251 end-of-line character, depending on the 'fileformat' option | |
| 2252 for the current buffer. The first character has byte count | |
| 2253 one. | |
| 2254 Also see |line2byte()|, |go| and |:goto|. | |
| 2255 {not available when compiled without the |+byte_offset| | |
| 2256 feature} | |
| 2257 | |
| 18 | 2258 byteidx({expr}, {nr}) *byteidx()* |
| 2259 Return byte index of the {nr}'th character in the string | |
| 2260 {expr}. Use zero for the first character, it returns zero. | |
| 2261 This function is only useful when there are multibyte | |
| 2262 characters, otherwise the returned value is equal to {nr}. | |
| 2263 Composing characters are counted as a separate character. | |
| 2264 Example : > | |
| 2265 echo matchstr(str, ".", byteidx(str, 3)) | |
| 2266 < will display the fourth character. Another way to do the | |
| 2267 same: > | |
| 2268 let s = strpart(str, byteidx(str, 3)) | |
| 2269 echo strpart(s, 0, byteidx(s, 1)) | |
| 2270 < If there are less than {nr} characters -1 is returned. | |
| 2271 If there are exactly {nr} characters the length of the string | |
| 2272 is returned. | |
| 2273 | |
| 102 | 2274 call({func}, {arglist} [, {dict}]) *call()* *E699* |
| 685 | 2275 Call function {func} with the items in |List| {arglist} as |
| 79 | 2276 arguments. |
| 685 | 2277 {func} can either be a |Funcref| or the name of a function. |
| 79 | 2278 a:firstline and a:lastline are set to the cursor line. |
| 2279 Returns the return value of the called function. | |
| 102 | 2280 {dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute. It will be |
| 2281 used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function| | |
| 79 | 2282 |
| 1621 | 2283 ceil({expr}) *ceil()* |
| 2284 Return the smallest integral value greater than or equal to | |
| 2285 {expr} as a |Float| (round up). | |
| 2286 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 2287 Examples: > | |
| 2288 echo ceil(1.456) | |
| 2289 < 2.0 > | |
| 2290 echo ceil(-5.456) | |
| 2291 < -5.0 > | |
| 2292 echo ceil(4.0) | |
| 2293 < 4.0 | |
| 2294 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 2295 | |
| 777 | 2296 changenr() *changenr()* |
| 2297 Return the number of the most recent change. This is the same | |
| 2298 number as what is displayed with |:undolist| and can be used | |
| 2299 with the |:undo| command. | |
| 2300 When a change was made it is the number of that change. After | |
| 2301 redo it is the number of the redone change. After undo it is | |
| 2302 one less than the number of the undone change. | |
| 2303 | |
| 4051 | 2304 char2nr({expr}[, {utf8}]) *char2nr()* |
| 7 | 2305 Return number value of the first char in {expr}. Examples: > |
| 2306 char2nr(" ") returns 32 | |
| 2307 char2nr("ABC") returns 65 | |
| 4051 | 2308 < When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used. |
| 2309 Example for "utf-8": > | |
| 1156 | 2310 char2nr("á") returns 225 |
| 2311 char2nr("á"[0]) returns 195 | |
| 4051 | 2312 < With {utf8} set to 1, always treat as utf-8 characters. |
| 2313 A combining character is a separate character. | |
| 2965 | 2314 |nr2char()| does the opposite. |
| 7 | 2315 |
| 2316 cindent({lnum}) *cindent()* | |
| 2317 Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the C | |
| 2318 indenting rules, as with 'cindent'. | |
| 2319 The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is | |
| 2320 relevant. {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|. | |
| 2321 When {lnum} is invalid or Vim was not compiled the |+cindent| | |
| 2322 feature, -1 is returned. | |
| 548 | 2323 See |C-indenting|. |
| 7 | 2324 |
| 1326 | 2325 clearmatches() *clearmatches()* |
| 2326 Clears all matches previously defined by |matchadd()| and the | |
| 2327 |:match| commands. | |
| 2328 | |
| 7 | 2329 *col()* |
| 24 | 2330 col({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the byte index of the column |
| 7 | 2331 position given with {expr}. The accepted positions are: |
| 2332 . the cursor position | |
| 2333 $ the end of the cursor line (the result is the | |
| 3513 | 2334 number of bytes in the cursor line plus one) |
| 7 | 2335 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is |
| 2336 returned) | |
| 1317 | 2337 Additionally {expr} can be [lnum, col]: a |List| with the line |
| 2338 and column number. Most useful when the column is "$", to get | |
| 1621 | 2339 the last column of a specific line. When "lnum" or "col" is |
| 1317 | 2340 out of range then col() returns zero. |
| 1156 | 2341 To get the line number use |line()|. To get both use |
| 703 | 2342 |getpos()|. |
| 7 | 2343 For the screen column position use |virtcol()|. |
| 2344 Note that only marks in the current file can be used. | |
| 2345 Examples: > | |
| 2346 col(".") column of cursor | |
| 2347 col("$") length of cursor line plus one | |
| 2348 col("'t") column of mark t | |
| 2349 col("'" . markname) column of mark markname | |
| 1621 | 2350 < The first column is 1. 0 is returned for an error. |
| 1156 | 2351 For an uppercase mark the column may actually be in another |
| 2352 buffer. | |
| 7 | 2353 For the cursor position, when 'virtualedit' is active, the |
| 2354 column is one higher if the cursor is after the end of the | |
| 2355 line. This can be used to obtain the column in Insert mode: > | |
| 2356 :imap <F2> <C-O>:let save_ve = &ve<CR> | |
| 2357 \<C-O>:set ve=all<CR> | |
| 2358 \<C-O>:echo col(".") . "\n" <Bar> | |
| 2359 \let &ve = save_ve<CR> | |
| 2360 < | |
| 464 | 2361 |
| 724 | 2362 complete({startcol}, {matches}) *complete()* *E785* |
| 2363 Set the matches for Insert mode completion. | |
| 2364 Can only be used in Insert mode. You need to use a mapping | |
| 1156 | 2365 with CTRL-R = |i_CTRL-R|. It does not work after CTRL-O or |
| 2366 with an expression mapping. | |
| 724 | 2367 {startcol} is the byte offset in the line where the completed |
| 2368 text start. The text up to the cursor is the original text | |
| 2369 that will be replaced by the matches. Use col('.') for an | |
| 2370 empty string. "col('.') - 1" will replace one character by a | |
| 2371 match. | |
| 2372 {matches} must be a |List|. Each |List| item is one match. | |
| 2373 See |complete-items| for the kind of items that are possible. | |
| 2374 Note that the after calling this function you need to avoid | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
2375 inserting anything that would cause completion to stop. |
| 724 | 2376 The match can be selected with CTRL-N and CTRL-P as usual with |
| 2377 Insert mode completion. The popup menu will appear if | |
| 2378 specified, see |ins-completion-menu|. | |
| 2379 Example: > | |
| 1156 | 2380 inoremap <F5> <C-R>=ListMonths()<CR> |
| 724 | 2381 |
| 2382 func! ListMonths() | |
| 2383 call complete(col('.'), ['January', 'February', 'March', | |
| 2384 \ 'April', 'May', 'June', 'July', 'August', 'September', | |
| 2385 \ 'October', 'November', 'December']) | |
| 2386 return '' | |
| 2387 endfunc | |
| 2388 < This isn't very useful, but it shows how it works. Note that | |
| 2389 an empty string is returned to avoid a zero being inserted. | |
| 2390 | |
| 464 | 2391 complete_add({expr}) *complete_add()* |
| 2392 Add {expr} to the list of matches. Only to be used by the | |
| 2393 function specified with the 'completefunc' option. | |
| 2394 Returns 0 for failure (empty string or out of memory), | |
| 2395 1 when the match was added, 2 when the match was already in | |
| 2396 the list. | |
| 1621 | 2397 See |complete-functions| for an explanation of {expr}. It is |
| 786 | 2398 the same as one item in the list that 'omnifunc' would return. |
| 464 | 2399 |
| 2400 complete_check() *complete_check()* | |
| 2401 Check for a key typed while looking for completion matches. | |
| 2402 This is to be used when looking for matches takes some time. | |
| 2403 Returns non-zero when searching for matches is to be aborted, | |
| 2404 zero otherwise. | |
| 2405 Only to be used by the function specified with the | |
| 2406 'completefunc' option. | |
| 2407 | |
| 7 | 2408 *confirm()* |
| 2409 confirm({msg} [, {choices} [, {default} [, {type}]]]) | |
| 2410 Confirm() offers the user a dialog, from which a choice can be | |
| 2411 made. It returns the number of the choice. For the first | |
| 2412 choice this is 1. | |
| 2413 Note: confirm() is only supported when compiled with dialog | |
| 2414 support, see |+dialog_con| and |+dialog_gui|. | |
|
2280
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2415 |
| 7 | 2416 {msg} is displayed in a |dialog| with {choices} as the |
| 2417 alternatives. When {choices} is missing or empty, "&OK" is | |
| 2418 used (and translated). | |
| 2419 {msg} is a String, use '\n' to include a newline. Only on | |
| 2420 some systems the string is wrapped when it doesn't fit. | |
|
2280
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2421 |
| 7 | 2422 {choices} is a String, with the individual choices separated |
| 2423 by '\n', e.g. > | |
| 2424 confirm("Save changes?", "&Yes\n&No\n&Cancel") | |
| 2425 < The letter after the '&' is the shortcut key for that choice. | |
| 2426 Thus you can type 'c' to select "Cancel". The shortcut does | |
| 2427 not need to be the first letter: > | |
| 2428 confirm("file has been modified", "&Save\nSave &All") | |
| 2429 < For the console, the first letter of each choice is used as | |
| 2430 the default shortcut key. | |
|
2280
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2431 |
| 7 | 2432 The optional {default} argument is the number of the choice |
| 2433 that is made if the user hits <CR>. Use 1 to make the first | |
| 2434 choice the default one. Use 0 to not set a default. If | |
| 2435 {default} is omitted, 1 is used. | |
|
2280
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2436 |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2437 The optional {type} argument gives the type of dialog. This |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2438 is only used for the icon of the GTK, Mac, Motif and Win32 |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2439 GUI. It can be one of these values: "Error", "Question", |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2440 "Info", "Warning" or "Generic". Only the first character is |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2441 relevant. When {type} is omitted, "Generic" is used. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
2442 |
| 7 | 2443 If the user aborts the dialog by pressing <Esc>, CTRL-C, |
| 2444 or another valid interrupt key, confirm() returns 0. | |
| 2445 | |
| 2446 An example: > | |
| 2447 :let choice = confirm("What do you want?", "&Apples\n&Oranges\n&Bananas", 2) | |
| 2448 :if choice == 0 | |
| 2449 : echo "make up your mind!" | |
| 2450 :elseif choice == 3 | |
| 2451 : echo "tasteful" | |
| 2452 :else | |
| 2453 : echo "I prefer bananas myself." | |
| 2454 :endif | |
| 2455 < In a GUI dialog, buttons are used. The layout of the buttons | |
| 2456 depends on the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'. If it is included, | |
| 1621 | 2457 the buttons are always put vertically. Otherwise, confirm() |
| 7 | 2458 tries to put the buttons in one horizontal line. If they |
| 2459 don't fit, a vertical layout is used anyway. For some systems | |
| 2460 the horizontal layout is always used. | |
| 2461 | |
| 55 | 2462 *copy()* |
| 1621 | 2463 copy({expr}) Make a copy of {expr}. For Numbers and Strings this isn't |
| 55 | 2464 different from using {expr} directly. |
| 685 | 2465 When {expr} is a |List| a shallow copy is created. This means |
| 2466 that the original |List| can be changed without changing the | |
| 1621 | 2467 copy, and vice versa. But the items are identical, thus |
| 2468 changing an item changes the contents of both |Lists|. Also | |
| 685 | 2469 see |deepcopy()|. |
| 55 | 2470 |
| 1621 | 2471 cos({expr}) *cos()* |
| 2472 Return the cosine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|. | |
| 2473 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 2474 Examples: > | |
| 2475 :echo cos(100) | |
| 2476 < 0.862319 > | |
| 2477 :echo cos(-4.01) | |
| 2478 < -0.646043 | |
| 2479 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 2480 | |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2481 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2482 cosh({expr}) *cosh()* |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2483 Return the hyperbolic cosine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2484 [1, inf]. |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2485 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2486 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2487 :echo cosh(0.5) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2488 < 1.127626 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2489 :echo cosh(-0.5) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2490 < -1.127626 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
2491 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2492 |
| 1621 | 2493 |
| 102 | 2494 count({comp}, {expr} [, {ic} [, {start}]]) *count()* |
| 79 | 2495 Return the number of times an item with value {expr} appears |
| 685 | 2496 in |List| or |Dictionary| {comp}. |
| 102 | 2497 If {start} is given then start with the item with this index. |
| 685 | 2498 {start} can only be used with a |List|. |
| 79 | 2499 When {ic} is given and it's non-zero then case is ignored. |
| 2500 | |
| 2501 | |
| 7 | 2502 *cscope_connection()* |
| 2503 cscope_connection([{num} , {dbpath} [, {prepend}]]) | |
| 2504 Checks for the existence of a |cscope| connection. If no | |
| 2505 parameters are specified, then the function returns: | |
| 2506 0, if cscope was not available (not compiled in), or | |
| 2507 if there are no cscope connections; | |
| 2508 1, if there is at least one cscope connection. | |
| 2509 | |
| 2510 If parameters are specified, then the value of {num} | |
| 2511 determines how existence of a cscope connection is checked: | |
| 2512 | |
| 2513 {num} Description of existence check | |
| 2514 ----- ------------------------------ | |
| 2515 0 Same as no parameters (e.g., "cscope_connection()"). | |
| 2516 1 Ignore {prepend}, and use partial string matches for | |
| 2517 {dbpath}. | |
| 2518 2 Ignore {prepend}, and use exact string matches for | |
| 2519 {dbpath}. | |
| 2520 3 Use {prepend}, use partial string matches for both | |
| 2521 {dbpath} and {prepend}. | |
| 2522 4 Use {prepend}, use exact string matches for both | |
| 2523 {dbpath} and {prepend}. | |
| 2524 | |
| 2525 Note: All string comparisons are case sensitive! | |
| 2526 | |
| 2527 Examples. Suppose we had the following (from ":cs show"): > | |
| 2528 | |
| 2529 # pid database name prepend path | |
| 2530 0 27664 cscope.out /usr/local | |
| 2531 < | |
| 2532 Invocation Return Val ~ | |
| 2533 ---------- ---------- > | |
| 2534 cscope_connection() 1 | |
| 2535 cscope_connection(1, "out") 1 | |
| 2536 cscope_connection(2, "out") 0 | |
| 2537 cscope_connection(3, "out") 0 | |
| 2538 cscope_connection(3, "out", "local") 1 | |
| 2539 cscope_connection(4, "out") 0 | |
| 2540 cscope_connection(4, "out", "local") 0 | |
| 2541 cscope_connection(4, "cscope.out", "/usr/local") 1 | |
| 2542 < | |
| 703 | 2543 cursor({lnum}, {col} [, {off}]) *cursor()* |
| 2544 cursor({list}) | |
| 1156 | 2545 Positions the cursor at the column (byte count) {col} in the |
| 2546 line {lnum}. The first column is one. | |
| 703 | 2547 When there is one argument {list} this is used as a |List| |
| 707 | 2548 with two or three items {lnum}, {col} and {off}. This is like |
| 2549 the return value of |getpos()|, but without the first item. | |
| 7 | 2550 Does not change the jumplist. |
| 2551 If {lnum} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer, | |
| 2552 the cursor will be positioned at the last line in the buffer. | |
| 2553 If {lnum} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current line. | |
| 493 | 2554 If {col} is greater than the number of bytes in the line, |
| 7 | 2555 the cursor will be positioned at the last character in the |
| 2556 line. | |
| 2557 If {col} is zero, the cursor will stay in the current column. | |
| 703 | 2558 When 'virtualedit' is used {off} specifies the offset in |
| 2559 screen columns from the start of the character. E.g., a | |
| 1266 | 2560 position within a <Tab> or after the last character. |
| 1851 | 2561 Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise. |
| 7 | 2562 |
| 55 | 2563 |
| 164 | 2564 deepcopy({expr}[, {noref}]) *deepcopy()* *E698* |
| 1621 | 2565 Make a copy of {expr}. For Numbers and Strings this isn't |
| 55 | 2566 different from using {expr} directly. |
| 685 | 2567 When {expr} is a |List| a full copy is created. This means |
| 2568 that the original |List| can be changed without changing the | |
| 1621 | 2569 copy, and vice versa. When an item is a |List|, a copy for it |
| 55 | 2570 is made, recursively. Thus changing an item in the copy does |
| 685 | 2571 not change the contents of the original |List|. |
| 2572 When {noref} is omitted or zero a contained |List| or | |
| 2573 |Dictionary| is only copied once. All references point to | |
| 2574 this single copy. With {noref} set to 1 every occurrence of a | |
| 2575 |List| or |Dictionary| results in a new copy. This also means | |
| 2576 that a cyclic reference causes deepcopy() to fail. | |
| 114 | 2577 *E724* |
| 2578 Nesting is possible up to 100 levels. When there is an item | |
| 164 | 2579 that refers back to a higher level making a deep copy with |
| 2580 {noref} set to 1 will fail. | |
| 55 | 2581 Also see |copy()|. |
| 2582 | |
| 2583 delete({fname}) *delete()* | |
| 2584 Deletes the file by the name {fname}. The result is a Number, | |
| 7 | 2585 which is 0 if the file was deleted successfully, and non-zero |
| 2586 when the deletion failed. | |
| 685 | 2587 Use |remove()| to delete an item from a |List|. |
| 4229 | 2588 To delete a line from the buffer use |:delete|. Use |:exe| |
| 2589 when the line number is in a variable. | |
| 7 | 2590 |
| 2591 *did_filetype()* | |
| 2592 did_filetype() Returns non-zero when autocommands are being executed and the | |
| 2593 FileType event has been triggered at least once. Can be used | |
| 2594 to avoid triggering the FileType event again in the scripts | |
| 2595 that detect the file type. |FileType| | |
| 2596 When editing another file, the counter is reset, thus this | |
| 2597 really checks if the FileType event has been triggered for the | |
| 2598 current buffer. This allows an autocommand that starts | |
| 2599 editing another buffer to set 'filetype' and load a syntax | |
| 2600 file. | |
| 2601 | |
| 32 | 2602 diff_filler({lnum}) *diff_filler()* |
| 2603 Returns the number of filler lines above line {lnum}. | |
| 2604 These are the lines that were inserted at this point in | |
| 2605 another diff'ed window. These filler lines are shown in the | |
| 2606 display but don't exist in the buffer. | |
| 2607 {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current | |
| 2608 line, "'m" mark m, etc. | |
| 2609 Returns 0 if the current window is not in diff mode. | |
| 2610 | |
| 2611 diff_hlID({lnum}, {col}) *diff_hlID()* | |
| 2612 Returns the highlight ID for diff mode at line {lnum} column | |
| 2613 {col} (byte index). When the current line does not have a | |
| 2614 diff change zero is returned. | |
| 2615 {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current | |
| 2616 line, "'m" mark m, etc. | |
| 2617 {col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first | |
| 2618 line. | |
| 2619 The highlight ID can be used with |synIDattr()| to obtain | |
| 2620 syntax information about the highlighting. | |
| 2621 | |
| 85 | 2622 empty({expr}) *empty()* |
| 2623 Return the Number 1 if {expr} is empty, zero otherwise. | |
| 685 | 2624 A |List| or |Dictionary| is empty when it does not have any |
| 1621 | 2625 items. A Number is empty when its value is zero. |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
2626 For a long |List| this is much faster than comparing the |
| 685 | 2627 length with zero. |
| 85 | 2628 |
| 7 | 2629 escape({string}, {chars}) *escape()* |
| 2630 Escape the characters in {chars} that occur in {string} with a | |
| 2631 backslash. Example: > | |
| 2632 :echo escape('c:\program files\vim', ' \') | |
| 2633 < results in: > | |
| 2634 c:\\program\ files\\vim | |
| 1621 | 2635 < Also see |shellescape()|. |
| 2636 | |
| 2637 *eval()* | |
| 95 | 2638 eval({string}) Evaluate {string} and return the result. Especially useful to |
| 2639 turn the result of |string()| back into the original value. | |
| 1621 | 2640 This works for Numbers, Floats, Strings and composites of |
| 2641 them. Also works for |Funcref|s that refer to existing | |
| 2642 functions. | |
| 95 | 2643 |
| 7 | 2644 eventhandler() *eventhandler()* |
| 2645 Returns 1 when inside an event handler. That is that Vim got | |
| 2646 interrupted while waiting for the user to type a character, | |
| 2647 e.g., when dropping a file on Vim. This means interactive | |
| 2648 commands cannot be used. Otherwise zero is returned. | |
| 2649 | |
| 2650 executable({expr}) *executable()* | |
| 2651 This function checks if an executable with the name {expr} | |
| 2652 exists. {expr} must be the name of the program without any | |
| 10 | 2653 arguments. |
| 2654 executable() uses the value of $PATH and/or the normal | |
| 2655 searchpath for programs. *PATHEXT* | |
| 2656 On MS-DOS and MS-Windows the ".exe", ".bat", etc. can | |
| 2657 optionally be included. Then the extensions in $PATHEXT are | |
| 1621 | 2658 tried. Thus if "foo.exe" does not exist, "foo.exe.bat" can be |
| 2659 found. If $PATHEXT is not set then ".exe;.com;.bat;.cmd" is | |
| 10 | 2660 used. A dot by itself can be used in $PATHEXT to try using |
| 1621 | 2661 the name without an extension. When 'shell' looks like a |
| 10 | 2662 Unix shell, then the name is also tried without adding an |
| 2663 extension. | |
| 2664 On MS-DOS and MS-Windows it only checks if the file exists and | |
| 2665 is not a directory, not if it's really executable. | |
| 819 | 2666 On MS-Windows an executable in the same directory as Vim is |
| 2667 always found. Since this directory is added to $PATH it | |
| 2668 should also work to execute it |win32-PATH|. | |
| 7 | 2669 The result is a Number: |
| 2670 1 exists | |
| 2671 0 does not exist | |
| 2672 -1 not implemented on this system | |
| 2673 | |
| 2674 *exists()* | |
| 2675 exists({expr}) The result is a Number, which is non-zero if {expr} is | |
| 2676 defined, zero otherwise. The {expr} argument is a string, | |
| 2677 which contains one of these: | |
| 2678 &option-name Vim option (only checks if it exists, | |
| 2679 not if it really works) | |
| 2680 +option-name Vim option that works. | |
| 2681 $ENVNAME environment variable (could also be | |
| 2682 done by comparing with an empty | |
| 2683 string) | |
| 2684 *funcname built-in function (see |functions|) | |
| 2685 or user defined function (see | |
| 2686 |user-functions|). | |
| 2687 varname internal variable (see | |
| 1621 | 2688 |internal-variables|). Also works |
| 685 | 2689 for |curly-braces-names|, |Dictionary| |
| 2690 entries, |List| items, etc. Beware | |
| 1668 | 2691 that evaluating an index may cause an |
| 2692 error message for an invalid | |
| 2693 expression. E.g.: > | |
| 2694 :let l = [1, 2, 3] | |
| 2695 :echo exists("l[5]") | |
| 2696 < 0 > | |
| 2697 :echo exists("l[xx]") | |
| 2698 < E121: Undefined variable: xx | |
| 2699 0 | |
| 7 | 2700 :cmdname Ex command: built-in command, user |
| 2701 command or command modifier |:command|. | |
| 2702 Returns: | |
| 2703 1 for match with start of a command | |
| 2704 2 full match with a command | |
| 2705 3 matches several user commands | |
| 2706 To check for a supported command | |
| 2707 always check the return value to be 2. | |
| 864 | 2708 :2match The |:2match| command. |
| 2709 :3match The |:3match| command. | |
| 7 | 2710 #event autocommand defined for this event |
| 2711 #event#pattern autocommand defined for this event and | |
| 2712 pattern (the pattern is taken | |
| 2713 literally and compared to the | |
| 2714 autocommand patterns character by | |
| 2715 character) | |
| 613 | 2716 #group autocommand group exists |
| 2717 #group#event autocommand defined for this group and | |
| 2718 event. | |
| 2719 #group#event#pattern | |
| 856 | 2720 autocommand defined for this group, |
| 613 | 2721 event and pattern. |
| 615 | 2722 ##event autocommand for this event is |
| 2723 supported. | |
| 7 | 2724 For checking for a supported feature use |has()|. |
| 2725 | |
| 2726 Examples: > | |
| 2727 exists("&shortname") | |
| 2728 exists("$HOSTNAME") | |
| 2729 exists("*strftime") | |
| 2730 exists("*s:MyFunc") | |
| 2731 exists("bufcount") | |
| 2732 exists(":Make") | |
| 613 | 2733 exists("#CursorHold") |
| 7 | 2734 exists("#BufReadPre#*.gz") |
| 613 | 2735 exists("#filetypeindent") |
| 2736 exists("#filetypeindent#FileType") | |
| 2737 exists("#filetypeindent#FileType#*") | |
| 615 | 2738 exists("##ColorScheme") |
| 7 | 2739 < There must be no space between the symbol (&/$/*/#) and the |
| 2740 name. | |
| 867 | 2741 There must be no extra characters after the name, although in |
| 2742 a few cases this is ignored. That may become more strict in | |
| 2743 the future, thus don't count on it! | |
| 2744 Working example: > | |
| 2745 exists(":make") | |
| 2746 < NOT working example: > | |
| 2747 exists(":make install") | |
| 859 | 2748 |
| 2749 < Note that the argument must be a string, not the name of the | |
| 2750 variable itself. For example: > | |
| 7 | 2751 exists(bufcount) |
| 2752 < This doesn't check for existence of the "bufcount" variable, | |
| 853 | 2753 but gets the value of "bufcount", and checks if that exists. |
| 7 | 2754 |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2755 exp({expr}) *exp()* |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2756 Return the exponential of {expr} as a |Float| in the range |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2757 [0, inf]. |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
2758 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2759 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2760 :echo exp(2) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2761 < 7.389056 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2762 :echo exp(-1) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2763 < 0.367879 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
2764 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2765 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
2766 |
|
3410
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
2767 expand({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]]) *expand()* |
| 7 | 2768 Expand wildcards and the following special keywords in {expr}. |
|
3410
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
2769 'wildignorecase' applies. |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
2770 |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
2771 If {list} is given and it is non-zero, a List will be returned. |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
2772 Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
2773 matches, they are separated by <NL> characters. [Note: in |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
2774 version 5.0 a space was used, which caused problems when a |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
2775 file name contains a space] |
| 7 | 2776 |
| 1621 | 2777 If the expansion fails, the result is an empty string. A name |
| 7 | 2778 for a non-existing file is not included. |
| 2779 | |
| 2780 When {expr} starts with '%', '#' or '<', the expansion is done | |
| 2781 like for the |cmdline-special| variables with their associated | |
| 2782 modifiers. Here is a short overview: | |
| 2783 | |
| 2784 % current file name | |
| 2785 # alternate file name | |
| 2786 #n alternate file name n | |
| 2787 <cfile> file name under the cursor | |
| 2788 <afile> autocmd file name | |
| 2789 <abuf> autocmd buffer number (as a String!) | |
| 2790 <amatch> autocmd matched name | |
| 2791 <sfile> sourced script file name | |
| 2662 | 2792 <slnum> sourced script file line number |
| 7 | 2793 <cword> word under the cursor |
| 2794 <cWORD> WORD under the cursor | |
| 2795 <client> the {clientid} of the last received | |
| 2796 message |server2client()| | |
| 2797 Modifiers: | |
| 2798 :p expand to full path | |
| 2799 :h head (last path component removed) | |
| 2800 :t tail (last path component only) | |
| 2801 :r root (one extension removed) | |
| 2802 :e extension only | |
| 2803 | |
| 2804 Example: > | |
| 2805 :let &tags = expand("%:p:h") . "/tags" | |
| 2806 < Note that when expanding a string that starts with '%', '#' or | |
| 2807 '<', any following text is ignored. This does NOT work: > | |
| 2808 :let doesntwork = expand("%:h.bak") | |
| 2809 < Use this: > | |
| 2810 :let doeswork = expand("%:h") . ".bak" | |
| 2811 < Also note that expanding "<cfile>" and others only returns the | |
| 2812 referenced file name without further expansion. If "<cfile>" | |
| 2813 is "~/.cshrc", you need to do another expand() to have the | |
| 2814 "~/" expanded into the path of the home directory: > | |
| 2815 :echo expand(expand("<cfile>")) | |
| 2816 < | |
| 2817 There cannot be white space between the variables and the | |
| 2818 following modifier. The |fnamemodify()| function can be used | |
| 2819 to modify normal file names. | |
| 2820 | |
| 2821 When using '%' or '#', and the current or alternate file name | |
| 2822 is not defined, an empty string is used. Using "%:p" in a | |
| 2823 buffer with no name, results in the current directory, with a | |
| 2824 '/' added. | |
| 2825 | |
| 2826 When {expr} does not start with '%', '#' or '<', it is | |
| 2827 expanded like a file name is expanded on the command line. | |
| 2828 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' are used, unless the optional | |
| 3398 | 2829 {nosuf} argument is given and it is non-zero. |
| 2830 Names for non-existing files are included. The "**" item can | |
| 2831 be used to search in a directory tree. For example, to find | |
| 2832 all "README" files in the current directory and below: > | |
| 444 | 2833 :echo expand("**/README") |
| 2834 < | |
| 7 | 2835 Expand() can also be used to expand variables and environment |
| 2836 variables that are only known in a shell. But this can be | |
| 1621 | 2837 slow, because a shell must be started. See |expr-env-expand|. |
| 7 | 2838 The expanded variable is still handled like a list of file |
| 1621 | 2839 names. When an environment variable cannot be expanded, it is |
| 7 | 2840 left unchanged. Thus ":echo expand('$FOOBAR')" results in |
| 2841 "$FOOBAR". | |
| 2842 | |
| 2843 See |glob()| for finding existing files. See |system()| for | |
| 2844 getting the raw output of an external command. | |
| 2845 | |
| 102 | 2846 extend({expr1}, {expr2} [, {expr3}]) *extend()* |
| 692 | 2847 {expr1} and {expr2} must be both |Lists| or both |
| 2848 |Dictionaries|. | |
| 2849 | |
| 2850 If they are |Lists|: Append {expr2} to {expr1}. | |
| 102 | 2851 If {expr3} is given insert the items of {expr2} before item |
| 2852 {expr3} in {expr1}. When {expr3} is zero insert before the | |
| 2853 first item. When {expr3} is equal to len({expr1}) then | |
| 2854 {expr2} is appended. | |
| 79 | 2855 Examples: > |
| 2856 :echo sort(extend(mylist, [7, 5])) | |
| 2857 :call extend(mylist, [2, 3], 1) | |
| 1699 | 2858 < When {expr1} is the same List as {expr2} then the number of |
| 2859 items copied is equal to the original length of the List. | |
| 2860 E.g., when {expr3} is 1 you get N new copies of the first item | |
| 2861 (where N is the original length of the List). | |
| 2862 Use |add()| to concatenate one item to a list. To concatenate | |
| 82 | 2863 two lists into a new list use the + operator: > |
| 79 | 2864 :let newlist = [1, 2, 3] + [4, 5] |
| 102 | 2865 < |
| 692 | 2866 If they are |Dictionaries|: |
| 102 | 2867 Add all entries from {expr2} to {expr1}. |
| 2868 If a key exists in both {expr1} and {expr2} then {expr3} is | |
| 2869 used to decide what to do: | |
| 2870 {expr3} = "keep": keep the value of {expr1} | |
| 2871 {expr3} = "force": use the value of {expr2} | |
| 856 | 2872 {expr3} = "error": give an error message *E737* |
| 102 | 2873 When {expr3} is omitted then "force" is assumed. |
| 2874 | |
| 2875 {expr1} is changed when {expr2} is not empty. If necessary | |
| 2876 make a copy of {expr1} first. | |
| 2877 {expr2} remains unchanged. | |
| 2878 Returns {expr1}. | |
| 2879 | |
| 79 | 2880 |
| 842 | 2881 feedkeys({string} [, {mode}]) *feedkeys()* |
| 2882 Characters in {string} are queued for processing as if they | |
| 1621 | 2883 come from a mapping or were typed by the user. They are added |
| 1156 | 2884 to the end of the typeahead buffer, thus if a mapping is still |
| 842 | 2885 being executed these characters come after them. |
| 2886 The function does not wait for processing of keys contained in | |
| 2887 {string}. | |
| 2888 To include special keys into {string}, use double-quotes | |
| 2889 and "\..." notation |expr-quote|. For example, | |
| 1215 | 2890 feedkeys("\<CR>") simulates pressing of the <Enter> key. But |
| 842 | 2891 feedkeys('\<CR>') pushes 5 characters. |
| 2892 If {mode} is absent, keys are remapped. | |
| 2893 {mode} is a String, which can contain these character flags: | |
| 843 | 2894 'm' Remap keys. This is default. |
| 2895 'n' Do not remap keys. | |
| 2896 't' Handle keys as if typed; otherwise they are handled as | |
| 2897 if coming from a mapping. This matters for undo, | |
| 2898 opening folds, etc. | |
| 842 | 2899 Return value is always 0. |
| 2900 | |
| 7 | 2901 filereadable({file}) *filereadable()* |
| 2902 The result is a Number, which is TRUE when a file with the | |
| 2903 name {file} exists, and can be read. If {file} doesn't exist, | |
| 2904 or is a directory, the result is FALSE. {file} is any | |
| 2905 expression, which is used as a String. | |
| 1156 | 2906 If you don't care about the file being readable you can use |
| 2907 |glob()|. | |
| 7 | 2908 *file_readable()* |
| 2909 Obsolete name: file_readable(). | |
| 2910 | |
| 95 | 2911 |
| 1156 | 2912 filewritable({file}) *filewritable()* |
| 2913 The result is a Number, which is 1 when a file with the | |
| 2914 name {file} exists, and can be written. If {file} doesn't | |
| 1621 | 2915 exist, or is not writable, the result is 0. If {file} is a |
| 1156 | 2916 directory, and we can write to it, the result is 2. |
| 2917 | |
| 2918 | |
| 102 | 2919 filter({expr}, {string}) *filter()* |
| 685 | 2920 {expr} must be a |List| or a |Dictionary|. |
| 102 | 2921 For each item in {expr} evaluate {string} and when the result |
| 685 | 2922 is zero remove the item from the |List| or |Dictionary|. |
| 102 | 2923 Inside {string} |v:val| has the value of the current item. |
| 685 | 2924 For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key of the current item. |
| 102 | 2925 Examples: > |
| 2926 :call filter(mylist, 'v:val !~ "OLD"') | |
| 2927 < Removes the items where "OLD" appears. > | |
| 2928 :call filter(mydict, 'v:key >= 8') | |
| 2929 < Removes the items with a key below 8. > | |
| 2930 :call filter(var, 0) | |
| 685 | 2931 < Removes all the items, thus clears the |List| or |Dictionary|. |
| 99 | 2932 |
| 102 | 2933 Note that {string} is the result of expression and is then |
| 2934 used as an expression again. Often it is good to use a | |
| 2935 |literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes. | |
| 2936 | |
| 685 | 2937 The operation is done in-place. If you want a |List| or |
| 2938 |Dictionary| to remain unmodified make a copy first: > | |
| 650 | 2939 :let l = filter(copy(mylist), 'v:val =~ "KEEP"') |
| 102 | 2940 |
| 685 | 2941 < Returns {expr}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered. |
| 648 | 2942 When an error is encountered while evaluating {string} no |
| 2943 further items in {expr} are processed. | |
| 95 | 2944 |
| 2945 | |
| 19 | 2946 finddir({name}[, {path}[, {count}]]) *finddir()* |
| 1095 | 2947 Find directory {name} in {path}. Supports both downwards and |
| 2948 upwards recursive directory searches. See |file-searching| | |
| 2949 for the syntax of {path}. | |
| 2950 Returns the path of the first found match. When the found | |
| 2951 directory is below the current directory a relative path is | |
| 2952 returned. Otherwise a full path is returned. | |
| 19 | 2953 If {path} is omitted or empty then 'path' is used. |
| 2954 If the optional {count} is given, find {count}'s occurrence of | |
| 794 | 2955 {name} in {path} instead of the first one. |
| 809 | 2956 When {count} is negative return all the matches in a |List|. |
| 19 | 2957 This is quite similar to the ex-command |:find|. |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
2958 {only available when compiled with the |+file_in_path| |
|
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
2959 feature} |
| 794 | 2960 |
| 2961 findfile({name}[, {path}[, {count}]]) *findfile()* | |
| 2962 Just like |finddir()|, but find a file instead of a directory. | |
| 2963 Uses 'suffixesadd'. | |
| 19 | 2964 Example: > |
| 2965 :echo findfile("tags.vim", ".;") | |
| 1156 | 2966 < Searches from the directory of the current file upwards until |
| 2967 it finds the file "tags.vim". | |
| 7 | 2968 |
| 1621 | 2969 float2nr({expr}) *float2nr()* |
| 2970 Convert {expr} to a Number by omitting the part after the | |
| 2971 decimal point. | |
| 2972 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a Number. | |
| 2973 When the value of {expr} is out of range for a |Number| the | |
| 2974 result is truncated to 0x7fffffff or -0x7fffffff. NaN results | |
| 2975 in -0x80000000. | |
| 2976 Examples: > | |
| 2977 echo float2nr(3.95) | |
| 2978 < 3 > | |
| 2979 echo float2nr(-23.45) | |
| 2980 < -23 > | |
| 2981 echo float2nr(1.0e100) | |
| 2982 < 2147483647 > | |
| 2983 echo float2nr(-1.0e150) | |
| 2984 < -2147483647 > | |
| 2985 echo float2nr(1.0e-100) | |
| 2986 < 0 | |
| 2987 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 2988 | |
| 2989 | |
| 2990 floor({expr}) *floor()* | |
| 2991 Return the largest integral value less than or equal to | |
| 2992 {expr} as a |Float| (round down). | |
| 2993 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 2994 Examples: > | |
| 2995 echo floor(1.856) | |
| 2996 < 1.0 > | |
| 2997 echo floor(-5.456) | |
| 2998 < -6.0 > | |
| 2999 echo floor(4.0) | |
| 3000 < 4.0 | |
| 3001 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 3002 | |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3003 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3004 fmod({expr1}, {expr2}) *fmod()* |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3005 Return the remainder of {expr1} / {expr2}, even if the |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3006 division is not representable. Returns {expr1} - i * {expr2} |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3007 for some integer i such that if {expr2} is non-zero, the |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3008 result has the same sign as {expr1} and magnitude less than |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3009 the magnitude of {expr2}. If {expr2} is zero, the value |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
3010 returned is zero. The value returned is a |Float|. |
|
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
3011 {expr1} and {expr2} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3012 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3013 :echo fmod(12.33, 1.22) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3014 < 0.13 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3015 :echo fmod(-12.33, 1.22) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3016 < -0.13 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
3017 {only available when compiled with |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3018 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
3019 |
| 1586 | 3020 fnameescape({string}) *fnameescape()* |
| 1621 | 3021 Escape {string} for use as file name command argument. All |
| 1586 | 3022 characters that have a special meaning, such as '%' and '|' |
| 3023 are escaped with a backslash. | |
| 1621 | 3024 For most systems the characters escaped are |
| 3025 " \t\n*?[{`$\\%#'\"|!<". For systems where a backslash | |
| 3026 appears in a filename, it depends on the value of 'isfname'. | |
| 1700 | 3027 A leading '+' and '>' is also escaped (special after |:edit| |
| 3028 and |:write|). And a "-" by itself (special after |:cd|). | |
| 1586 | 3029 Example: > |
| 1700 | 3030 :let fname = '+some str%nge|name' |
| 1586 | 3031 :exe "edit " . fnameescape(fname) |
| 3032 < results in executing: > | |
| 1700 | 3033 edit \+some\ str\%nge\|name |
| 1586 | 3034 |
| 7 | 3035 fnamemodify({fname}, {mods}) *fnamemodify()* |
| 3036 Modify file name {fname} according to {mods}. {mods} is a | |
| 3037 string of characters like it is used for file names on the | |
| 3038 command line. See |filename-modifiers|. | |
| 3039 Example: > | |
| 3040 :echo fnamemodify("main.c", ":p:h") | |
| 3041 < results in: > | |
| 3042 /home/mool/vim/vim/src | |
| 1621 | 3043 < Note: Environment variables don't work in {fname}, use |
| 7 | 3044 |expand()| first then. |
| 3045 | |
| 3046 foldclosed({lnum}) *foldclosed()* | |
| 3047 The result is a Number. If the line {lnum} is in a closed | |
| 3048 fold, the result is the number of the first line in that fold. | |
| 3049 If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned. | |
| 3050 | |
| 3051 foldclosedend({lnum}) *foldclosedend()* | |
| 3052 The result is a Number. If the line {lnum} is in a closed | |
| 3053 fold, the result is the number of the last line in that fold. | |
| 3054 If the line {lnum} is not in a closed fold, -1 is returned. | |
| 3055 | |
| 3056 foldlevel({lnum}) *foldlevel()* | |
| 3057 The result is a Number, which is the foldlevel of line {lnum} | |
| 1621 | 3058 in the current buffer. For nested folds the deepest level is |
| 7 | 3059 returned. If there is no fold at line {lnum}, zero is |
| 3060 returned. It doesn't matter if the folds are open or closed. | |
| 3061 When used while updating folds (from 'foldexpr') -1 is | |
| 3062 returned for lines where folds are still to be updated and the | |
| 3063 foldlevel is unknown. As a special case the level of the | |
| 3064 previous line is usually available. | |
| 3065 | |
| 3066 *foldtext()* | |
| 3067 foldtext() Returns a String, to be displayed for a closed fold. This is | |
| 3068 the default function used for the 'foldtext' option and should | |
| 3069 only be called from evaluating 'foldtext'. It uses the | |
| 3070 |v:foldstart|, |v:foldend| and |v:folddashes| variables. | |
| 3071 The returned string looks like this: > | |
| 3072 +-- 45 lines: abcdef | |
| 1621 | 3073 < The number of dashes depends on the foldlevel. The "45" is |
| 7 | 3074 the number of lines in the fold. "abcdef" is the text in the |
| 3075 first non-blank line of the fold. Leading white space, "//" | |
| 3076 or "/*" and the text from the 'foldmarker' and 'commentstring' | |
| 3077 options is removed. | |
| 3078 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} | |
| 3079 | |
| 29 | 3080 foldtextresult({lnum}) *foldtextresult()* |
| 3081 Returns the text that is displayed for the closed fold at line | |
| 3082 {lnum}. Evaluates 'foldtext' in the appropriate context. | |
| 3083 When there is no closed fold at {lnum} an empty string is | |
| 3084 returned. | |
| 3085 {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. Thus "." is the current | |
| 3086 line, "'m" mark m, etc. | |
| 3087 Useful when exporting folded text, e.g., to HTML. | |
| 3088 {not available when compiled without the |+folding| feature} | |
| 3089 | |
| 7 | 3090 *foreground()* |
| 1621 | 3091 foreground() Move the Vim window to the foreground. Useful when sent from |
| 7 | 3092 a client to a Vim server. |remote_send()| |
| 3093 On Win32 systems this might not work, the OS does not always | |
| 3094 allow a window to bring itself to the foreground. Use | |
| 3095 |remote_foreground()| instead. | |
| 3096 {only in the Win32, Athena, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the | |
| 3097 Win32 console version} | |
| 3098 | |
| 82 | 3099 |
| 85 | 3100 function({name}) *function()* *E700* |
| 685 | 3101 Return a |Funcref| variable that refers to function {name}. |
| 55 | 3102 {name} can be a user defined function or an internal function. |
| 3103 | |
| 82 | 3104 |
| 3224 | 3105 garbagecollect([{atexit}]) *garbagecollect()* |
| 692 | 3106 Cleanup unused |Lists| and |Dictionaries| that have circular |
| 370 | 3107 references. There is hardly ever a need to invoke this |
| 3108 function, as it is automatically done when Vim runs out of | |
| 3109 memory or is waiting for the user to press a key after | |
| 3110 'updatetime'. Items without circular references are always | |
| 3111 freed when they become unused. | |
| 685 | 3112 This is useful if you have deleted a very big |List| and/or |
| 3113 |Dictionary| with circular references in a script that runs | |
| 3114 for a long time. | |
| 3224 | 3115 When the optional {atexit} argument is one, garbage |
| 1405 | 3116 collection will also be done when exiting Vim, if it wasn't |
| 3117 done before. This is useful when checking for memory leaks. | |
| 370 | 3118 |
| 140 | 3119 get({list}, {idx} [, {default}]) *get()* |
| 685 | 3120 Get item {idx} from |List| {list}. When this item is not |
| 82 | 3121 available return {default}. Return zero when {default} is |
| 3122 omitted. | |
| 102 | 3123 get({dict}, {key} [, {default}]) |
| 685 | 3124 Get item with key {key} from |Dictionary| {dict}. When this |
| 102 | 3125 item is not available return {default}. Return zero when |
| 3126 {default} is omitted. | |
| 3127 | |
| 435 | 3128 *getbufline()* |
| 3129 getbufline({expr}, {lnum} [, {end}]) | |
| 685 | 3130 Return a |List| with the lines starting from {lnum} to {end} |
| 3131 (inclusive) in the buffer {expr}. If {end} is omitted, a | |
| 3132 |List| with only the line {lnum} is returned. | |
| 435 | 3133 |
| 3134 For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above. | |
| 3135 | |
| 448 | 3136 For {lnum} and {end} "$" can be used for the last line of the |
| 3137 buffer. Otherwise a number must be used. | |
| 435 | 3138 |
| 3139 When {lnum} is smaller than 1 or bigger than the number of | |
| 685 | 3140 lines in the buffer, an empty |List| is returned. |
| 435 | 3141 |
| 3142 When {end} is greater than the number of lines in the buffer, | |
| 3143 it is treated as {end} is set to the number of lines in the | |
| 685 | 3144 buffer. When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is |
| 435 | 3145 returned. |
| 3146 | |
| 448 | 3147 This function works only for loaded buffers. For unloaded and |
| 685 | 3148 non-existing buffers, an empty |List| is returned. |
| 435 | 3149 |
| 3150 Example: > | |
| 3151 :let lines = getbufline(bufnr("myfile"), 1, "$") | |
| 82 | 3152 |
| 4157 | 3153 getbufvar({expr}, {varname} [, {def}]) *getbufvar()* |
| 82 | 3154 The result is the value of option or local buffer variable |
| 3155 {varname} in buffer {expr}. Note that the name without "b:" | |
| 3156 must be used. | |
| 1668 | 3157 When {varname} is empty returns a dictionary with all the |
| 3158 buffer-local variables. | |
| 216 | 3159 This also works for a global or buffer-local option, but it |
| 3160 doesn't work for a global variable, window-local variable or | |
| 3161 window-local option. | |
| 82 | 3162 For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above. |
| 4157 | 3163 When the buffer or variable doesn't exist {def} or an empty |
| 3164 string is returned, there is no error message. | |
| 82 | 3165 Examples: > |
| 3166 :let bufmodified = getbufvar(1, "&mod") | |
| 3167 :echo "todo myvar = " . getbufvar("todo", "myvar") | |
| 3168 < | |
| 7 | 3169 getchar([expr]) *getchar()* |
| 867 | 3170 Get a single character from the user or input stream. |
| 7 | 3171 If [expr] is omitted, wait until a character is available. |
| 3172 If [expr] is 0, only get a character when one is available. | |
| 867 | 3173 Return zero otherwise. |
| 7 | 3174 If [expr] is 1, only check if a character is available, it is |
| 867 | 3175 not consumed. Return zero if no character available. |
| 3176 | |
| 3177 Without {expr} and when {expr} is 0 a whole character or | |
| 3178 special key is returned. If it is an 8-bit character, the | |
| 3179 result is a number. Use nr2char() to convert it to a String. | |
| 3180 Otherwise a String is returned with the encoded character. | |
| 3181 For a special key it's a sequence of bytes starting with 0x80 | |
| 872 | 3182 (decimal: 128). This is the same value as the string |
| 3183 "\<Key>", e.g., "\<Left>". The returned value is also a | |
| 3184 String when a modifier (shift, control, alt) was used that is | |
| 3185 not included in the character. | |
| 867 | 3186 |
| 3187 When {expr} is 1 only the first byte is returned. For a | |
| 872 | 3188 one-byte character it is the character itself as a number. |
| 3189 Use nr2char() to convert it to a String. | |
| 867 | 3190 |
| 3224 | 3191 Use getcharmod() to obtain any additional modifiers. |
| 3192 | |
| 1029 | 3193 When the user clicks a mouse button, the mouse event will be |
| 3194 returned. The position can then be found in |v:mouse_col|, | |
| 3195 |v:mouse_lnum| and |v:mouse_win|. This example positions the | |
| 3196 mouse as it would normally happen: > | |
| 3197 let c = getchar() | |
| 1621 | 3198 if c == "\<LeftMouse>" && v:mouse_win > 0 |
| 1029 | 3199 exe v:mouse_win . "wincmd w" |
| 3200 exe v:mouse_lnum | |
| 3201 exe "normal " . v:mouse_col . "|" | |
| 3202 endif | |
| 3203 < | |
| 7 | 3204 There is no prompt, you will somehow have to make clear to the |
| 3205 user that a character has to be typed. | |
| 3206 There is no mapping for the character. | |
| 3207 Key codes are replaced, thus when the user presses the <Del> | |
| 3208 key you get the code for the <Del> key, not the raw character | |
| 3209 sequence. Examples: > | |
| 3210 getchar() == "\<Del>" | |
| 3211 getchar() == "\<S-Left>" | |
| 3212 < This example redefines "f" to ignore case: > | |
| 3213 :nmap f :call FindChar()<CR> | |
| 3214 :function FindChar() | |
| 3215 : let c = nr2char(getchar()) | |
| 3216 : while col('.') < col('$') - 1 | |
| 3217 : normal l | |
| 3218 : if getline('.')[col('.') - 1] ==? c | |
| 3219 : break | |
| 3220 : endif | |
| 3221 : endwhile | |
| 3222 :endfunction | |
| 3223 | |
| 3224 getcharmod() *getcharmod()* | |
| 3225 The result is a Number which is the state of the modifiers for | |
| 3226 the last obtained character with getchar() or in another way. | |
| 3227 These values are added together: | |
| 3228 2 shift | |
| 3229 4 control | |
| 3230 8 alt (meta) | |
| 3224 | 3231 16 meta (when it's different from ALT) |
| 3232 32 mouse double click | |
| 3233 64 mouse triple click | |
| 3234 96 mouse quadruple click (== 32 + 64) | |
| 3235 128 command (Macintosh only) | |
| 7 | 3236 Only the modifiers that have not been included in the |
| 1621 | 3237 character itself are obtained. Thus Shift-a results in "A" |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3238 without a modifier. |
| 7 | 3239 |
| 3240 getcmdline() *getcmdline()* | |
| 3241 Return the current command-line. Only works when the command | |
| 3242 line is being edited, thus requires use of |c_CTRL-\_e| or | |
| 3243 |c_CTRL-R_=|. | |
| 3244 Example: > | |
| 3245 :cmap <F7> <C-\>eescape(getcmdline(), ' \')<CR> | |
| 531 | 3246 < Also see |getcmdtype()|, |getcmdpos()| and |setcmdpos()|. |
| 7 | 3247 |
| 95 | 3248 getcmdpos() *getcmdpos()* |
| 7 | 3249 Return the position of the cursor in the command line as a |
| 3250 byte count. The first column is 1. | |
| 3251 Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of | |
| 3456 | 3252 |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping. |
| 3253 Returns 0 otherwise. | |
| 531 | 3254 Also see |getcmdtype()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|. |
| 3255 | |
| 3256 getcmdtype() *getcmdtype()* | |
| 3257 Return the current command-line type. Possible return values | |
| 3258 are: | |
| 532 | 3259 : normal Ex command |
| 3260 > debug mode command |debug-mode| | |
| 3261 / forward search command | |
| 3262 ? backward search command | |
| 3263 @ |input()| command | |
| 3264 - |:insert| or |:append| command | |
| 531 | 3265 Only works when editing the command line, thus requires use of |
| 3456 | 3266 |c_CTRL-\_e| or |c_CTRL-R_=| or an expression mapping. |
| 3267 Returns an empty string otherwise. | |
| 531 | 3268 Also see |getcmdpos()|, |setcmdpos()| and |getcmdline()|. |
| 7 | 3269 |
| 3270 *getcwd()* | |
| 3271 getcwd() The result is a String, which is the name of the current | |
| 3272 working directory. | |
| 3273 | |
| 3274 getfsize({fname}) *getfsize()* | |
| 3275 The result is a Number, which is the size in bytes of the | |
| 3276 given file {fname}. | |
| 3277 If {fname} is a directory, 0 is returned. | |
| 3278 If the file {fname} can't be found, -1 is returned. | |
| 1293 | 3279 If the size of {fname} is too big to fit in a Number then -2 |
| 3280 is returned. | |
| 7 | 3281 |
| 37 | 3282 getfontname([{name}]) *getfontname()* |
| 3283 Without an argument returns the name of the normal font being | |
| 3284 used. Like what is used for the Normal highlight group | |
| 3285 |hl-Normal|. | |
| 3286 With an argument a check is done whether {name} is a valid | |
| 3287 font name. If not then an empty string is returned. | |
| 3288 Otherwise the actual font name is returned, or {name} if the | |
| 3289 GUI does not support obtaining the real name. | |
| 824 | 3290 Only works when the GUI is running, thus not in your vimrc or |
| 819 | 3291 gvimrc file. Use the |GUIEnter| autocommand to use this |
| 3292 function just after the GUI has started. | |
| 37 | 3293 Note that the GTK 2 GUI accepts any font name, thus checking |
| 3294 for a valid name does not work. | |
| 3295 | |
| 20 | 3296 getfperm({fname}) *getfperm()* |
| 3297 The result is a String, which is the read, write, and execute | |
| 3298 permissions of the given file {fname}. | |
| 3299 If {fname} does not exist or its directory cannot be read, an | |
| 3300 empty string is returned. | |
| 3301 The result is of the form "rwxrwxrwx", where each group of | |
| 3302 "rwx" flags represent, in turn, the permissions of the owner | |
| 3303 of the file, the group the file belongs to, and other users. | |
| 3304 If a user does not have a given permission the flag for this | |
| 3750 | 3305 is replaced with the string "-". Examples: > |
| 20 | 3306 :echo getfperm("/etc/passwd") |
| 3750 | 3307 :echo getfperm(expand("~/.vimrc")) |
| 20 | 3308 < This will hopefully (from a security point of view) display |
| 3309 the string "rw-r--r--" or even "rw-------". | |
| 205 | 3310 |
| 7 | 3311 getftime({fname}) *getftime()* |
| 3312 The result is a Number, which is the last modification time of | |
| 3313 the given file {fname}. The value is measured as seconds | |
| 3314 since 1st Jan 1970, and may be passed to strftime(). See also | |
| 3315 |localtime()| and |strftime()|. | |
| 3316 If the file {fname} can't be found -1 is returned. | |
| 3317 | |
| 20 | 3318 getftype({fname}) *getftype()* |
| 3319 The result is a String, which is a description of the kind of | |
| 3320 file of the given file {fname}. | |
| 3321 If {fname} does not exist an empty string is returned. | |
| 3322 Here is a table over different kinds of files and their | |
| 3323 results: | |
| 3324 Normal file "file" | |
| 3325 Directory "dir" | |
| 3326 Symbolic link "link" | |
| 3327 Block device "bdev" | |
| 3328 Character device "cdev" | |
| 3329 Socket "socket" | |
| 3330 FIFO "fifo" | |
| 3331 All other "other" | |
| 3332 Example: > | |
| 3333 getftype("/home") | |
| 3334 < Note that a type such as "link" will only be returned on | |
| 3335 systems that support it. On some systems only "dir" and | |
| 3336 "file" are returned. | |
| 3337 | |
| 7 | 3338 *getline()* |
| 82 | 3339 getline({lnum} [, {end}]) |
| 3340 Without {end} the result is a String, which is line {lnum} | |
| 3341 from the current buffer. Example: > | |
| 7 | 3342 getline(1) |
| 3343 < When {lnum} is a String that doesn't start with a | |
| 3344 digit, line() is called to translate the String into a Number. | |
| 3345 To get the line under the cursor: > | |
| 3346 getline(".") | |
| 3347 < When {lnum} is smaller than 1 or bigger than the number of | |
| 3348 lines in the buffer, an empty string is returned. | |
| 3349 | |
| 685 | 3350 When {end} is given the result is a |List| where each item is |
| 3351 a line from the current buffer in the range {lnum} to {end}, | |
| 82 | 3352 including line {end}. |
| 3353 {end} is used in the same way as {lnum}. | |
| 3354 Non-existing lines are silently omitted. | |
| 685 | 3355 When {end} is before {lnum} an empty |List| is returned. |
| 82 | 3356 Example: > |
| 3357 :let start = line('.') | |
| 3358 :let end = search("^$") - 1 | |
| 3359 :let lines = getline(start, end) | |
| 3360 | |
| 1156 | 3361 < To get lines from another buffer see |getbufline()| |
| 3362 | |
| 647 | 3363 getloclist({nr}) *getloclist()* |
| 3364 Returns a list with all the entries in the location list for | |
| 3365 window {nr}. When {nr} is zero the current window is used. | |
| 3366 For a location list window, the displayed location list is | |
| 648 | 3367 returned. For an invalid window number {nr}, an empty list is |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3368 returned. Otherwise, same as |getqflist()|. |
| 82 | 3369 |
| 1326 | 3370 getmatches() *getmatches()* |
| 3371 Returns a |List| with all matches previously defined by | |
| 3372 |matchadd()| and the |:match| commands. |getmatches()| is | |
| 3373 useful in combination with |setmatches()|, as |setmatches()| | |
| 3374 can restore a list of matches saved by |getmatches()|. | |
| 3375 Example: > | |
| 3376 :echo getmatches() | |
| 3377 < [{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO', | |
| 3378 'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2', | |
| 3379 'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] > | |
| 3380 :let m = getmatches() | |
| 3381 :call clearmatches() | |
| 3382 :echo getmatches() | |
| 3383 < [] > | |
| 3384 :call setmatches(m) | |
| 3385 :echo getmatches() | |
| 3386 < [{'group': 'MyGroup1', 'pattern': 'TODO', | |
| 3387 'priority': 10, 'id': 1}, {'group': 'MyGroup2', | |
| 3388 'pattern': 'FIXME', 'priority': 10, 'id': 2}] > | |
| 3389 :unlet m | |
| 3390 < | |
| 3391 | |
| 230 | 3392 getqflist() *getqflist()* |
| 3393 Returns a list with all the current quickfix errors. Each | |
| 3394 list item is a dictionary with these entries: | |
| 3395 bufnr number of buffer that has the file name, use | |
| 3396 bufname() to get the name | |
| 3397 lnum line number in the buffer (first line is 1) | |
| 3398 col column number (first column is 1) | |
| 233 | 3399 vcol non-zero: "col" is visual column |
| 3400 zero: "col" is byte index | |
| 230 | 3401 nr error number |
| 1065 | 3402 pattern search pattern used to locate the error |
| 230 | 3403 text description of the error |
| 3404 type type of the error, 'E', '1', etc. | |
| 3405 valid non-zero: recognized error message | |
| 3406 | |
| 515 | 3407 When there is no error list or it's empty an empty list is |
| 1065 | 3408 returned. Quickfix list entries with non-existing buffer |
| 3409 number are returned with "bufnr" set to zero. | |
| 515 | 3410 |
| 230 | 3411 Useful application: Find pattern matches in multiple files and |
| 3412 do something with them: > | |
| 3413 :vimgrep /theword/jg *.c | |
| 3414 :for d in getqflist() | |
| 3415 : echo bufname(d.bufnr) ':' d.lnum '=' d.text | |
| 3416 :endfor | |
| 3417 | |
| 3418 | |
| 282 | 3419 getreg([{regname} [, 1]]) *getreg()* |
| 7 | 3420 The result is a String, which is the contents of register |
| 236 | 3421 {regname}. Example: > |
| 7 | 3422 :let cliptext = getreg('*') |
| 3423 < getreg('=') returns the last evaluated value of the expression | |
| 236 | 3424 register. (For use in maps.) |
| 282 | 3425 getreg('=', 1) returns the expression itself, so that it can |
| 3426 be restored with |setreg()|. For other registers the extra | |
| 3427 argument is ignored, thus you can always give it. | |
| 7 | 3428 If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used. |
| 3429 | |
| 82 | 3430 |
| 7 | 3431 getregtype([{regname}]) *getregtype()* |
| 3432 The result is a String, which is type of register {regname}. | |
| 3433 The value will be one of: | |
| 3434 "v" for |characterwise| text | |
| 3435 "V" for |linewise| text | |
| 3436 "<CTRL-V>{width}" for |blockwise-visual| text | |
| 3437 0 for an empty or unknown register | |
| 3438 <CTRL-V> is one character with value 0x16. | |
| 3439 If {regname} is not specified, |v:register| is used. | |
| 3440 | |
| 4157 | 3441 gettabvar({tabnr}, {varname} [, {def}]) *gettabvar()* |
|
2207
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
3442 Get the value of a tab-local variable {varname} in tab page |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
3443 {tabnr}. |t:var| |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
3444 Tabs are numbered starting with one. |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
3445 Note that the name without "t:" must be used. |
| 4157 | 3446 When the tab or variable doesn't exist {def} or an empty |
| 3447 string is returned, there is no error message. | |
| 3448 | |
| 3449 gettabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname} [, {def}]) *gettabwinvar()* | |
| 1156 | 3450 Get the value of window-local variable {varname} in window |
| 3451 {winnr} in tab page {tabnr}. | |
| 3452 When {varname} starts with "&" get the value of a window-local | |
| 3453 option. | |
| 4157 | 3454 When {varname} is empty a dictionary with all window-local |
| 3455 variables is returned. | |
| 3456 Note that {varname} must be the name without "w:". | |
| 831 | 3457 Tabs are numbered starting with one. For the current tabpage |
| 3458 use |getwinvar()|. | |
| 3459 When {winnr} is zero the current window is used. | |
| 3460 This also works for a global option, buffer-local option and | |
| 3461 window-local option, but it doesn't work for a global variable | |
| 3462 or buffer-local variable. | |
| 4157 | 3463 When the tab, window or variable doesn't exist {def} or an |
| 3464 empty string is returned, there is no error message. | |
| 831 | 3465 Examples: > |
| 3466 :let list_is_on = gettabwinvar(1, 2, '&list') | |
| 3467 :echo "myvar = " . gettabwinvar(3, 1, 'myvar') | |
| 1266 | 3468 < |
| 7 | 3469 *getwinposx()* |
| 3470 getwinposx() The result is a Number, which is the X coordinate in pixels of | |
| 3471 the left hand side of the GUI Vim window. The result will be | |
| 3472 -1 if the information is not available. | |
| 3473 | |
| 3474 *getwinposy()* | |
| 3475 getwinposy() The result is a Number, which is the Y coordinate in pixels of | |
| 1621 | 3476 the top of the GUI Vim window. The result will be -1 if the |
| 7 | 3477 information is not available. |
| 3478 | |
| 4157 | 3479 getwinvar({winnr}, {varname} [, {def}]) *getwinvar()* |
| 831 | 3480 Like |gettabwinvar()| for the current tabpage. |
| 7 | 3481 Examples: > |
| 3482 :let list_is_on = getwinvar(2, '&list') | |
| 3483 :echo "myvar = " . getwinvar(1, 'myvar') | |
| 3484 < | |
|
3410
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
3485 glob({expr} [, {nosuf} [, {list}]]) *glob()* |
| 1754 | 3486 Expand the file wildcards in {expr}. See |wildcards| for the |
| 1156 | 3487 use of special characters. |
|
3410
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
3488 |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
3489 Unless the optional {nosuf} argument is given and is non-zero, |
| 1754 | 3490 the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching |
| 3491 one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and | |
| 3492 'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches. | |
| 2662 | 3493 'wildignorecase' always applies. |
|
3410
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
3494 |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
3495 When {list} is present and it is non-zero the result is a List |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
3496 with all matching files. The advantage of using a List is, |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
3497 you also get filenames containing newlines correctly. |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
3498 Otherwise the result is a String and when there are several |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
3499 matches, they are separated by <NL> characters. |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
3500 |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
3501 If the expansion fails, the result is an empty String or List. |
| 3445 | 3502 A name for a non-existing file is not included. A symbolic |
| 3503 link is only included if it points to an existing file. | |
| 7 | 3504 |
| 3505 For most systems backticks can be used to get files names from | |
| 3506 any external command. Example: > | |
| 3507 :let tagfiles = glob("`find . -name tags -print`") | |
| 3508 :let &tags = substitute(tagfiles, "\n", ",", "g") | |
| 3509 < The result of the program inside the backticks should be one | |
| 1621 | 3510 item per line. Spaces inside an item are allowed. |
| 7 | 3511 |
| 3512 See |expand()| for expanding special Vim variables. See | |
| 3513 |system()| for getting the raw output of an external command. | |
| 3514 | |
| 1754 | 3515 globpath({path}, {expr} [, {flag}]) *globpath()* |
| 7 | 3516 Perform glob() on all directories in {path} and concatenate |
| 3517 the results. Example: > | |
| 3518 :echo globpath(&rtp, "syntax/c.vim") | |
| 3519 < {path} is a comma-separated list of directory names. Each | |
| 3520 directory name is prepended to {expr} and expanded like with | |
| 1754 | 3521 |glob()|. A path separator is inserted when needed. |
| 7 | 3522 To add a comma inside a directory name escape it with a |
| 3523 backslash. Note that on MS-Windows a directory may have a | |
| 3524 trailing backslash, remove it if you put a comma after it. | |
| 3525 If the expansion fails for one of the directories, there is no | |
| 3526 error message. | |
| 1754 | 3527 Unless the optional {flag} argument is given and is non-zero, |
| 3528 the 'suffixes' and 'wildignore' options apply: Names matching | |
| 3529 one of the patterns in 'wildignore' will be skipped and | |
| 3530 'suffixes' affect the ordering of matches. | |
| 7 | 3531 |
| 444 | 3532 The "**" item can be used to search in a directory tree. |
| 3533 For example, to find all "README.txt" files in the directories | |
| 3534 in 'runtimepath' and below: > | |
| 3535 :echo globpath(&rtp, "**/README.txt") | |
| 1668 | 3536 < Upwards search and limiting the depth of "**" is not |
| 3537 supported, thus using 'path' will not always work properly. | |
| 3538 | |
| 7 | 3539 *has()* |
| 3540 has({feature}) The result is a Number, which is 1 if the feature {feature} is | |
| 3541 supported, zero otherwise. The {feature} argument is a | |
| 3542 string. See |feature-list| below. | |
| 3543 Also see |exists()|. | |
| 3544 | |
| 102 | 3545 |
| 3546 has_key({dict}, {key}) *has_key()* | |
| 685 | 3547 The result is a Number, which is 1 if |Dictionary| {dict} has |
| 3548 an entry with key {key}. Zero otherwise. | |
| 102 | 3549 |
| 1104 | 3550 haslocaldir() *haslocaldir()* |
| 3551 The result is a Number, which is 1 when the current | |
| 1621 | 3552 window has set a local path via |:lcd|, and 0 otherwise. |
| 102 | 3553 |
| 782 | 3554 hasmapto({what} [, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) *hasmapto()* |
| 7 | 3555 The result is a Number, which is 1 if there is a mapping that |
| 3556 contains {what} in somewhere in the rhs (what it is mapped to) | |
| 3557 and this mapping exists in one of the modes indicated by | |
| 3558 {mode}. | |
| 782 | 3559 When {abbr} is there and it is non-zero use abbreviations |
| 786 | 3560 instead of mappings. Don't forget to specify Insert and/or |
| 3561 Command-line mode. | |
| 7 | 3562 Both the global mappings and the mappings local to the current |
| 3563 buffer are checked for a match. | |
| 3564 If no matching mapping is found 0 is returned. | |
| 3565 The following characters are recognized in {mode}: | |
| 3566 n Normal mode | |
| 3567 v Visual mode | |
| 3568 o Operator-pending mode | |
| 3569 i Insert mode | |
| 3570 l Language-Argument ("r", "f", "t", etc.) | |
| 3571 c Command-line mode | |
| 3572 When {mode} is omitted, "nvo" is used. | |
| 3573 | |
| 3574 This function is useful to check if a mapping already exists | |
| 1621 | 3575 to a function in a Vim script. Example: > |
| 7 | 3576 :if !hasmapto('\ABCdoit') |
| 3577 : map <Leader>d \ABCdoit | |
| 3578 :endif | |
| 3579 < This installs the mapping to "\ABCdoit" only if there isn't | |
| 3580 already a mapping to "\ABCdoit". | |
| 3581 | |
| 3582 histadd({history}, {item}) *histadd()* | |
| 3583 Add the String {item} to the history {history} which can be | |
| 3584 one of: *hist-names* | |
| 3585 "cmd" or ":" command line history | |
| 3586 "search" or "/" search pattern history | |
| 1621 | 3587 "expr" or "=" typed expression history |
| 7 | 3588 "input" or "@" input line history |
| 3682 | 3589 "debug" or ">" debug command history |
| 3590 The {history} string does not need to be the whole name, one | |
| 3591 character is sufficient. | |
| 7 | 3592 If {item} does already exist in the history, it will be |
| 3593 shifted to become the newest entry. | |
| 3594 The result is a Number: 1 if the operation was successful, | |
| 3595 otherwise 0 is returned. | |
| 3596 | |
| 3597 Example: > | |
| 3598 :call histadd("input", strftime("%Y %b %d")) | |
| 3599 :let date=input("Enter date: ") | |
| 3600 < This function is not available in the |sandbox|. | |
| 3601 | |
| 3602 histdel({history} [, {item}]) *histdel()* | |
| 236 | 3603 Clear {history}, i.e. delete all its entries. See |hist-names| |
| 7 | 3604 for the possible values of {history}. |
| 3605 | |
| 1668 | 3606 If the parameter {item} evaluates to a String, it is used as a |
| 3607 regular expression. All entries matching that expression will | |
| 3608 be removed from the history (if there are any). | |
| 7 | 3609 Upper/lowercase must match, unless "\c" is used |/\c|. |
| 1668 | 3610 If {item} evaluates to a Number, it will be interpreted as |
| 3611 an index, see |:history-indexing|. The respective entry will | |
| 3612 be removed if it exists. | |
| 7 | 3613 |
| 3614 The result is a Number: 1 for a successful operation, | |
| 3615 otherwise 0 is returned. | |
| 3616 | |
| 3617 Examples: | |
| 3618 Clear expression register history: > | |
| 3619 :call histdel("expr") | |
| 3620 < | |
| 3621 Remove all entries starting with "*" from the search history: > | |
| 3622 :call histdel("/", '^\*') | |
| 3623 < | |
| 3624 The following three are equivalent: > | |
| 3625 :call histdel("search", histnr("search")) | |
| 3626 :call histdel("search", -1) | |
| 3627 :call histdel("search", '^'.histget("search", -1).'$') | |
| 3628 < | |
| 3629 To delete the last search pattern and use the last-but-one for | |
| 3630 the "n" command and 'hlsearch': > | |
| 3631 :call histdel("search", -1) | |
| 3632 :let @/ = histget("search", -1) | |
| 3633 | |
| 3634 histget({history} [, {index}]) *histget()* | |
| 3635 The result is a String, the entry with Number {index} from | |
| 3636 {history}. See |hist-names| for the possible values of | |
| 3637 {history}, and |:history-indexing| for {index}. If there is | |
| 3638 no such entry, an empty String is returned. When {index} is | |
| 3639 omitted, the most recent item from the history is used. | |
| 3640 | |
| 3641 Examples: | |
| 3642 Redo the second last search from history. > | |
| 3643 :execute '/' . histget("search", -2) | |
| 3644 | |
| 3645 < Define an Ex command ":H {num}" that supports re-execution of | |
| 3646 the {num}th entry from the output of |:history|. > | |
| 3647 :command -nargs=1 H execute histget("cmd", 0+<args>) | |
| 3648 < | |
| 3649 histnr({history}) *histnr()* | |
| 3650 The result is the Number of the current entry in {history}. | |
| 3651 See |hist-names| for the possible values of {history}. | |
| 3652 If an error occurred, -1 is returned. | |
| 3653 | |
| 3654 Example: > | |
| 3655 :let inp_index = histnr("expr") | |
| 3656 < | |
| 3657 hlexists({name}) *hlexists()* | |
| 3658 The result is a Number, which is non-zero if a highlight group | |
| 3659 called {name} exists. This is when the group has been | |
| 3660 defined in some way. Not necessarily when highlighting has | |
| 3661 been defined for it, it may also have been used for a syntax | |
| 3662 item. | |
| 3663 *highlight_exists()* | |
| 3664 Obsolete name: highlight_exists(). | |
| 3665 | |
| 3666 *hlID()* | |
| 3667 hlID({name}) The result is a Number, which is the ID of the highlight group | |
| 3668 with name {name}. When the highlight group doesn't exist, | |
| 3669 zero is returned. | |
| 3670 This can be used to retrieve information about the highlight | |
| 1621 | 3671 group. For example, to get the background color of the |
| 7 | 3672 "Comment" group: > |
| 3673 :echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(hlID("Comment")), "bg") | |
| 3674 < *highlightID()* | |
| 3675 Obsolete name: highlightID(). | |
| 3676 | |
| 3677 hostname() *hostname()* | |
| 3678 The result is a String, which is the name of the machine on | |
| 236 | 3679 which Vim is currently running. Machine names greater than |
| 7 | 3680 256 characters long are truncated. |
| 3681 | |
| 3682 iconv({expr}, {from}, {to}) *iconv()* | |
| 3683 The result is a String, which is the text {expr} converted | |
| 3684 from encoding {from} to encoding {to}. | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3685 When the conversion completely fails an empty string is |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3686 returned. When some characters could not be converted they |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3687 are replaced with "?". |
| 7 | 3688 The encoding names are whatever the iconv() library function |
| 3689 can accept, see ":!man 3 iconv". | |
| 3690 Most conversions require Vim to be compiled with the |+iconv| | |
| 3691 feature. Otherwise only UTF-8 to latin1 conversion and back | |
| 3692 can be done. | |
| 3693 This can be used to display messages with special characters, | |
| 3694 no matter what 'encoding' is set to. Write the message in | |
| 3695 UTF-8 and use: > | |
| 3696 echo iconv(utf8_str, "utf-8", &enc) | |
| 3697 < Note that Vim uses UTF-8 for all Unicode encodings, conversion | |
| 3698 from/to UCS-2 is automatically changed to use UTF-8. You | |
| 3699 cannot use UCS-2 in a string anyway, because of the NUL bytes. | |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
3700 {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte| feature} |
| 7 | 3701 |
| 3702 *indent()* | |
| 3703 indent({lnum}) The result is a Number, which is indent of line {lnum} in the | |
| 3704 current buffer. The indent is counted in spaces, the value | |
| 3705 of 'tabstop' is relevant. {lnum} is used just like in | |
| 3706 |getline()|. | |
| 3707 When {lnum} is invalid -1 is returned. | |
| 3708 | |
| 79 | 3709 |
| 95 | 3710 index({list}, {expr} [, {start} [, {ic}]]) *index()* |
| 685 | 3711 Return the lowest index in |List| {list} where the item has a |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3712 value equal to {expr}. There is no automatic conversion, so |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3713 the String "4" is different from the Number 4. And the number |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3714 4 is different from the Float 4.0. The value of 'ignorecase' |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3715 is not used here, case always matters. |
| 153 | 3716 If {start} is given then start looking at the item with index |
| 3717 {start} (may be negative for an item relative to the end). | |
| 79 | 3718 When {ic} is given and it is non-zero, ignore case. Otherwise |
| 3719 case must match. | |
| 3720 -1 is returned when {expr} is not found in {list}. | |
| 3721 Example: > | |
| 3722 :let idx = index(words, "the") | |
| 87 | 3723 :if index(numbers, 123) >= 0 |
| 79 | 3724 |
| 3725 | |
| 531 | 3726 input({prompt} [, {text} [, {completion}]]) *input()* |
| 7 | 3727 The result is a String, which is whatever the user typed on |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3728 the command-line. The {prompt} argument is either a prompt |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3729 string, or a blank string (for no prompt). A '\n' can be used |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3730 in the prompt to start a new line. |
| 531 | 3731 The highlighting set with |:echohl| is used for the prompt. |
| 3732 The input is entered just like a command-line, with the same | |
| 1621 | 3733 editing commands and mappings. There is a separate history |
| 531 | 3734 for lines typed for input(). |
| 3735 Example: > | |
| 3736 :if input("Coffee or beer? ") == "beer" | |
| 3737 : echo "Cheers!" | |
| 3738 :endif | |
| 3739 < | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3740 If the optional {text} argument is present and not empty, this |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3741 is used for the default reply, as if the user typed this. |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3742 Example: > |
| 531 | 3743 :let color = input("Color? ", "white") |
| 3744 | |
| 3745 < The optional {completion} argument specifies the type of | |
| 3746 completion supported for the input. Without it completion is | |
| 1621 | 3747 not performed. The supported completion types are the same as |
| 531 | 3748 that can be supplied to a user-defined command using the |
| 1621 | 3749 "-complete=" argument. Refer to |:command-completion| for |
| 531 | 3750 more information. Example: > |
| 3751 let fname = input("File: ", "", "file") | |
| 3752 < | |
| 3753 NOTE: This function must not be used in a startup file, for | |
| 3754 the versions that only run in GUI mode (e.g., the Win32 GUI). | |
| 7 | 3755 Note: When input() is called from within a mapping it will |
| 3756 consume remaining characters from that mapping, because a | |
| 3757 mapping is handled like the characters were typed. | |
| 3758 Use |inputsave()| before input() and |inputrestore()| | |
| 3759 after input() to avoid that. Another solution is to avoid | |
| 3760 that further characters follow in the mapping, e.g., by using | |
| 3761 |:execute| or |:normal|. | |
| 3762 | |
| 531 | 3763 Example with a mapping: > |
| 7 | 3764 :nmap \x :call GetFoo()<CR>:exe "/" . Foo<CR> |
| 3765 :function GetFoo() | |
| 3766 : call inputsave() | |
| 3767 : let g:Foo = input("enter search pattern: ") | |
| 3768 : call inputrestore() | |
| 3769 :endfunction | |
| 3770 | |
| 3771 inputdialog({prompt} [, {text} [, {cancelreturn}]]) *inputdialog()* | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3772 Like |input()|, but when the GUI is running and text dialogs |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3773 are supported, a dialog window pops up to input the text. |
| 7 | 3774 Example: > |
| 3875 | 3775 :let n = inputdialog("value for shiftwidth", shiftwidth()) |
| 3776 :if n != "" | |
| 3777 : let &sw = n | |
| 3778 :endif | |
| 7 | 3779 < When the dialog is cancelled {cancelreturn} is returned. When |
| 3780 omitted an empty string is returned. | |
| 3781 Hitting <Enter> works like pressing the OK button. Hitting | |
| 3782 <Esc> works like pressing the Cancel button. | |
| 531 | 3783 NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported. |
| 7 | 3784 |
| 519 | 3785 inputlist({textlist}) *inputlist()* |
| 819 | 3786 {textlist} must be a |List| of strings. This |List| is |
| 3787 displayed, one string per line. The user will be prompted to | |
| 3788 enter a number, which is returned. | |
| 519 | 3789 The user can also select an item by clicking on it with the |
| 1621 | 3790 mouse. For the first string 0 is returned. When clicking |
| 519 | 3791 above the first item a negative number is returned. When |
| 3792 clicking on the prompt one more than the length of {textlist} | |
| 3793 is returned. | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3794 Make sure {textlist} has less than 'lines' entries, otherwise |
| 1621 | 3795 it won't work. It's a good idea to put the entry number at |
| 1156 | 3796 the start of the string. And put a prompt in the first item. |
| 3797 Example: > | |
| 519 | 3798 let color = inputlist(['Select color:', '1. red', |
| 3799 \ '2. green', '3. blue']) | |
| 3800 | |
| 7 | 3801 inputrestore() *inputrestore()* |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3802 Restore typeahead that was saved with a previous |inputsave()|. |
| 7 | 3803 Should be called the same number of times inputsave() is |
| 3804 called. Calling it more often is harmless though. | |
| 3805 Returns 1 when there is nothing to restore, 0 otherwise. | |
| 3806 | |
| 3807 inputsave() *inputsave()* | |
| 3808 Preserve typeahead (also from mappings) and clear it, so that | |
| 3809 a following prompt gets input from the user. Should be | |
| 3810 followed by a matching inputrestore() after the prompt. Can | |
| 3811 be used several times, in which case there must be just as | |
| 3812 many inputrestore() calls. | |
| 3813 Returns 1 when out of memory, 0 otherwise. | |
| 3814 | |
| 3815 inputsecret({prompt} [, {text}]) *inputsecret()* | |
| 3816 This function acts much like the |input()| function with but | |
| 3817 two exceptions: | |
| 3818 a) the user's response will be displayed as a sequence of | |
| 3819 asterisks ("*") thereby keeping the entry secret, and | |
| 3820 b) the user's response will not be recorded on the input | |
| 3821 |history| stack. | |
| 3822 The result is a String, which is whatever the user actually | |
| 3823 typed on the command-line in response to the issued prompt. | |
| 531 | 3824 NOTE: Command-line completion is not supported. |
| 7 | 3825 |
| 55 | 3826 insert({list}, {item} [, {idx}]) *insert()* |
| 685 | 3827 Insert {item} at the start of |List| {list}. |
| 55 | 3828 If {idx} is specified insert {item} before the item with index |
| 1621 | 3829 {idx}. If {idx} is zero it goes before the first item, just |
| 55 | 3830 like omitting {idx}. A negative {idx} is also possible, see |
| 3831 |list-index|. -1 inserts just before the last item. | |
| 685 | 3832 Returns the resulting |List|. Examples: > |
| 55 | 3833 :let mylist = insert([2, 3, 5], 1) |
| 3834 :call insert(mylist, 4, -1) | |
| 3835 :call insert(mylist, 6, len(mylist)) | |
| 82 | 3836 < The last example can be done simpler with |add()|. |
| 685 | 3837 Note that when {item} is a |List| it is inserted as a single |
| 692 | 3838 item. Use |extend()| to concatenate |Lists|. |
| 55 | 3839 |
| 3214 | 3840 invert({expr}) *invert()* |
| 3841 Bitwise invert. The argument is converted to a number. A | |
| 3842 List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. Example: > | |
| 3843 :let bits = invert(bits) | |
| 3844 | |
| 7 | 3845 isdirectory({directory}) *isdirectory()* |
| 3846 The result is a Number, which is non-zero when a directory | |
| 3847 with the name {directory} exists. If {directory} doesn't | |
| 3848 exist, or isn't a directory, the result is FALSE. {directory} | |
| 3849 is any expression, which is used as a String. | |
| 3850 | |
| 819 | 3851 islocked({expr}) *islocked()* *E786* |
| 148 | 3852 The result is a Number, which is non-zero when {expr} is the |
| 3853 name of a locked variable. | |
| 685 | 3854 {expr} must be the name of a variable, |List| item or |
| 3855 |Dictionary| entry, not the variable itself! Example: > | |
| 148 | 3856 :let alist = [0, ['a', 'b'], 2, 3] |
| 3857 :lockvar 1 alist | |
| 3858 :echo islocked('alist') " 1 | |
| 3859 :echo islocked('alist[1]') " 0 | |
| 3860 | |
| 3861 < When {expr} is a variable that does not exist you get an error | |
| 843 | 3862 message. Use |exists()| to check for existence. |
| 148 | 3863 |
| 140 | 3864 items({dict}) *items()* |
| 685 | 3865 Return a |List| with all the key-value pairs of {dict}. Each |
| 3866 |List| item is a list with two items: the key of a {dict} | |
| 3867 entry and the value of this entry. The |List| is in arbitrary | |
| 3868 order. | |
| 140 | 3869 |
| 95 | 3870 |
| 3871 join({list} [, {sep}]) *join()* | |
| 3872 Join the items in {list} together into one String. | |
| 3873 When {sep} is specified it is put in between the items. If | |
| 3874 {sep} is omitted a single space is used. | |
| 3875 Note that {sep} is not added at the end. You might want to | |
| 3876 add it there too: > | |
| 3877 let lines = join(mylist, "\n") . "\n" | |
| 692 | 3878 < String items are used as-is. |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are |
| 95 | 3879 converted into a string like with |string()|. |
| 3880 The opposite function is |split()|. | |
| 3881 | |
| 99 | 3882 keys({dict}) *keys()* |
| 685 | 3883 Return a |List| with all the keys of {dict}. The |List| is in |
| 99 | 3884 arbitrary order. |
| 3885 | |
| 85 | 3886 *len()* *E701* |
| 55 | 3887 len({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the length of the argument. |
| 3888 When {expr} is a String or a Number the length in bytes is | |
| 3889 used, as with |strlen()|. | |
| 685 | 3890 When {expr} is a |List| the number of items in the |List| is |
| 55 | 3891 returned. |
| 685 | 3892 When {expr} is a |Dictionary| the number of entries in the |
| 3893 |Dictionary| is returned. | |
| 55 | 3894 Otherwise an error is given. |
| 3895 | |
| 7 | 3896 *libcall()* *E364* *E368* |
| 3897 libcall({libname}, {funcname}, {argument}) | |
| 3898 Call function {funcname} in the run-time library {libname} | |
| 3899 with single argument {argument}. | |
| 3900 This is useful to call functions in a library that you | |
| 3901 especially made to be used with Vim. Since only one argument | |
| 3902 is possible, calling standard library functions is rather | |
| 3903 limited. | |
| 3904 The result is the String returned by the function. If the | |
| 3905 function returns NULL, this will appear as an empty string "" | |
| 3906 to Vim. | |
| 3907 If the function returns a number, use libcallnr()! | |
| 3908 If {argument} is a number, it is passed to the function as an | |
| 3909 int; if {argument} is a string, it is passed as a | |
| 3910 null-terminated string. | |
| 3911 This function will fail in |restricted-mode|. | |
| 3912 | |
| 3913 libcall() allows you to write your own 'plug-in' extensions to | |
| 3914 Vim without having to recompile the program. It is NOT a | |
| 3915 means to call system functions! If you try to do so Vim will | |
| 3916 very probably crash. | |
| 3917 | |
| 3918 For Win32, the functions you write must be placed in a DLL | |
| 3919 and use the normal C calling convention (NOT Pascal which is | |
| 3920 used in Windows System DLLs). The function must take exactly | |
| 3921 one parameter, either a character pointer or a long integer, | |
| 3922 and must return a character pointer or NULL. The character | |
| 3923 pointer returned must point to memory that will remain valid | |
| 3924 after the function has returned (e.g. in static data in the | |
| 3925 DLL). If it points to allocated memory, that memory will | |
| 3926 leak away. Using a static buffer in the function should work, | |
| 3927 it's then freed when the DLL is unloaded. | |
| 3928 | |
| 3929 WARNING: If the function returns a non-valid pointer, Vim may | |
| 1621 | 3930 crash! This also happens if the function returns a number, |
| 7 | 3931 because Vim thinks it's a pointer. |
| 3932 For Win32 systems, {libname} should be the filename of the DLL | |
| 3933 without the ".DLL" suffix. A full path is only required if | |
| 3934 the DLL is not in the usual places. | |
| 3935 For Unix: When compiling your own plugins, remember that the | |
| 3936 object code must be compiled as position-independent ('PIC'). | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3937 {only in Win32 and some Unix versions, when the |+libcall| |
| 7 | 3938 feature is present} |
| 3939 Examples: > | |
| 3940 :echo libcall("libc.so", "getenv", "HOME") | |
| 3941 < | |
| 3942 *libcallnr()* | |
| 3943 libcallnr({libname}, {funcname}, {argument}) | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3944 Just like |libcall()|, but used for a function that returns an |
| 7 | 3945 int instead of a string. |
| 3946 {only in Win32 on some Unix versions, when the |+libcall| | |
| 3947 feature is present} | |
| 1621 | 3948 Examples: > |
| 3949 :echo libcallnr("/usr/lib/libc.so", "getpid", "") | |
| 7 | 3950 :call libcallnr("libc.so", "printf", "Hello World!\n") |
| 3951 :call libcallnr("libc.so", "sleep", 10) | |
| 3952 < | |
| 3953 *line()* | |
| 3954 line({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the line number of the file | |
| 3955 position given with {expr}. The accepted positions are: | |
| 3956 . the cursor position | |
| 3957 $ the last line in the current buffer | |
| 3958 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is | |
| 3959 returned) | |
| 665 | 3960 w0 first line visible in current window |
| 3961 w$ last line visible in current window | |
| 1609 | 3962 v In Visual mode: the start of the Visual area (the |
| 3963 cursor is the end). When not in Visual mode | |
| 3964 returns the cursor position. Differs from |'<| in | |
| 3965 that it's updated right away. | |
| 1156 | 3966 Note that a mark in another file can be used. The line number |
| 3967 then applies to another buffer. | |
| 703 | 3968 To get the column number use |col()|. To get both use |
| 3969 |getpos()|. | |
| 7 | 3970 Examples: > |
| 3971 line(".") line number of the cursor | |
| 3972 line("'t") line number of mark t | |
| 3973 line("'" . marker) line number of mark marker | |
| 3974 < *last-position-jump* | |
| 3975 This autocommand jumps to the last known position in a file | |
| 3976 just after opening it, if the '" mark is set: > | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
3977 :au BufReadPost * if line("'\"") > 1 && line("'\"") <= line("$") | exe "normal! g`\"" | endif |
| 9 | 3978 |
| 7 | 3979 line2byte({lnum}) *line2byte()* |
| 3980 Return the byte count from the start of the buffer for line | |
| 3981 {lnum}. This includes the end-of-line character, depending on | |
| 3982 the 'fileformat' option for the current buffer. The first | |
| 3237 | 3983 line returns 1. 'encoding' matters, 'fileencoding' is ignored. |
| 7 | 3984 This can also be used to get the byte count for the line just |
| 3985 below the last line: > | |
| 3986 line2byte(line("$") + 1) | |
| 3237 | 3987 < This is the buffer size plus one. If 'fileencoding' is empty |
| 3988 it is the file size plus one. | |
| 7 | 3989 When {lnum} is invalid, or the |+byte_offset| feature has been |
| 3990 disabled at compile time, -1 is returned. | |
| 3991 Also see |byte2line()|, |go| and |:goto|. | |
| 3992 | |
| 3993 lispindent({lnum}) *lispindent()* | |
| 3994 Get the amount of indent for line {lnum} according the lisp | |
| 3995 indenting rules, as with 'lisp'. | |
| 3996 The indent is counted in spaces, the value of 'tabstop' is | |
| 3997 relevant. {lnum} is used just like in |getline()|. | |
| 3998 When {lnum} is invalid or Vim was not compiled the | |
| 3999 |+lispindent| feature, -1 is returned. | |
| 4000 | |
| 4001 localtime() *localtime()* | |
| 4002 Return the current time, measured as seconds since 1st Jan | |
| 4003 1970. See also |strftime()| and |getftime()|. | |
| 4004 | |
| 95 | 4005 |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4006 log({expr}) *log()* |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
4007 Return the natural logarithm (base e) of {expr} as a |Float|. |
|
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
4008 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number| in the range |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4009 (0, inf]. |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4010 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4011 :echo log(10) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4012 < 2.302585 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4013 :echo log(exp(5)) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4014 < 5.0 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
4015 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4016 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
4017 |
| 1621 | 4018 log10({expr}) *log10()* |
| 4019 Return the logarithm of Float {expr} to base 10 as a |Float|. | |
| 4020 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 4021 Examples: > | |
| 4022 :echo log10(1000) | |
| 4023 < 3.0 > | |
| 4024 :echo log10(0.01) | |
| 4025 < -2.0 | |
| 4026 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 4027 | |
| 3492 | 4028 luaeval({expr}[, {expr}]) *luaeval()* |
| 4029 Evaluate Lua expression {expr} and return its result converted | |
| 4030 to Vim data structures. Second {expr} may hold additional | |
| 4031 argument accessible as _A inside first {expr}. | |
| 4032 Strings are returned as they are. | |
| 4033 Boolean objects are converted to numbers. | |
| 4034 Numbers are converted to |Float| values if vim was compiled | |
| 4035 with |+float| and to numbers otherwise. | |
| 4036 Dictionaries and lists obtained by vim.eval() are returned | |
| 4037 as-is. | |
| 4038 Other objects are returned as zero without any errors. | |
| 4039 See |lua-luaeval| for more details. | |
| 4040 {only available when compiled with the |+lua| feature} | |
| 4041 | |
| 102 | 4042 map({expr}, {string}) *map()* |
| 685 | 4043 {expr} must be a |List| or a |Dictionary|. |
| 102 | 4044 Replace each item in {expr} with the result of evaluating |
| 4045 {string}. | |
| 4046 Inside {string} |v:val| has the value of the current item. | |
| 1998 | 4047 For a |Dictionary| |v:key| has the key of the current item |
| 4048 and for a |List| |v:key| has the index of the current item. | |
| 102 | 4049 Example: > |
| 4050 :call map(mylist, '"> " . v:val . " <"') | |
| 95 | 4051 < This puts "> " before and " <" after each item in "mylist". |
| 102 | 4052 |
| 158 | 4053 Note that {string} is the result of an expression and is then |
| 102 | 4054 used as an expression again. Often it is good to use a |
| 158 | 4055 |literal-string| to avoid having to double backslashes. You |
| 4056 still have to double ' quotes | |
| 102 | 4057 |
| 685 | 4058 The operation is done in-place. If you want a |List| or |
| 4059 |Dictionary| to remain unmodified make a copy first: > | |
| 3682 | 4060 :let tlist = map(copy(mylist), ' v:val . "\t"') |
| 102 | 4061 |
| 685 | 4062 < Returns {expr}, the |List| or |Dictionary| that was filtered. |
| 648 | 4063 When an error is encountered while evaluating {string} no |
| 4064 further items in {expr} are processed. | |
| 95 | 4065 |
| 4066 | |
| 2610 | 4067 maparg({name}[, {mode} [, {abbr} [, {dict}]]]) *maparg()* |
| 4068 When {dict} is omitted or zero: Return the rhs of mapping | |
| 4069 {name} in mode {mode}. The returned String has special | |
| 4070 characters translated like in the output of the ":map" command | |
| 4071 listing. | |
| 4072 | |
| 4073 When there is no mapping for {name}, an empty String is | |
| 4074 returned. | |
| 4075 | |
| 4076 The {name} can have special key names, like in the ":map" | |
| 4077 command. | |
| 4078 | |
| 644 | 4079 {mode} can be one of these strings: |
| 7 | 4080 "n" Normal |
| 2610 | 4081 "v" Visual (including Select) |
| 7 | 4082 "o" Operator-pending |
| 4083 "i" Insert | |
| 4084 "c" Cmd-line | |
| 2610 | 4085 "s" Select |
| 4086 "x" Visual | |
| 7 | 4087 "l" langmap |language-mapping| |
| 4088 "" Normal, Visual and Operator-pending | |
| 644 | 4089 When {mode} is omitted, the modes for "" are used. |
| 2610 | 4090 |
| 782 | 4091 When {abbr} is there and it is non-zero use abbreviations |
| 4092 instead of mappings. | |
| 2610 | 4093 |
| 4094 When {dict} is there and it is non-zero return a dictionary | |
| 4095 containing all the information of the mapping with the | |
| 4096 following items: | |
| 4097 "lhs" The {lhs} of the mapping. | |
| 4098 "rhs" The {rhs} of the mapping as typed. | |
| 4099 "silent" 1 for a |:map-silent| mapping, else 0. | |
| 2625 | 4100 "noremap" 1 if the {rhs} of the mapping is not remappable. |
| 2610 | 4101 "expr" 1 for an expression mapping (|:map-<expr>|). |
| 4102 "buffer" 1 for a buffer local mapping (|:map-local|). | |
| 4103 "mode" Modes for which the mapping is defined. In | |
| 4104 addition to the modes mentioned above, these | |
| 4105 characters will be used: | |
| 4106 " " Normal, Visual and Operator-pending | |
| 4107 "!" Insert and Commandline mode | |
| 2642 | 4108 (|mapmode-ic|) |
| 2625 | 4109 "sid" The script local ID, used for <sid> mappings |
| 4110 (|<SID>|). | |
| 2610 | 4111 |
| 7 | 4112 The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first, |
| 4113 then the global mappings. | |
| 626 | 4114 This function can be used to map a key even when it's already |
| 4115 mapped, and have it do the original mapping too. Sketch: > | |
| 4116 exe 'nnoremap <Tab> ==' . maparg('<Tab>', 'n') | |
| 4117 | |
| 7 | 4118 |
| 782 | 4119 mapcheck({name}[, {mode} [, {abbr}]]) *mapcheck()* |
| 7 | 4120 Check if there is a mapping that matches with {name} in mode |
| 4121 {mode}. See |maparg()| for {mode} and special names in | |
| 4122 {name}. | |
| 782 | 4123 When {abbr} is there and it is non-zero use abbreviations |
| 4124 instead of mappings. | |
| 7 | 4125 A match happens with a mapping that starts with {name} and |
| 4126 with a mapping which is equal to the start of {name}. | |
| 4127 | |
| 1621 | 4128 matches mapping "a" "ab" "abc" ~ |
| 7 | 4129 mapcheck("a") yes yes yes |
| 4130 mapcheck("abc") yes yes yes | |
| 4131 mapcheck("ax") yes no no | |
| 4132 mapcheck("b") no no no | |
| 4133 | |
| 4134 The difference with maparg() is that mapcheck() finds a | |
| 4135 mapping that matches with {name}, while maparg() only finds a | |
| 4136 mapping for {name} exactly. | |
| 4137 When there is no mapping that starts with {name}, an empty | |
| 4138 String is returned. If there is one, the rhs of that mapping | |
| 4139 is returned. If there are several mappings that start with | |
| 4140 {name}, the rhs of one of them is returned. | |
| 4141 The mappings local to the current buffer are checked first, | |
| 4142 then the global mappings. | |
| 4143 This function can be used to check if a mapping can be added | |
| 4144 without being ambiguous. Example: > | |
| 4145 :if mapcheck("_vv") == "" | |
| 4146 : map _vv :set guifont=7x13<CR> | |
| 4147 :endif | |
| 4148 < This avoids adding the "_vv" mapping when there already is a | |
| 4149 mapping for "_v" or for "_vvv". | |
| 4150 | |
| 19 | 4151 match({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *match()* |
| 685 | 4152 When {expr} is a |List| then this returns the index of the |
| 4153 first item where {pat} matches. Each item is used as a | |
| 692 | 4154 String, |Lists| and |Dictionaries| are used as echoed. |
| 1621 | 4155 Otherwise, {expr} is used as a String. The result is a |
| 95 | 4156 Number, which gives the index (byte offset) in {expr} where |
| 4157 {pat} matches. | |
| 685 | 4158 A match at the first character or |List| item returns zero. |
| 19 | 4159 If there is no match -1 is returned. |
| 2833 | 4160 For getting submatches see |matchlist()|. |
| 19 | 4161 Example: > |
| 95 | 4162 :echo match("testing", "ing") " results in 4 |
| 714 | 4163 :echo match([1, 'x'], '\a') " results in 1 |
| 95 | 4164 < See |string-match| for how {pat} is used. |
| 170 | 4165 *strpbrk()* |
| 1621 | 4166 Vim doesn't have a strpbrk() function. But you can do: > |
| 170 | 4167 :let sepidx = match(line, '[.,;: \t]') |
| 4168 < *strcasestr()* | |
| 4169 Vim doesn't have a strcasestr() function. But you can add | |
| 4170 "\c" to the pattern to ignore case: > | |
| 4171 :let idx = match(haystack, '\cneedle') | |
| 4172 < | |
| 95 | 4173 If {start} is given, the search starts from byte index |
| 685 | 4174 {start} in a String or item {start} in a |List|. |
| 7 | 4175 The result, however, is still the index counted from the |
| 236 | 4176 first character/item. Example: > |
| 7 | 4177 :echo match("testing", "ing", 2) |
| 4178 < result is again "4". > | |
| 4179 :echo match("testing", "ing", 4) | |
| 4180 < result is again "4". > | |
| 4181 :echo match("testing", "t", 2) | |
| 4182 < result is "3". | |
| 694 | 4183 For a String, if {start} > 0 then it is like the string starts |
| 703 | 4184 {start} bytes later, thus "^" will match at {start}. Except |
| 4185 when {count} is given, then it's like matches before the | |
| 4186 {start} byte are ignored (this is a bit complicated to keep it | |
| 4187 backwards compatible). | |
| 95 | 4188 For a String, if {start} < 0, it will be set to 0. For a list |
| 4189 the index is counted from the end. | |
| 697 | 4190 If {start} is out of range ({start} > strlen({expr}) for a |
| 4191 String or {start} > len({expr}) for a |List|) -1 is returned. | |
| 95 | 4192 |
| 694 | 4193 When {count} is given use the {count}'th match. When a match |
| 697 | 4194 is found in a String the search for the next one starts one |
| 694 | 4195 character further. Thus this example results in 1: > |
| 4196 echo match("testing", "..", 0, 2) | |
| 4197 < In a |List| the search continues in the next item. | |
| 703 | 4198 Note that when {count} is added the way {start} works changes, |
| 4199 see above. | |
| 694 | 4200 |
| 7 | 4201 See |pattern| for the patterns that are accepted. |
| 4202 The 'ignorecase' option is used to set the ignore-caseness of | |
| 1621 | 4203 the pattern. 'smartcase' is NOT used. The matching is always |
| 7 | 4204 done like 'magic' is set and 'cpoptions' is empty. |
| 4205 | |
| 1326 | 4206 *matchadd()* *E798* *E799* *E801* |
| 4207 matchadd({group}, {pattern}[, {priority}[, {id}]]) | |
| 4208 Defines a pattern to be highlighted in the current window (a | |
| 4209 "match"). It will be highlighted with {group}. Returns an | |
| 4210 identification number (ID), which can be used to delete the | |
| 4211 match using |matchdelete()|. | |
| 4212 | |
| 4213 The optional {priority} argument assigns a priority to the | |
| 1621 | 4214 match. A match with a high priority will have its |
| 1326 | 4215 highlighting overrule that of a match with a lower priority. |
| 4216 A priority is specified as an integer (negative numbers are no | |
| 4217 exception). If the {priority} argument is not specified, the | |
| 4218 default priority is 10. The priority of 'hlsearch' is zero, | |
| 4219 hence all matches with a priority greater than zero will | |
| 4220 overrule it. Syntax highlighting (see 'syntax') is a separate | |
| 4221 mechanism, and regardless of the chosen priority a match will | |
| 4222 always overrule syntax highlighting. | |
| 4223 | |
| 4224 The optional {id} argument allows the request for a specific | |
| 4225 match ID. If a specified ID is already taken, an error | |
| 4226 message will appear and the match will not be added. An ID | |
| 4227 is specified as a positive integer (zero excluded). IDs 1, 2 | |
| 4228 and 3 are reserved for |:match|, |:2match| and |:3match|, | |
| 4229 respectively. If the {id} argument is not specified, | |
| 4230 |matchadd()| automatically chooses a free ID. | |
| 4231 | |
| 4232 The number of matches is not limited, as it is the case with | |
| 4233 the |:match| commands. | |
| 4234 | |
| 4235 Example: > | |
| 4236 :highlight MyGroup ctermbg=green guibg=green | |
| 4237 :let m = matchadd("MyGroup", "TODO") | |
| 4238 < Deletion of the pattern: > | |
| 4239 :call matchdelete(m) | |
| 4240 | |
| 4241 < A list of matches defined by |matchadd()| and |:match| are | |
| 1621 | 4242 available from |getmatches()|. All matches can be deleted in |
| 1326 | 4243 one operation by |clearmatches()|. |
| 819 | 4244 |
| 4245 matcharg({nr}) *matcharg()* | |
| 856 | 4246 Selects the {nr} match item, as set with a |:match|, |
| 819 | 4247 |:2match| or |:3match| command. |
| 4248 Return a |List| with two elements: | |
| 4249 The name of the highlight group used | |
| 4250 The pattern used. | |
| 4251 When {nr} is not 1, 2 or 3 returns an empty |List|. | |
| 4252 When there is no match item set returns ['', '']. | |
| 1326 | 4253 This is useful to save and restore a |:match|. |
| 4254 Highlighting matches using the |:match| commands are limited | |
| 4255 to three matches. |matchadd()| does not have this limitation. | |
| 4256 | |
| 4257 matchdelete({id}) *matchdelete()* *E802* *E803* | |
| 4258 Deletes a match with ID {id} previously defined by |matchadd()| | |
| 1621 | 4259 or one of the |:match| commands. Returns 0 if successful, |
| 1326 | 4260 otherwise -1. See example for |matchadd()|. All matches can |
| 4261 be deleted in one operation by |clearmatches()|. | |
| 819 | 4262 |
| 19 | 4263 matchend({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *matchend()* |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
4264 Same as |match()|, but return the index of first character |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
4265 after the match. Example: > |
| 7 | 4266 :echo matchend("testing", "ing") |
| 4267 < results in "7". | |
| 170 | 4268 *strspn()* *strcspn()* |
| 4269 Vim doesn't have a strspn() or strcspn() function, but you can | |
| 4270 do it with matchend(): > | |
| 4271 :let span = matchend(line, '[a-zA-Z]') | |
| 4272 :let span = matchend(line, '[^a-zA-Z]') | |
| 4273 < Except that -1 is returned when there are no matches. | |
| 4274 | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
4275 The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. > |
| 7 | 4276 :echo matchend("testing", "ing", 2) |
| 4277 < results in "7". > | |
| 4278 :echo matchend("testing", "ing", 5) | |
| 4279 < result is "-1". | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
4280 When {expr} is a |List| the result is equal to |match()|. |
| 7 | 4281 |
| 158 | 4282 matchlist({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *matchlist()* |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
4283 Same as |match()|, but return a |List|. The first item in the |
| 158 | 4284 list is the matched string, same as what matchstr() would |
| 4285 return. Following items are submatches, like "\1", "\2", etc. | |
| 842 | 4286 in |:substitute|. When an optional submatch didn't match an |
| 4287 empty string is used. Example: > | |
| 4288 echo matchlist('acd', '\(a\)\?\(b\)\?\(c\)\?\(.*\)') | |
| 4289 < Results in: ['acd', 'a', '', 'c', 'd', '', '', '', '', ''] | |
| 158 | 4290 When there is no match an empty list is returned. |
| 4291 | |
| 19 | 4292 matchstr({expr}, {pat}[, {start}[, {count}]]) *matchstr()* |
| 1621 | 4293 Same as |match()|, but return the matched string. Example: > |
| 7 | 4294 :echo matchstr("testing", "ing") |
| 4295 < results in "ing". | |
| 4296 When there is no match "" is returned. | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
4297 The {start}, if given, has the same meaning as for |match()|. > |
| 7 | 4298 :echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 2) |
| 4299 < results in "ing". > | |
| 4300 :echo matchstr("testing", "ing", 5) | |
| 4301 < result is "". | |
| 685 | 4302 When {expr} is a |List| then the matching item is returned. |
| 95 | 4303 The type isn't changed, it's not necessarily a String. |
| 7 | 4304 |
| 87 | 4305 *max()* |
| 4306 max({list}) Return the maximum value of all items in {list}. | |
| 4307 If {list} is not a list or one of the items in {list} cannot | |
| 4308 be used as a Number this results in an error. | |
| 685 | 4309 An empty |List| results in zero. |
| 87 | 4310 |
| 4311 *min()* | |
| 1215 | 4312 min({list}) Return the minimum value of all items in {list}. |
| 87 | 4313 If {list} is not a list or one of the items in {list} cannot |
| 4314 be used as a Number this results in an error. | |
| 685 | 4315 An empty |List| results in zero. |
| 87 | 4316 |
| 843 | 4317 *mkdir()* *E739* |
| 168 | 4318 mkdir({name} [, {path} [, {prot}]]) |
| 4319 Create directory {name}. | |
| 4320 If {path} is "p" then intermediate directories are created as | |
| 4321 necessary. Otherwise it must be "". | |
| 4322 If {prot} is given it is used to set the protection bits of | |
| 4323 the new directory. The default is 0755 (rwxr-xr-x: r/w for | |
| 1621 | 4324 the user readable for others). Use 0700 to make it unreadable |
| 1702 | 4325 for others. This is only used for the last part of {name}. |
| 4326 Thus if you create /tmp/foo/bar then /tmp/foo will be created | |
| 4327 with 0755. | |
| 4328 Example: > | |
| 4329 :call mkdir($HOME . "/tmp/foo/bar", "p", 0700) | |
| 4330 < This function is not available in the |sandbox|. | |
| 168 | 4331 Not available on all systems. To check use: > |
| 4332 :if exists("*mkdir") | |
| 4333 < | |
| 7 | 4334 *mode()* |
| 1621 | 4335 mode([expr]) Return a string that indicates the current mode. |
| 1661 | 4336 If [expr] is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or |
| 4337 a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then the full mode is | |
| 4338 returned, otherwise only the first letter is returned. Note | |
| 4339 that " " and "0" are also non-empty strings. | |
| 1621 | 4340 |
| 7 | 4341 n Normal |
| 1621 | 4342 no Operator-pending |
| 7 | 4343 v Visual by character |
| 4344 V Visual by line | |
| 4345 CTRL-V Visual blockwise | |
| 4346 s Select by character | |
| 4347 S Select by line | |
| 4348 CTRL-S Select blockwise | |
| 4349 i Insert | |
| 1621 | 4350 R Replace |R| |
| 4351 Rv Virtual Replace |gR| | |
| 7 | 4352 c Command-line |
| 1621 | 4353 cv Vim Ex mode |gQ| |
| 4354 ce Normal Ex mode |Q| | |
| 7 | 4355 r Hit-enter prompt |
| 1621 | 4356 rm The -- more -- prompt |
| 4357 r? A |:confirm| query of some sort | |
| 4358 ! Shell or external command is executing | |
| 4359 This is useful in the 'statusline' option or when used | |
| 4360 with |remote_expr()| In most other places it always returns | |
| 4361 "c" or "n". | |
| 4362 Also see |visualmode()|. | |
| 7 | 4363 |
|
2050
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4364 mzeval({expr}) *mzeval()* |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4365 Evaluate MzScheme expression {expr} and return its result |
| 3492 | 4366 converted to Vim data structures. |
|
2050
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4367 Numbers and strings are returned as they are. |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4368 Pairs (including lists and improper lists) and vectors are |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4369 returned as Vim |Lists|. |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4370 Hash tables are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type with keys |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4371 converted to strings. |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4372 All other types are converted to string with display function. |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4373 Examples: > |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4374 :mz (define l (list 1 2 3)) |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4375 :mz (define h (make-hash)) (hash-set! h "list" l) |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4376 :echo mzeval("l") |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4377 :echo mzeval("h") |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4378 < |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4379 {only available when compiled with the |+mzscheme| feature} |
|
afcf9db31561
updated for version 7.2.336
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2033
diff
changeset
|
4380 |
| 7 | 4381 nextnonblank({lnum}) *nextnonblank()* |
| 4382 Return the line number of the first line at or below {lnum} | |
| 4383 that is not blank. Example: > | |
| 4384 if getline(nextnonblank(1)) =~ "Java" | |
| 4385 < When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or | |
| 4386 below it, zero is returned. | |
| 4387 See also |prevnonblank()|. | |
| 4388 | |
| 4051 | 4389 nr2char({expr}[, {utf8}]) *nr2char()* |
| 7 | 4390 Return a string with a single character, which has the number |
| 4391 value {expr}. Examples: > | |
| 4392 nr2char(64) returns "@" | |
| 4393 nr2char(32) returns " " | |
| 4051 | 4394 < When {utf8} is omitted or zero, the current 'encoding' is used. |
| 4395 Example for "utf-8": > | |
| 7 | 4396 nr2char(300) returns I with bow character |
| 4051 | 4397 < With {utf8} set to 1, always return utf-8 characters. |
| 4398 Note that a NUL character in the file is specified with | |
| 7 | 4399 nr2char(10), because NULs are represented with newline |
| 4400 characters. nr2char(0) is a real NUL and terminates the | |
| 119 | 4401 string, thus results in an empty string. |
| 7 | 4402 |
| 1548 | 4403 *getpid()* |
| 4404 getpid() Return a Number which is the process ID of the Vim process. | |
| 1621 | 4405 On Unix and MS-Windows this is a unique number, until Vim |
| 4406 exits. On MS-DOS it's always zero. | |
| 1548 | 4407 |
| 703 | 4408 *getpos()* |
| 707 | 4409 getpos({expr}) Get the position for {expr}. For possible values of {expr} |
| 4410 see |line()|. | |
| 4411 The result is a |List| with four numbers: | |
| 4412 [bufnum, lnum, col, off] | |
| 4413 "bufnum" is zero, unless a mark like '0 or 'A is used, then it | |
| 4414 is the buffer number of the mark. | |
| 4415 "lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer. The first | |
| 4416 column is 1. | |
| 703 | 4417 The "off" number is zero, unless 'virtualedit' is used. Then |
| 4418 it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the | |
| 1266 | 4419 character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last |
| 703 | 4420 character. |
| 4421 This can be used to save and restore the cursor position: > | |
| 4422 let save_cursor = getpos(".") | |
| 4423 MoveTheCursorAround | |
| 798 | 4424 call setpos('.', save_cursor) |
| 707 | 4425 < Also see |setpos()|. |
| 703 | 4426 |
| 3214 | 4427 or({expr}, {expr}) *or()* |
| 4428 Bitwise OR on the two arguments. The arguments are converted | |
| 4429 to a number. A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. | |
| 4430 Example: > | |
| 4431 :let bits = or(bits, 0x80) | |
| 4432 | |
| 4433 | |
| 819 | 4434 pathshorten({expr}) *pathshorten()* |
| 4435 Shorten directory names in the path {expr} and return the | |
| 4436 result. The tail, the file name, is kept as-is. The other | |
| 4437 components in the path are reduced to single letters. Leading | |
| 4438 '~' and '.' characters are kept. Example: > | |
| 4439 :echo pathshorten('~/.vim/autoload/myfile.vim') | |
| 4440 < ~/.v/a/myfile.vim ~ | |
| 4441 It doesn't matter if the path exists or not. | |
| 4442 | |
| 1621 | 4443 pow({x}, {y}) *pow()* |
| 4444 Return the power of {x} to the exponent {y} as a |Float|. | |
| 4445 {x} and {y} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 4446 Examples: > | |
| 4447 :echo pow(3, 3) | |
| 4448 < 27.0 > | |
| 4449 :echo pow(2, 16) | |
| 4450 < 65536.0 > | |
| 4451 :echo pow(32, 0.20) | |
| 4452 < 2.0 | |
| 4453 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 4454 | |
| 667 | 4455 prevnonblank({lnum}) *prevnonblank()* |
| 4456 Return the line number of the first line at or above {lnum} | |
| 4457 that is not blank. Example: > | |
| 4458 let ind = indent(prevnonblank(v:lnum - 1)) | |
| 4459 < When {lnum} is invalid or there is no non-blank line at or | |
| 4460 above it, zero is returned. | |
| 4461 Also see |nextnonblank()|. | |
| 4462 | |
| 4463 | |
| 449 | 4464 printf({fmt}, {expr1} ...) *printf()* |
| 4465 Return a String with {fmt}, where "%" items are replaced by | |
| 4466 the formatted form of their respective arguments. Example: > | |
| 452 | 4467 printf("%4d: E%d %.30s", lnum, errno, msg) |
| 449 | 4468 < May result in: |
| 452 | 4469 " 99: E42 asdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfasdfas" ~ |
| 449 | 4470 |
| 4471 Often used items are: | |
| 856 | 4472 %s string |
| 3914 | 4473 %6S string right-aligned in 6 display cells |
| 653 | 4474 %6s string right-aligned in 6 bytes |
| 1621 | 4475 %.9s string truncated to 9 bytes |
| 4476 %c single byte | |
| 4477 %d decimal number | |
| 4478 %5d decimal number padded with spaces to 5 characters | |
| 4479 %x hex number | |
| 4480 %04x hex number padded with zeros to at least 4 characters | |
| 4481 %X hex number using upper case letters | |
| 4482 %o octal number | |
| 4483 %f floating point number in the form 123.456 | |
| 4484 %e floating point number in the form 1.234e3 | |
| 4485 %E floating point number in the form 1.234E3 | |
| 4486 %g floating point number, as %f or %e depending on value | |
| 4487 %G floating point number, as %f or %E depending on value | |
| 4488 %% the % character itself | |
| 449 | 4489 |
| 4490 Conversion specifications start with '%' and end with the | |
| 4491 conversion type. All other characters are copied unchanged to | |
| 4492 the result. | |
| 4493 | |
| 4494 The "%" starts a conversion specification. The following | |
| 452 | 4495 arguments appear in sequence: |
| 4496 | |
| 4497 % [flags] [field-width] [.precision] type | |
| 4498 | |
| 856 | 4499 flags |
| 452 | 4500 Zero or more of the following flags: |
| 4501 | |
| 449 | 4502 # The value should be converted to an "alternate |
| 4503 form". For c, d, and s conversions, this option | |
| 4504 has no effect. For o conversions, the precision | |
| 4505 of the number is increased to force the first | |
| 4506 character of the output string to a zero (except | |
| 4507 if a zero value is printed with an explicit | |
| 4508 precision of zero). | |
| 4509 For x and X conversions, a non-zero result has | |
| 4510 the string "0x" (or "0X" for X conversions) | |
| 4511 prepended to it. | |
| 452 | 4512 |
| 449 | 4513 0 (zero) Zero padding. For all conversions the converted |
| 4514 value is padded on the left with zeros rather | |
| 4515 than blanks. If a precision is given with a | |
| 4516 numeric conversion (d, o, x, and X), the 0 flag | |
| 4517 is ignored. | |
| 452 | 4518 |
| 449 | 4519 - A negative field width flag; the converted value |
| 4520 is to be left adjusted on the field boundary. | |
| 4521 The converted value is padded on the right with | |
| 4522 blanks, rather than on the left with blanks or | |
| 4523 zeros. A - overrides a 0 if both are given. | |
| 452 | 4524 |
| 449 | 4525 ' ' (space) A blank should be left before a positive |
| 4526 number produced by a signed conversion (d). | |
| 452 | 4527 |
| 449 | 4528 + A sign must always be placed before a number |
| 1621 | 4529 produced by a signed conversion. A + overrides |
| 449 | 4530 a space if both are used. |
| 452 | 4531 |
| 4532 field-width | |
| 4533 An optional decimal digit string specifying a minimum | |
| 653 | 4534 field width. If the converted value has fewer bytes |
| 4535 than the field width, it will be padded with spaces on | |
| 4536 the left (or right, if the left-adjustment flag has | |
| 4537 been given) to fill out the field width. | |
| 452 | 4538 |
| 4539 .precision | |
| 4540 An optional precision, in the form of a period '.' | |
| 4541 followed by an optional digit string. If the digit | |
| 4542 string is omitted, the precision is taken as zero. | |
| 4543 This gives the minimum number of digits to appear for | |
| 4544 d, o, x, and X conversions, or the maximum number of | |
| 653 | 4545 bytes to be printed from a string for s conversions. |
| 1621 | 4546 For floating point it is the number of digits after |
| 4547 the decimal point. | |
| 452 | 4548 |
| 4549 type | |
| 4550 A character that specifies the type of conversion to | |
| 4551 be applied, see below. | |
| 4552 | |
| 449 | 4553 A field width or precision, or both, may be indicated by an |
| 4554 asterisk '*' instead of a digit string. In this case, a | |
| 1621 | 4555 Number argument supplies the field width or precision. A |
| 449 | 4556 negative field width is treated as a left adjustment flag |
| 4557 followed by a positive field width; a negative precision is | |
| 4558 treated as though it were missing. Example: > | |
| 452 | 4559 :echo printf("%d: %.*s", nr, width, line) |
| 449 | 4560 < This limits the length of the text used from "line" to |
| 452 | 4561 "width" bytes. |
| 449 | 4562 |
| 856 | 4563 The conversion specifiers and their meanings are: |
| 452 | 4564 |
| 1621 | 4565 *printf-d* *printf-o* *printf-x* *printf-X* |
| 4566 doxX The Number argument is converted to signed decimal | |
| 449 | 4567 (d), unsigned octal (o), or unsigned hexadecimal (x |
| 4568 and X) notation. The letters "abcdef" are used for | |
| 4569 x conversions; the letters "ABCDEF" are used for X | |
| 452 | 4570 conversions. |
| 4571 The precision, if any, gives the minimum number of | |
| 4572 digits that must appear; if the converted value | |
| 4573 requires fewer digits, it is padded on the left with | |
| 4574 zeros. | |
| 4575 In no case does a non-existent or small field width | |
| 4576 cause truncation of a numeric field; if the result of | |
| 4577 a conversion is wider than the field width, the field | |
| 4578 is expanded to contain the conversion result. | |
| 4579 | |
| 1621 | 4580 *printf-c* |
| 452 | 4581 c The Number argument is converted to a byte, and the |
| 4582 resulting character is written. | |
| 4583 | |
| 1621 | 4584 *printf-s* |
| 452 | 4585 s The text of the String argument is used. If a |
| 4586 precision is specified, no more bytes than the number | |
| 4587 specified are used. | |
| 3914 | 4588 S The text of the String argument is used. If a |
| 4589 precision is specified, no more display cells than the | |
| 4590 number specified are used. Without the |+multi_byte| | |
| 4591 feature works just like 's'. | |
| 452 | 4592 |
| 1621 | 4593 *printf-f* *E807* |
| 4594 f The Float argument is converted into a string of the | |
| 4595 form 123.456. The precision specifies the number of | |
| 4596 digits after the decimal point. When the precision is | |
| 4597 zero the decimal point is omitted. When the precision | |
| 4598 is not specified 6 is used. A really big number | |
| 4599 (out of range or dividing by zero) results in "inf". | |
| 4600 "0.0 / 0.0" results in "nan". | |
| 4601 Example: > | |
| 4602 echo printf("%.2f", 12.115) | |
| 4603 < 12.12 | |
| 4604 Note that roundoff depends on the system libraries. | |
| 4605 Use |round()| when in doubt. | |
| 4606 | |
| 4607 *printf-e* *printf-E* | |
| 4608 e E The Float argument is converted into a string of the | |
| 4609 form 1.234e+03 or 1.234E+03 when using 'E'. The | |
| 4610 precision specifies the number of digits after the | |
| 4611 decimal point, like with 'f'. | |
| 4612 | |
| 4613 *printf-g* *printf-G* | |
| 4614 g G The Float argument is converted like with 'f' if the | |
| 4615 value is between 0.001 (inclusive) and 10000000.0 | |
| 4616 (exclusive). Otherwise 'e' is used for 'g' and 'E' | |
| 4617 for 'G'. When no precision is specified superfluous | |
| 4618 zeroes and '+' signs are removed, except for the zero | |
| 4619 immediately after the decimal point. Thus 10000000.0 | |
| 4620 results in 1.0e7. | |
| 4621 | |
| 4622 *printf-%* | |
| 449 | 4623 % A '%' is written. No argument is converted. The |
| 4624 complete conversion specification is "%%". | |
| 452 | 4625 |
| 1668 | 4626 When a Number argument is expected a String argument is also |
| 4627 accepted and automatically converted. | |
| 4628 When a Float or String argument is expected a Number argument | |
| 4629 is also accepted and automatically converted. | |
| 4630 Any other argument type results in an error message. | |
| 449 | 4631 |
| 459 | 4632 *E766* *E767* |
| 449 | 4633 The number of {exprN} arguments must exactly match the number |
| 4634 of "%" items. If there are not sufficient or too many | |
| 452 | 4635 arguments an error is given. Up to 18 arguments can be used. |
| 449 | 4636 |
| 4637 | |
| 667 | 4638 pumvisible() *pumvisible()* |
| 4639 Returns non-zero when the popup menu is visible, zero | |
| 4640 otherwise. See |ins-completion-menu|. | |
| 712 | 4641 This can be used to avoid some things that would remove the |
| 4642 popup menu. | |
| 7 | 4643 |
|
4502
605c9ce57ec3
Updated runtime files, language files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4437
diff
changeset
|
4644 *E860* |
| 3682 | 4645 py3eval({expr}) *py3eval()* |
| 4646 Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result | |
| 4647 converted to Vim data structures. | |
| 4648 Numbers and strings are returned as they are (strings are | |
| 4649 copied though, unicode strings are additionally converted to | |
| 4650 'encoding'). | |
| 4651 Lists are represented as Vim |List| type. | |
| 4652 Dictionaries are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type with | |
| 4653 keys converted to strings. | |
| 4654 {only available when compiled with the |+python3| feature} | |
| 4655 | |
| 4656 *E858* *E859* | |
| 4657 pyeval({expr}) *pyeval()* | |
| 4658 Evaluate Python expression {expr} and return its result | |
| 4659 converted to Vim data structures. | |
| 4660 Numbers and strings are returned as they are (strings are | |
| 4661 copied though). | |
| 4662 Lists are represented as Vim |List| type. | |
| 3830 | 4663 Dictionaries are represented as Vim |Dictionary| type, |
| 4664 non-string keys result in error. | |
| 3682 | 4665 {only available when compiled with the |+python| feature} |
| 4666 | |
| 114 | 4667 *E726* *E727* |
| 99 | 4668 range({expr} [, {max} [, {stride}]]) *range()* |
| 685 | 4669 Returns a |List| with Numbers: |
| 99 | 4670 - If only {expr} is specified: [0, 1, ..., {expr} - 1] |
| 4671 - If {max} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + 1, ..., {max}] | |
| 4672 - If {stride} is specified: [{expr}, {expr} + {stride}, ..., | |
| 4673 {max}] (increasing {expr} with {stride} each time, not | |
| 4674 producing a value past {max}). | |
| 336 | 4675 When the maximum is one before the start the result is an |
| 4676 empty list. When the maximum is more than one before the | |
| 4677 start this is an error. | |
| 99 | 4678 Examples: > |
| 856 | 4679 range(4) " [0, 1, 2, 3] |
| 99 | 4680 range(2, 4) " [2, 3, 4] |
| 4681 range(2, 9, 3) " [2, 5, 8] | |
| 856 | 4682 range(2, -2, -1) " [2, 1, 0, -1, -2] |
| 336 | 4683 range(0) " [] |
| 4684 range(2, 0) " error! | |
| 99 | 4685 < |
| 158 | 4686 *readfile()* |
| 168 | 4687 readfile({fname} [, {binary} [, {max}]]) |
| 685 | 4688 Read file {fname} and return a |List|, each line of the file |
| 4689 as an item. Lines broken at NL characters. Macintosh files | |
| 158 | 4690 separated with CR will result in a single long line (unless a |
| 4691 NL appears somewhere). | |
|
2513
a88237afdb20
Change readfile() to ignore byte order marks, unless in binary mode.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2490
diff
changeset
|
4692 All NUL characters are replaced with a NL character. |
| 158 | 4693 When {binary} is equal to "b" binary mode is used: |
| 4694 - When the last line ends in a NL an extra empty list item is | |
| 4695 added. | |
| 4696 - No CR characters are removed. | |
| 4697 Otherwise: | |
| 4698 - CR characters that appear before a NL are removed. | |
| 4699 - Whether the last line ends in a NL or not does not matter. | |
|
2513
a88237afdb20
Change readfile() to ignore byte order marks, unless in binary mode.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2490
diff
changeset
|
4700 - When 'encoding' is Unicode any UTF-8 byte order mark is |
|
a88237afdb20
Change readfile() to ignore byte order marks, unless in binary mode.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2490
diff
changeset
|
4701 removed from the text. |
| 168 | 4702 When {max} is given this specifies the maximum number of lines |
| 4703 to be read. Useful if you only want to check the first ten | |
| 4704 lines of a file: > | |
| 4705 :for line in readfile(fname, '', 10) | |
| 4706 : if line =~ 'Date' | echo line | endif | |
| 4707 :endfor | |
| 233 | 4708 < When {max} is negative -{max} lines from the end of the file |
| 4709 are returned, or as many as there are. | |
| 4710 When {max} is zero the result is an empty list. | |
| 168 | 4711 Note that without {max} the whole file is read into memory. |
| 4712 Also note that there is no recognition of encoding. Read a | |
| 4713 file into a buffer if you need to. | |
| 158 | 4714 When the file can't be opened an error message is given and |
| 4715 the result is an empty list. | |
| 4716 Also see |writefile()|. | |
| 4717 | |
| 794 | 4718 reltime([{start} [, {end}]]) *reltime()* |
| 4719 Return an item that represents a time value. The format of | |
| 4720 the item depends on the system. It can be passed to | |
| 4721 |reltimestr()| to convert it to a string. | |
| 4722 Without an argument it returns the current time. | |
| 4723 With one argument is returns the time passed since the time | |
| 4724 specified in the argument. | |
| 843 | 4725 With two arguments it returns the time passed between {start} |
| 794 | 4726 and {end}. |
| 4727 The {start} and {end} arguments must be values returned by | |
| 4728 reltime(). | |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
4729 {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature} |
| 794 | 4730 |
| 4731 reltimestr({time}) *reltimestr()* | |
| 4732 Return a String that represents the time value of {time}. | |
| 4733 This is the number of seconds, a dot and the number of | |
| 4734 microseconds. Example: > | |
| 4735 let start = reltime() | |
| 4736 call MyFunction() | |
| 4737 echo reltimestr(reltime(start)) | |
| 4738 < Note that overhead for the commands will be added to the time. | |
| 4739 The accuracy depends on the system. | |
| 1156 | 4740 Leading spaces are used to make the string align nicely. You |
| 4741 can use split() to remove it. > | |
| 4742 echo split(reltimestr(reltime(start)))[0] | |
| 4743 < Also see |profiling|. | |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
4744 {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature} |
| 794 | 4745 |
| 7 | 4746 *remote_expr()* *E449* |
| 4747 remote_expr({server}, {string} [, {idvar}]) | |
| 1621 | 4748 Send the {string} to {server}. The string is sent as an |
| 7 | 4749 expression and the result is returned after evaluation. |
| 714 | 4750 The result must be a String or a |List|. A |List| is turned |
| 4751 into a String by joining the items with a line break in | |
| 4752 between (not at the end), like with join(expr, "\n"). | |
| 7 | 4753 If {idvar} is present, it is taken as the name of a |
| 4754 variable and a {serverid} for later use with | |
| 4755 remote_read() is stored there. | |
| 4756 See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|. | |
| 4757 This function is not available in the |sandbox|. | |
| 4758 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} | |
| 4759 Note: Any errors will cause a local error message to be issued | |
| 4760 and the result will be the empty string. | |
| 4761 Examples: > | |
| 4762 :echo remote_expr("gvim", "2+2") | |
| 4763 :echo remote_expr("gvim1", "b:current_syntax") | |
| 4764 < | |
| 4765 | |
| 4766 remote_foreground({server}) *remote_foreground()* | |
| 4767 Move the Vim server with the name {server} to the foreground. | |
| 4768 This works like: > | |
| 4769 remote_expr({server}, "foreground()") | |
| 4770 < Except that on Win32 systems the client does the work, to work | |
| 4771 around the problem that the OS doesn't always allow the server | |
| 4772 to bring itself to the foreground. | |
| 574 | 4773 Note: This does not restore the window if it was minimized, |
| 4774 like foreground() does. | |
| 7 | 4775 This function is not available in the |sandbox|. |
| 4776 {only in the Win32, Athena, Motif and GTK GUI versions and the | |
| 4777 Win32 console version} | |
| 4778 | |
| 4779 | |
| 4780 remote_peek({serverid} [, {retvar}]) *remote_peek()* | |
| 4781 Returns a positive number if there are available strings | |
| 4782 from {serverid}. Copies any reply string into the variable | |
| 1621 | 4783 {retvar} if specified. {retvar} must be a string with the |
| 7 | 4784 name of a variable. |
| 4785 Returns zero if none are available. | |
| 4786 Returns -1 if something is wrong. | |
| 4787 See also |clientserver|. | |
| 4788 This function is not available in the |sandbox|. | |
| 4789 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} | |
| 4790 Examples: > | |
| 4791 :let repl = "" | |
| 4792 :echo "PEEK: ".remote_peek(id, "repl").": ".repl | |
| 4793 | |
| 4794 remote_read({serverid}) *remote_read()* | |
| 4795 Return the oldest available reply from {serverid} and consume | |
| 4796 it. It blocks until a reply is available. | |
| 4797 See also |clientserver|. | |
| 4798 This function is not available in the |sandbox|. | |
| 4799 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} | |
| 4800 Example: > | |
| 4801 :echo remote_read(id) | |
| 4802 < | |
| 4803 *remote_send()* *E241* | |
| 4804 remote_send({server}, {string} [, {idvar}]) | |
| 1621 | 4805 Send the {string} to {server}. The string is sent as input |
| 22 | 4806 keys and the function returns immediately. At the Vim server |
| 4807 the keys are not mapped |:map|. | |
| 667 | 4808 If {idvar} is present, it is taken as the name of a variable |
| 4809 and a {serverid} for later use with remote_read() is stored | |
| 4810 there. | |
| 7 | 4811 See also |clientserver| |RemoteReply|. |
| 4812 This function is not available in the |sandbox|. | |
| 4813 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} | |
| 4814 Note: Any errors will be reported in the server and may mess | |
| 4815 up the display. | |
| 4816 Examples: > | |
| 4817 :echo remote_send("gvim", ":DropAndReply ".file, "serverid"). | |
| 4818 \ remote_read(serverid) | |
| 4819 | |
| 4820 :autocmd NONE RemoteReply * | |
| 4821 \ echo remote_read(expand("<amatch>")) | |
| 4822 :echo remote_send("gvim", ":sleep 10 | echo ". | |
| 4823 \ 'server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO")<CR>') | |
| 82 | 4824 < |
| 79 | 4825 remove({list}, {idx} [, {end}]) *remove()* |
| 685 | 4826 Without {end}: Remove the item at {idx} from |List| {list} and |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
4827 return the item. |
| 79 | 4828 With {end}: Remove items from {idx} to {end} (inclusive) and |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
4829 return a List with these items. When {idx} points to the same |
| 79 | 4830 item as {end} a list with one item is returned. When {end} |
| 4831 points to an item before {idx} this is an error. | |
| 4832 See |list-index| for possible values of {idx} and {end}. | |
| 55 | 4833 Example: > |
| 4834 :echo "last item: " . remove(mylist, -1) | |
| 79 | 4835 :call remove(mylist, 0, 9) |
| 99 | 4836 remove({dict}, {key}) |
| 4837 Remove the entry from {dict} with key {key}. Example: > | |
| 4838 :echo "removed " . remove(dict, "one") | |
| 4839 < If there is no {key} in {dict} this is an error. | |
| 4840 | |
| 4841 Use |delete()| to remove a file. | |
| 55 | 4842 |
| 7 | 4843 rename({from}, {to}) *rename()* |
| 4844 Rename the file by the name {from} to the name {to}. This | |
| 4845 should also work to move files across file systems. The | |
| 4846 result is a Number, which is 0 if the file was renamed | |
| 4847 successfully, and non-zero when the renaming failed. | |
| 1851 | 4848 NOTE: If {to} exists it is overwritten without warning. |
| 7 | 4849 This function is not available in the |sandbox|. |
| 4850 | |
| 18 | 4851 repeat({expr}, {count}) *repeat()* |
| 4852 Repeat {expr} {count} times and return the concatenated | |
| 4853 result. Example: > | |
| 843 | 4854 :let separator = repeat('-', 80) |
| 18 | 4855 < When {count} is zero or negative the result is empty. |
| 685 | 4856 When {expr} is a |List| the result is {expr} concatenated |
| 1621 | 4857 {count} times. Example: > |
| 79 | 4858 :let longlist = repeat(['a', 'b'], 3) |
| 4859 < Results in ['a', 'b', 'a', 'b', 'a', 'b']. | |
| 18 | 4860 |
| 82 | 4861 |
| 7 | 4862 resolve({filename}) *resolve()* *E655* |
| 4863 On MS-Windows, when {filename} is a shortcut (a .lnk file), | |
| 4864 returns the path the shortcut points to in a simplified form. | |
| 4865 On Unix, repeat resolving symbolic links in all path | |
| 4866 components of {filename} and return the simplified result. | |
| 4867 To cope with link cycles, resolving of symbolic links is | |
| 4868 stopped after 100 iterations. | |
| 4869 On other systems, return the simplified {filename}. | |
| 4870 The simplification step is done as by |simplify()|. | |
| 4871 resolve() keeps a leading path component specifying the | |
| 4872 current directory (provided the result is still a relative | |
| 4873 path name) and also keeps a trailing path separator. | |
| 4874 | |
| 82 | 4875 *reverse()* |
| 1621 | 4876 reverse({list}) Reverse the order of items in {list} in-place. Returns |
| 82 | 4877 {list}. |
| 4878 If you want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: > | |
| 4879 :let revlist = reverse(copy(mylist)) | |
| 4880 | |
| 1621 | 4881 round({expr}) *round()* |
| 1668 | 4882 Round off {expr} to the nearest integral value and return it |
| 1621 | 4883 as a |Float|. If {expr} lies halfway between two integral |
| 4884 values, then use the larger one (away from zero). | |
| 4885 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 4886 Examples: > | |
| 4887 echo round(0.456) | |
| 4888 < 0.0 > | |
| 4889 echo round(4.5) | |
| 4890 < 5.0 > | |
| 4891 echo round(-4.5) | |
| 4892 < -5.0 | |
| 4893 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 3996 | 4894 |
|
4835
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
4895 screenattr(row, col) *screenattr()* |
|
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
4896 Like screenchar(), but return the attribute. This is a rather |
|
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
4897 arbitrary number that can only be used to compare to the |
|
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
4898 attribute at other positions. |
|
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
4899 |
|
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
4900 screenchar(row, col) *screenchar()* |
|
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
4901 The result is a Number, which is the character at position |
|
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
4902 [row, col] on the screen. This works for every possible |
|
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
4903 screen position, also status lines, window separators and the |
|
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
4904 command line. The top left position is row one, column one |
|
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
4905 The character excludes composing characters. For double-byte |
|
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
4906 encodings it may only be the first byte. |
|
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
4907 This is mainly to be used for testing. |
|
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
4908 Returns -1 when row or col is out of range. |
|
4db0bf9f1b44
updated for version 7.3.1164
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
4502
diff
changeset
|
4909 |
| 3996 | 4910 screencol() *screencol()* |
| 4911 The result is a Number, which is the current screen column of | |
| 4912 the cursor. The leftmost column has number 1. | |
| 4913 This function is mainly used for testing. | |
| 4914 | |
| 4915 Note: Always returns the current screen column, thus if used | |
| 4916 in a command (e.g. ":echo screencol()") it will return the | |
| 4917 column inside the command line, which is 1 when the command is | |
| 4918 executed. To get the cursor position in the file use one of | |
| 4919 the following mappings: > | |
| 4920 nnoremap <expr> GG ":echom ".screencol()."\n" | |
| 4921 nnoremap <silent> GG :echom screencol()<CR> | |
| 4922 < | |
| 4923 screenrow() *screenrow()* | |
| 4924 The result is a Number, which is the current screen row of the | |
| 4925 cursor. The top line has number one. | |
| 4926 This function is mainly used for testing. | |
| 4927 | |
| 4928 Note: Same restrictions as with |screencol()|. | |
| 4929 | |
| 1496 | 4930 search({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]) *search()* |
| 7 | 4931 Search for regexp pattern {pattern}. The search starts at the |
| 119 | 4932 cursor position (you can use |cursor()| to set it). |
| 707 | 4933 |
| 3967 | 4934 When a match has been found its line number is returned. |
| 3312 | 4935 If there is no match a 0 is returned and the cursor doesn't |
| 4936 move. No error message is given. | |
| 4937 | |
| 7 | 4938 {flags} is a String, which can contain these character flags: |
| 4939 'b' search backward instead of forward | |
| 1621 | 4940 'c' accept a match at the cursor position |
| 712 | 4941 'e' move to the End of the match |
| 20 | 4942 'n' do Not move the cursor |
| 712 | 4943 'p' return number of matching sub-pattern (see below) |
| 4944 's' set the ' mark at the previous location of the cursor | |
| 7 | 4945 'w' wrap around the end of the file |
| 4946 'W' don't wrap around the end of the file | |
| 4947 If neither 'w' or 'W' is given, the 'wrapscan' option applies. | |
| 4948 | |
| 444 | 4949 If the 's' flag is supplied, the ' mark is set, only if the |
| 4950 cursor is moved. The 's' flag cannot be combined with the 'n' | |
| 4951 flag. | |
| 4952 | |
| 1156 | 4953 'ignorecase', 'smartcase' and 'magic' are used. |
| 4954 | |
| 692 | 4955 When the {stopline} argument is given then the search stops |
| 4956 after searching this line. This is useful to restrict the | |
| 4957 search to a range of lines. Examples: > | |
| 4958 let match = search('(', 'b', line("w0")) | |
| 4959 let end = search('END', '', line("w$")) | |
| 4960 < When {stopline} is used and it is not zero this also implies | |
| 4961 that the search does not wrap around the end of the file. | |
| 1496 | 4962 A zero value is equal to not giving the argument. |
| 4963 | |
| 4964 When the {timeout} argument is given the search stops when | |
| 3513 | 4965 more than this many milliseconds have passed. Thus when |
| 1496 | 4966 {timeout} is 500 the search stops after half a second. |
| 4967 The value must not be negative. A zero value is like not | |
| 4968 giving the argument. | |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
4969 {only available when compiled with the |+reltime| feature} |
| 692 | 4970 |
| 714 | 4971 *search()-sub-match* |
| 4972 With the 'p' flag the returned value is one more than the | |
| 4973 first sub-match in \(\). One if none of them matched but the | |
| 4974 whole pattern did match. | |
| 712 | 4975 To get the column number too use |searchpos()|. |
| 4976 | |
| 20 | 4977 The cursor will be positioned at the match, unless the 'n' |
| 707 | 4978 flag is used. |
| 7 | 4979 |
| 4980 Example (goes over all files in the argument list): > | |
| 4981 :let n = 1 | |
| 4982 :while n <= argc() " loop over all files in arglist | |
| 4983 : exe "argument " . n | |
| 4984 : " start at the last char in the file and wrap for the | |
| 4985 : " first search to find match at start of file | |
| 4986 : normal G$ | |
| 4987 : let flags = "w" | |
| 4988 : while search("foo", flags) > 0 | |
| 1621 | 4989 : s/foo/bar/g |
| 7 | 4990 : let flags = "W" |
| 4991 : endwhile | |
| 4992 : update " write the file if modified | |
| 4993 : let n = n + 1 | |
| 4994 :endwhile | |
| 4995 < | |
| 712 | 4996 Example for using some flags: > |
| 4997 :echo search('\<if\|\(else\)\|\(endif\)', 'ncpe') | |
| 4998 < This will search for the keywords "if", "else", and "endif" | |
| 4999 under or after the cursor. Because of the 'p' flag, it | |
| 5000 returns 1, 2, or 3 depending on which keyword is found, or 0 | |
| 5001 if the search fails. With the cursor on the first word of the | |
| 5002 line: | |
| 5003 if (foo == 0) | let foo = foo + 1 | endif ~ | |
| 5004 the function returns 1. Without the 'c' flag, the function | |
| 5005 finds the "endif" and returns 3. The same thing happens | |
| 5006 without the 'e' flag if the cursor is on the "f" of "if". | |
| 5007 The 'n' flag tells the function not to move the cursor. | |
| 5008 | |
| 504 | 5009 |
| 523 | 5010 searchdecl({name} [, {global} [, {thisblock}]]) *searchdecl()* |
| 5011 Search for the declaration of {name}. | |
| 856 | 5012 |
| 523 | 5013 With a non-zero {global} argument it works like |gD|, find |
| 5014 first match in the file. Otherwise it works like |gd|, find | |
| 5015 first match in the function. | |
| 5016 | |
| 5017 With a non-zero {thisblock} argument matches in a {} block | |
| 5018 that ends before the cursor position are ignored. Avoids | |
| 5019 finding variable declarations only valid in another scope. | |
| 5020 | |
| 504 | 5021 Moves the cursor to the found match. |
| 5022 Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure. | |
| 5023 Example: > | |
| 5024 if searchdecl('myvar') == 0 | |
| 5025 echo getline('.') | |
| 5026 endif | |
| 5027 < | |
| 7 | 5028 *searchpair()* |
| 1496 | 5029 searchpair({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} |
| 5030 [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]]) | |
| 7 | 5031 Search for the match of a nested start-end pair. This can be |
| 5032 used to find the "endif" that matches an "if", while other | |
| 5033 if/endif pairs in between are ignored. | |
| 677 | 5034 The search starts at the cursor. The default is to search |
| 5035 forward, include 'b' in {flags} to search backward. | |
| 5036 If a match is found, the cursor is positioned at it and the | |
| 5037 line number is returned. If no match is found 0 or -1 is | |
| 5038 returned and the cursor doesn't move. No error message is | |
| 5039 given. | |
| 7 | 5040 |
| 5041 {start}, {middle} and {end} are patterns, see |pattern|. They | |
| 5042 must not contain \( \) pairs. Use of \%( \) is allowed. When | |
| 5043 {middle} is not empty, it is found when searching from either | |
| 5044 direction, but only when not in a nested start-end pair. A | |
| 5045 typical use is: > | |
| 5046 searchpair('\<if\>', '\<else\>', '\<endif\>') | |
| 5047 < By leaving {middle} empty the "else" is skipped. | |
| 5048 | |
| 712 | 5049 {flags} 'b', 'c', 'n', 's', 'w' and 'W' are used like with |
| 5050 |search()|. Additionally: | |
| 7 | 5051 'r' Repeat until no more matches found; will find the |
| 1621 | 5052 outer pair. Implies the 'W' flag. |
| 5053 'm' Return number of matches instead of line number with | |
| 712 | 5054 the match; will be > 1 when 'r' is used. |
| 1621 | 5055 Note: it's nearly always a good idea to use the 'W' flag, to |
| 5056 avoid wrapping around the end of the file. | |
| 7 | 5057 |
| 5058 When a match for {start}, {middle} or {end} is found, the | |
| 5059 {skip} expression is evaluated with the cursor positioned on | |
| 5060 the start of the match. It should return non-zero if this | |
| 5061 match is to be skipped. E.g., because it is inside a comment | |
| 5062 or a string. | |
| 5063 When {skip} is omitted or empty, every match is accepted. | |
| 5064 When evaluating {skip} causes an error the search is aborted | |
| 5065 and -1 returned. | |
| 5066 | |
| 1496 | 5067 For {stopline} and {timeout} see |search()|. |
| 692 | 5068 |
| 7 | 5069 The value of 'ignorecase' is used. 'magic' is ignored, the |
| 5070 patterns are used like it's on. | |
| 5071 | |
| 5072 The search starts exactly at the cursor. A match with | |
| 5073 {start}, {middle} or {end} at the next character, in the | |
| 5074 direction of searching, is the first one found. Example: > | |
| 5075 if 1 | |
| 5076 if 2 | |
| 5077 endif 2 | |
| 5078 endif 1 | |
| 5079 < When starting at the "if 2", with the cursor on the "i", and | |
| 5080 searching forwards, the "endif 2" is found. When starting on | |
| 5081 the character just before the "if 2", the "endif 1" will be | |
| 1621 | 5082 found. That's because the "if 2" will be found first, and |
| 7 | 5083 then this is considered to be a nested if/endif from "if 2" to |
| 5084 "endif 2". | |
| 5085 When searching backwards and {end} is more than one character, | |
| 5086 it may be useful to put "\zs" at the end of the pattern, so | |
| 5087 that when the cursor is inside a match with the end it finds | |
| 5088 the matching start. | |
| 5089 | |
| 5090 Example, to find the "endif" command in a Vim script: > | |
| 5091 | |
| 5092 :echo searchpair('\<if\>', '\<el\%[seif]\>', '\<en\%[dif]\>', 'W', | |
| 5093 \ 'getline(".") =~ "^\\s*\""') | |
| 5094 | |
| 5095 < The cursor must be at or after the "if" for which a match is | |
| 5096 to be found. Note that single-quote strings are used to avoid | |
| 5097 having to double the backslashes. The skip expression only | |
| 5098 catches comments at the start of a line, not after a command. | |
| 5099 Also, a word "en" or "if" halfway a line is considered a | |
| 5100 match. | |
| 5101 Another example, to search for the matching "{" of a "}": > | |
| 5102 | |
| 5103 :echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW') | |
| 5104 | |
| 5105 < This works when the cursor is at or before the "}" for which a | |
| 5106 match is to be found. To reject matches that syntax | |
| 5107 highlighting recognized as strings: > | |
| 5108 | |
| 5109 :echo searchpair('{', '', '}', 'bW', | |
| 5110 \ 'synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 0), "name") =~? "string"') | |
| 5111 < | |
| 667 | 5112 *searchpairpos()* |
| 1496 | 5113 searchpairpos({start}, {middle}, {end} [, {flags} [, {skip} |
| 5114 [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]]) | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5115 Same as |searchpair()|, but returns a |List| with the line and |
| 685 | 5116 column position of the match. The first element of the |List| |
| 5117 is the line number and the second element is the byte index of | |
| 667 | 5118 the column position of the match. If no match is found, |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
5119 returns [0, 0]. > |
|
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
5120 |
| 667 | 5121 :let [lnum,col] = searchpairpos('{', '', '}', 'n') |
| 5122 < | |
| 5123 See |match-parens| for a bigger and more useful example. | |
| 5124 | |
| 1496 | 5125 searchpos({pattern} [, {flags} [, {stopline} [, {timeout}]]]) *searchpos()* |
| 692 | 5126 Same as |search()|, but returns a |List| with the line and |
| 685 | 5127 column position of the match. The first element of the |List| |
| 5128 is the line number and the second element is the byte index of | |
| 5129 the column position of the match. If no match is found, | |
| 5130 returns [0, 0]. | |
| 714 | 5131 Example: > |
| 5132 :let [lnum, col] = searchpos('mypattern', 'n') | |
| 5133 | |
| 5134 < When the 'p' flag is given then there is an extra item with | |
| 5135 the sub-pattern match number |search()-sub-match|. Example: > | |
| 5136 :let [lnum, col, submatch] = searchpos('\(\l\)\|\(\u\)', 'np') | |
| 5137 < In this example "submatch" is 2 when a lowercase letter is | |
| 5138 found |/\l|, 3 when an uppercase letter is found |/\u|. | |
| 5139 | |
| 7 | 5140 server2client( {clientid}, {string}) *server2client()* |
| 5141 Send a reply string to {clientid}. The most recent {clientid} | |
| 5142 that sent a string can be retrieved with expand("<client>"). | |
| 5143 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} | |
| 5144 Note: | |
| 5145 This id has to be stored before the next command can be | |
| 236 | 5146 received. I.e. before returning from the received command and |
| 7 | 5147 before calling any commands that waits for input. |
| 5148 See also |clientserver|. | |
| 5149 Example: > | |
| 5150 :echo server2client(expand("<client>"), "HELLO") | |
| 5151 < | |
| 5152 serverlist() *serverlist()* | |
| 5153 Return a list of available server names, one per line. | |
| 5154 When there are no servers or the information is not available | |
| 5155 an empty string is returned. See also |clientserver|. | |
| 5156 {only available when compiled with the |+clientserver| feature} | |
| 5157 Example: > | |
| 5158 :echo serverlist() | |
| 5159 < | |
| 5160 setbufvar({expr}, {varname}, {val}) *setbufvar()* | |
| 5161 Set option or local variable {varname} in buffer {expr} to | |
| 5162 {val}. | |
| 5163 This also works for a global or local window option, but it | |
| 5164 doesn't work for a global or local window variable. | |
| 5165 For a local window option the global value is unchanged. | |
| 5166 For the use of {expr}, see |bufname()| above. | |
| 5167 Note that the variable name without "b:" must be used. | |
| 5168 Examples: > | |
| 5169 :call setbufvar(1, "&mod", 1) | |
| 5170 :call setbufvar("todo", "myvar", "foobar") | |
| 5171 < This function is not available in the |sandbox|. | |
| 5172 | |
| 5173 setcmdpos({pos}) *setcmdpos()* | |
| 5174 Set the cursor position in the command line to byte position | |
| 1621 | 5175 {pos}. The first position is 1. |
| 7 | 5176 Use |getcmdpos()| to obtain the current position. |
| 5177 Only works while editing the command line, thus you must use | |
| 99 | 5178 |c_CTRL-\_e|, |c_CTRL-R_=| or |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '='. For |
| 5179 |c_CTRL-\_e| and |c_CTRL-R_CTRL-R| with '=' the position is | |
| 5180 set after the command line is set to the expression. For | |
| 5181 |c_CTRL-R_=| it is set after evaluating the expression but | |
| 5182 before inserting the resulting text. | |
| 7 | 5183 When the number is too big the cursor is put at the end of the |
| 5184 line. A number smaller than one has undefined results. | |
| 5185 Returns 0 when successful, 1 when not editing the command | |
| 5186 line. | |
| 5187 | |
| 1621 | 5188 setline({lnum}, {text}) *setline()* |
| 3312 | 5189 Set line {lnum} of the current buffer to {text}. To insert |
| 5190 lines use |append()|. | |
| 236 | 5191 {lnum} is used like with |getline()|. |
| 1621 | 5192 When {lnum} is just below the last line the {text} will be |
| 282 | 5193 added as a new line. |
| 236 | 5194 If this succeeds, 0 is returned. If this fails (most likely |
| 5195 because {lnum} is invalid) 1 is returned. Example: > | |
| 7 | 5196 :call setline(5, strftime("%c")) |
| 1621 | 5197 < When {text} is a |List| then line {lnum} and following lines |
| 282 | 5198 will be set to the items in the list. Example: > |
| 5199 :call setline(5, ['aaa', 'bbb', 'ccc']) | |
| 5200 < This is equivalent to: > | |
| 3465 | 5201 :for [n, l] in [[5, 'aaa'], [6, 'bbb'], [7, 'ccc']] |
| 282 | 5202 : call setline(n, l) |
| 5203 :endfor | |
| 7 | 5204 < Note: The '[ and '] marks are not set. |
| 5205 | |
| 647 | 5206 setloclist({nr}, {list} [, {action}]) *setloclist()* |
| 5207 Create or replace or add to the location list for window {nr}. | |
| 5208 When {nr} is zero the current window is used. For a location | |
| 648 | 5209 list window, the displayed location list is modified. For an |
| 5210 invalid window number {nr}, -1 is returned. | |
| 1326 | 5211 Otherwise, same as |setqflist()|. |
| 5212 Also see |location-list|. | |
| 5213 | |
| 5214 setmatches({list}) *setmatches()* | |
| 5215 Restores a list of matches saved by |getmatches()|. Returns 0 | |
| 1621 | 5216 if successful, otherwise -1. All current matches are cleared |
| 1326 | 5217 before the list is restored. See example for |getmatches()|. |
| 230 | 5218 |
| 707 | 5219 *setpos()* |
| 5220 setpos({expr}, {list}) | |
| 5221 Set the position for {expr}. Possible values: | |
| 5222 . the cursor | |
| 5223 'x mark x | |
| 5224 | |
| 5225 {list} must be a |List| with four numbers: | |
| 5226 [bufnum, lnum, col, off] | |
| 5227 | |
| 1621 | 5228 "bufnum" is the buffer number. Zero can be used for the |
| 856 | 5229 current buffer. Setting the cursor is only possible for |
| 707 | 5230 the current buffer. To set a mark in another buffer you can |
| 5231 use the |bufnr()| function to turn a file name into a buffer | |
| 5232 number. | |
| 798 | 5233 Does not change the jumplist. |
| 707 | 5234 |
| 5235 "lnum" and "col" are the position in the buffer. The first | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5236 column is 1. Use a zero "lnum" to delete a mark. If "col" is |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5237 smaller than 1 then 1 is used. |
| 707 | 5238 |
| 5239 The "off" number is only used when 'virtualedit' is set. Then | |
| 5240 it is the offset in screen columns from the start of the | |
| 1266 | 5241 character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last |
| 707 | 5242 character. |
| 5243 | |
| 1533 | 5244 Returns 0 when the position could be set, -1 otherwise. |
| 5245 An error message is given if {expr} is invalid. | |
| 5246 | |
| 707 | 5247 Also see |getpos()| |
| 5248 | |
| 1156 | 5249 This does not restore the preferred column for moving |
| 5250 vertically. See |winrestview()| for that. | |
| 5251 | |
| 707 | 5252 |
| 277 | 5253 setqflist({list} [, {action}]) *setqflist()* |
| 647 | 5254 Create or replace or add to the quickfix list using the items |
| 5255 in {list}. Each item in {list} is a dictionary. | |
| 5256 Non-dictionary items in {list} are ignored. Each dictionary | |
| 5257 item can contain the following entries: | |
| 230 | 5258 |
| 1065 | 5259 bufnr buffer number; must be the number of a valid |
| 1621 | 5260 buffer |
| 1065 | 5261 filename name of a file; only used when "bufnr" is not |
| 1621 | 5262 present or it is invalid. |
| 230 | 5263 lnum line number in the file |
| 233 | 5264 pattern search pattern used to locate the error |
| 230 | 5265 col column number |
| 233 | 5266 vcol when non-zero: "col" is visual column |
| 856 | 5267 when zero: "col" is byte index |
| 233 | 5268 nr error number |
| 230 | 5269 text description of the error |
| 233 | 5270 type single-character error type, 'E', 'W', etc. |
| 5271 | |
| 5272 The "col", "vcol", "nr", "type" and "text" entries are | |
| 5273 optional. Either "lnum" or "pattern" entry can be used to | |
| 5274 locate a matching error line. | |
| 1065 | 5275 If the "filename" and "bufnr" entries are not present or |
| 5276 neither the "lnum" or "pattern" entries are present, then the | |
| 5277 item will not be handled as an error line. | |
| 230 | 5278 If both "pattern" and "lnum" are present then "pattern" will |
| 5279 be used. | |
| 2152 | 5280 If you supply an empty {list}, the quickfix list will be |
| 5281 cleared. | |
| 1065 | 5282 Note that the list is not exactly the same as what |
| 5283 |getqflist()| returns. | |
| 230 | 5284 |
| 277 | 5285 If {action} is set to 'a', then the items from {list} are |
| 5286 added to the existing quickfix list. If there is no existing | |
| 5287 list, then a new list is created. If {action} is set to 'r', | |
| 5288 then the items from the current quickfix list are replaced | |
| 5289 with the items from {list}. If {action} is not present or is | |
| 5290 set to ' ', then a new list is created. | |
| 5291 | |
| 230 | 5292 Returns zero for success, -1 for failure. |
| 5293 | |
| 5294 This function can be used to create a quickfix list | |
| 5295 independent of the 'errorformat' setting. Use a command like | |
| 5296 ":cc 1" to jump to the first position. | |
| 5297 | |
| 5298 | |
| 7 | 5299 *setreg()* |
| 5300 setreg({regname}, {value} [,{options}]) | |
| 5301 Set the register {regname} to {value}. | |
| 5302 If {options} contains "a" or {regname} is upper case, | |
| 5303 then the value is appended. | |
| 2423 | 5304 {options} can also contain a register type specification: |
| 7 | 5305 "c" or "v" |characterwise| mode |
| 5306 "l" or "V" |linewise| mode | |
| 5307 "b" or "<CTRL-V>" |blockwise-visual| mode | |
| 5308 If a number immediately follows "b" or "<CTRL-V>" then this is | |
| 5309 used as the width of the selection - if it is not specified | |
| 5310 then the width of the block is set to the number of characters | |
| 1266 | 5311 in the longest line (counting a <Tab> as 1 character). |
| 7 | 5312 |
| 5313 If {options} contains no register settings, then the default | |
| 5314 is to use character mode unless {value} ends in a <NL>. | |
| 3830 | 5315 Setting the '=' register is not possible, but you can use > |
| 5316 :let @= = var_expr | |
| 5317 < Returns zero for success, non-zero for failure. | |
| 7 | 5318 |
| 5319 Examples: > | |
| 5320 :call setreg(v:register, @*) | |
| 5321 :call setreg('*', @%, 'ac') | |
| 5322 :call setreg('a', "1\n2\n3", 'b5') | |
| 5323 | |
| 5324 < This example shows using the functions to save and restore a | |
| 5325 register. > | |
| 282 | 5326 :let var_a = getreg('a', 1) |
| 7 | 5327 :let var_amode = getregtype('a') |
| 5328 .... | |
| 5329 :call setreg('a', var_a, var_amode) | |
| 5330 | |
| 5331 < You can also change the type of a register by appending | |
| 5332 nothing: > | |
| 5333 :call setreg('a', '', 'al') | |
| 5334 | |
|
2207
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
5335 settabvar({tabnr}, {varname}, {val}) *settabvar()* |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
5336 Set tab-local variable {varname} to {val} in tab page {tabnr}. |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
5337 |t:var| |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
5338 Note that the variable name without "t:" must be used. |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
5339 Tabs are numbered starting with one. |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
5340 This function is not available in the |sandbox|. |
|
b17bbfa96fa0
Add the settabvar() and gettabvar() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2206
diff
changeset
|
5341 |
| 831 | 5342 settabwinvar({tabnr}, {winnr}, {varname}, {val}) *settabwinvar()* |
| 5343 Set option or local variable {varname} in window {winnr} to | |
| 5344 {val}. | |
| 5345 Tabs are numbered starting with one. For the current tabpage | |
| 5346 use |setwinvar()|. | |
| 5347 When {winnr} is zero the current window is used. | |
| 7 | 5348 This also works for a global or local buffer option, but it |
| 5349 doesn't work for a global or local buffer variable. | |
| 5350 For a local buffer option the global value is unchanged. | |
| 5351 Note that the variable name without "w:" must be used. | |
| 831 | 5352 Examples: > |
| 5353 :call settabwinvar(1, 1, "&list", 0) | |
| 5354 :call settabwinvar(3, 2, "myvar", "foobar") | |
| 5355 < This function is not available in the |sandbox|. | |
| 5356 | |
| 5357 setwinvar({nr}, {varname}, {val}) *setwinvar()* | |
| 5358 Like |settabwinvar()| for the current tab page. | |
| 7 | 5359 Examples: > |
| 5360 :call setwinvar(1, "&list", 0) | |
| 5361 :call setwinvar(2, "myvar", "foobar") | |
| 5362 | |
| 4126 | 5363 sha256({string}) *sha256()* |
| 5364 Returns a String with 64 hex charactes, which is the SHA256 | |
| 5365 checksum of {string}. | |
| 5366 {only available when compiled with the |+cryptv| feature} | |
| 5367 | |
| 1661 | 5368 shellescape({string} [, {special}]) *shellescape()* |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5369 Escape {string} for use as a shell command argument. |
| 985 | 5370 On MS-Windows and MS-DOS, when 'shellslash' is not set, it |
| 1661 | 5371 will enclose {string} in double quotes and double all double |
| 985 | 5372 quotes within {string}. |
| 5373 For other systems, it will enclose {string} in single quotes | |
| 5374 and replace all "'" with "'\''". | |
| 1661 | 5375 When the {special} argument is present and it's a non-zero |
| 5376 Number or a non-empty String (|non-zero-arg|), then special | |
| 1698 | 5377 items such as "!", "%", "#" and "<cword>" will be preceded by |
| 5378 a backslash. This backslash will be removed again by the |:!| | |
| 1661 | 5379 command. |
| 1698 | 5380 The "!" character will be escaped (again with a |non-zero-arg| |
| 5381 {special}) when 'shell' contains "csh" in the tail. That is | |
| 5382 because for csh and tcsh "!" is used for history replacement | |
| 5383 even when inside single quotes. | |
| 5384 The <NL> character is also escaped. With a |non-zero-arg| | |
| 5385 {special} and 'shell' containing "csh" in the tail it's | |
| 5386 escaped a second time. | |
| 1661 | 5387 Example of use with a |:!| command: > |
| 5388 :exe '!dir ' . shellescape(expand('<cfile>'), 1) | |
| 5389 < This results in a directory listing for the file under the | |
| 5390 cursor. Example of use with |system()|: > | |
| 5391 :call system("chmod +w -- " . shellescape(expand("%"))) | |
| 985 | 5392 |
| 5393 | |
| 3875 | 5394 shiftwidth() *shiftwidth()* |
| 5395 Returns the effective value of 'shiftwidth'. This is the | |
| 5396 'shiftwidth' value unless it is zero, in which case it is the | |
| 5397 'tabstop' value. To be backwards compatible in indent | |
| 5398 plugins, use this: > | |
| 5399 if exists('*shiftwidth') | |
| 5400 func s:sw() | |
| 5401 return shiftwidth() | |
| 5402 endfunc | |
| 5403 else | |
| 5404 func s:sw() | |
| 5405 return &sw | |
| 5406 endfunc | |
| 5407 endif | |
| 5408 < And then use s:sw() instead of &sw. | |
| 5409 | |
| 5410 | |
| 7 | 5411 simplify({filename}) *simplify()* |
| 5412 Simplify the file name as much as possible without changing | |
| 5413 the meaning. Shortcuts (on MS-Windows) or symbolic links (on | |
| 5414 Unix) are not resolved. If the first path component in | |
| 5415 {filename} designates the current directory, this will be | |
| 5416 valid for the result as well. A trailing path separator is | |
| 5417 not removed either. | |
| 5418 Example: > | |
| 5419 simplify("./dir/.././/file/") == "./file/" | |
| 5420 < Note: The combination "dir/.." is only removed if "dir" is | |
| 5421 a searchable directory or does not exist. On Unix, it is also | |
| 5422 removed when "dir" is a symbolic link within the same | |
| 5423 directory. In order to resolve all the involved symbolic | |
| 5424 links before simplifying the path name, use |resolve()|. | |
| 5425 | |
| 82 | 5426 |
| 1621 | 5427 sin({expr}) *sin()* |
| 5428 Return the sine of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float|. | |
| 5429 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 5430 Examples: > | |
| 5431 :echo sin(100) | |
| 5432 < -0.506366 > | |
| 5433 :echo sin(-4.01) | |
| 5434 < 0.763301 | |
| 5435 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 5436 | |
| 5437 | |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5438 sinh({expr}) *sinh()* |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
5439 Return the hyperbolic sine of {expr} as a |Float| in the range |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5440 [-inf, inf]. |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
5441 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5442 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5443 :echo sinh(0.5) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5444 < 0.521095 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5445 :echo sinh(-0.9) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5446 < -1.026517 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
5447 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5448 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5449 |
| 2902 | 5450 sort({list} [, {func} [, {dict}]]) *sort()* *E702* |
| 82 | 5451 Sort the items in {list} in-place. Returns {list}. If you |
| 5452 want a list to remain unmodified make a copy first: > | |
| 5453 :let sortedlist = sort(copy(mylist)) | |
| 5454 < Uses the string representation of each item to sort on. | |
| 692 | 5455 Numbers sort after Strings, |Lists| after Numbers. |
| 282 | 5456 For sorting text in the current buffer use |:sort|. |
| 82 | 5457 When {func} is given and it is one then case is ignored. |
| 2902 | 5458 {dict} is for functions with the "dict" attribute. It will be |
| 5459 used to set the local variable "self". |Dictionary-function| | |
| 685 | 5460 When {func} is a |Funcref| or a function name, this function |
| 5461 is called to compare items. The function is invoked with two | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5462 items as argument and must return zero if they are equal, 1 or |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5463 bigger if the first one sorts after the second one, -1 or |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5464 smaller if the first one sorts before the second one. |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5465 Example: > |
| 82 | 5466 func MyCompare(i1, i2) |
| 5467 return a:i1 == a:i2 ? 0 : a:i1 > a:i2 ? 1 : -1 | |
| 5468 endfunc | |
| 5469 let sortedlist = sort(mylist, "MyCompare") | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5470 < A shorter compare version for this specific simple case, which |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5471 ignores overflow: > |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5472 func MyCompare(i1, i2) |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5473 return a:i1 - a:i2 |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5474 endfunc |
| 344 | 5475 < |
| 374 | 5476 *soundfold()* |
| 5477 soundfold({word}) | |
| 5478 Return the sound-folded equivalent of {word}. Uses the first | |
| 1621 | 5479 language in 'spelllang' for the current window that supports |
| 375 | 5480 soundfolding. 'spell' must be set. When no sound folding is |
| 5481 possible the {word} is returned unmodified. | |
| 374 | 5482 This can be used for making spelling suggestions. Note that |
| 5483 the method can be quite slow. | |
| 5484 | |
| 344 | 5485 *spellbadword()* |
| 532 | 5486 spellbadword([{sentence}]) |
| 5487 Without argument: The result is the badly spelled word under | |
| 5488 or after the cursor. The cursor is moved to the start of the | |
| 5489 bad word. When no bad word is found in the cursor line the | |
| 5490 result is an empty string and the cursor doesn't move. | |
| 5491 | |
| 5492 With argument: The result is the first word in {sentence} that | |
| 5493 is badly spelled. If there are no spelling mistakes the | |
| 5494 result is an empty string. | |
| 5495 | |
| 5496 The return value is a list with two items: | |
| 5497 - The badly spelled word or an empty string. | |
| 5498 - The type of the spelling error: | |
| 856 | 5499 "bad" spelling mistake |
| 532 | 5500 "rare" rare word |
| 5501 "local" word only valid in another region | |
| 5502 "caps" word should start with Capital | |
| 5503 Example: > | |
| 5504 echo spellbadword("the quik brown fox") | |
| 5505 < ['quik', 'bad'] ~ | |
| 5506 | |
| 5507 The spelling information for the current window is used. The | |
| 5508 'spell' option must be set and the value of 'spelllang' is | |
| 5509 used. | |
| 344 | 5510 |
| 5511 *spellsuggest()* | |
| 537 | 5512 spellsuggest({word} [, {max} [, {capital}]]) |
| 685 | 5513 Return a |List| with spelling suggestions to replace {word}. |
| 344 | 5514 When {max} is given up to this number of suggestions are |
| 5515 returned. Otherwise up to 25 suggestions are returned. | |
| 5516 | |
| 537 | 5517 When the {capital} argument is given and it's non-zero only |
| 5518 suggestions with a leading capital will be given. Use this | |
| 5519 after a match with 'spellcapcheck'. | |
| 5520 | |
| 344 | 5521 {word} can be a badly spelled word followed by other text. |
| 5522 This allows for joining two words that were split. The | |
| 359 | 5523 suggestions also include the following text, thus you can |
| 5524 replace a line. | |
| 5525 | |
| 5526 {word} may also be a good word. Similar words will then be | |
| 537 | 5527 returned. {word} itself is not included in the suggestions, |
| 5528 although it may appear capitalized. | |
| 344 | 5529 |
| 5530 The spelling information for the current window is used. The | |
| 375 | 5531 'spell' option must be set and the values of 'spelllang' and |
| 5532 'spellsuggest' are used. | |
| 344 | 5533 |
| 82 | 5534 |
| 282 | 5535 split({expr} [, {pattern} [, {keepempty}]]) *split()* |
| 685 | 5536 Make a |List| out of {expr}. When {pattern} is omitted or |
| 5537 empty each white-separated sequence of characters becomes an | |
| 5538 item. | |
| 82 | 5539 Otherwise the string is split where {pattern} matches, |
| 3920 | 5540 removing the matched characters. 'ignorecase' is not used |
| 5541 here, add \c to ignore case. |/\c| | |
| 282 | 5542 When the first or last item is empty it is omitted, unless the |
| 5543 {keepempty} argument is given and it's non-zero. | |
| 293 | 5544 Other empty items are kept when {pattern} matches at least one |
| 5545 character or when {keepempty} is non-zero. | |
| 82 | 5546 Example: > |
| 95 | 5547 :let words = split(getline('.'), '\W\+') |
| 282 | 5548 < To split a string in individual characters: > |
| 236 | 5549 :for c in split(mystring, '\zs') |
| 258 | 5550 < If you want to keep the separator you can also use '\zs': > |
| 5551 :echo split('abc:def:ghi', ':\zs') | |
| 5552 < ['abc:', 'def:', 'ghi'] ~ | |
| 282 | 5553 Splitting a table where the first element can be empty: > |
| 5554 :let items = split(line, ':', 1) | |
| 5555 < The opposite function is |join()|. | |
| 82 | 5556 |
| 5557 | |
| 1621 | 5558 sqrt({expr}) *sqrt()* |
| 5559 Return the non-negative square root of Float {expr} as a | |
| 5560 |Float|. | |
| 5561 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. When {expr} | |
| 5562 is negative the result is NaN (Not a Number). | |
| 5563 Examples: > | |
| 5564 :echo sqrt(100) | |
| 5565 < 10.0 > | |
| 5566 :echo sqrt(-4.01) | |
| 5567 < nan | |
| 1668 | 5568 "nan" may be different, it depends on system libraries. |
| 1621 | 5569 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
| 5570 | |
| 5571 | |
| 5572 str2float( {expr}) *str2float()* | |
| 5573 Convert String {expr} to a Float. This mostly works the same | |
| 5574 as when using a floating point number in an expression, see | |
| 5575 |floating-point-format|. But it's a bit more permissive. | |
| 5576 E.g., "1e40" is accepted, while in an expression you need to | |
| 5577 write "1.0e40". | |
| 5578 Text after the number is silently ignored. | |
| 5579 The decimal point is always '.', no matter what the locale is | |
| 5580 set to. A comma ends the number: "12,345.67" is converted to | |
| 5581 12.0. You can strip out thousands separators with | |
| 5582 |substitute()|: > | |
| 5583 let f = str2float(substitute(text, ',', '', 'g')) | |
| 5584 < {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 5585 | |
| 5586 | |
| 782 | 5587 str2nr( {expr} [, {base}]) *str2nr()* |
| 5588 Convert string {expr} to a number. | |
| 5589 {base} is the conversion base, it can be 8, 10 or 16. | |
| 5590 When {base} is omitted base 10 is used. This also means that | |
| 5591 a leading zero doesn't cause octal conversion to be used, as | |
| 5592 with the default String to Number conversion. | |
| 5593 When {base} is 16 a leading "0x" or "0X" is ignored. With a | |
| 5594 different base the result will be zero. | |
| 5595 Text after the number is silently ignored. | |
| 856 | 5596 |
| 782 | 5597 |
|
2338
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5598 strchars({expr}) *strchars()* |
|
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5599 The result is a Number, which is the number of characters |
|
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5600 String {expr} occupies. Composing characters are counted |
|
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5601 separately. |
|
2339
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5602 Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strwidth()|. |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5603 |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5604 strdisplaywidth({expr}[, {col}]) *strdisplaywidth()* |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5605 The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5606 String {expr} occupies on the screen. |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5607 When {col} is omitted zero is used. Otherwise it is the |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5608 screen column where to start. This matters for Tab |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5609 characters. |
|
2343
0703d2fd5749
Last few changes for the 7.3a BETA release.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5610 The option settings of the current window are used. This |
|
0703d2fd5749
Last few changes for the 7.3a BETA release.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5611 matters for anything that's displayed differently, such as |
|
0703d2fd5749
Last few changes for the 7.3a BETA release.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5612 'tabstop' and 'display'. |
|
2339
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5613 When {expr} contains characters with East Asian Width Class |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5614 Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'. |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5615 Also see |strlen()|, |strwidth()| and |strchars()|. |
|
2338
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5616 |
| 7 | 5617 strftime({format} [, {time}]) *strftime()* |
| 5618 The result is a String, which is a formatted date and time, as | |
| 5619 specified by the {format} string. The given {time} is used, | |
| 5620 or the current time if no time is given. The accepted | |
| 5621 {format} depends on your system, thus this is not portable! | |
| 5622 See the manual page of the C function strftime() for the | |
| 5623 format. The maximum length of the result is 80 characters. | |
| 5624 See also |localtime()| and |getftime()|. | |
| 5625 The language can be changed with the |:language| command. | |
| 5626 Examples: > | |
| 5627 :echo strftime("%c") Sun Apr 27 11:49:23 1997 | |
| 5628 :echo strftime("%Y %b %d %X") 1997 Apr 27 11:53:25 | |
| 5629 :echo strftime("%y%m%d %T") 970427 11:53:55 | |
| 5630 :echo strftime("%H:%M") 11:55 | |
| 5631 :echo strftime("%c", getftime("file.c")) | |
| 5632 Show mod time of file.c. | |
| 82 | 5633 < Not available on all systems. To check use: > |
| 5634 :if exists("*strftime") | |
| 5635 | |
| 133 | 5636 stridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) *stridx()* |
| 5637 The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in | |
| 5638 {haystack} of the first occurrence of the String {needle}. | |
| 140 | 5639 If {start} is specified, the search starts at index {start}. |
| 5640 This can be used to find a second match: > | |
| 2662 | 5641 :let colon1 = stridx(line, ":") |
| 5642 :let colon2 = stridx(line, ":", colon1 + 1) | |
| 140 | 5643 < The search is done case-sensitive. |
| 205 | 5644 For pattern searches use |match()|. |
| 133 | 5645 -1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}. |
| 140 | 5646 See also |strridx()|. |
| 5647 Examples: > | |
| 7 | 5648 :echo stridx("An Example", "Example") 3 |
| 5649 :echo stridx("Starting point", "Start") 0 | |
| 5650 :echo stridx("Starting point", "start") -1 | |
| 856 | 5651 < *strstr()* *strchr()* |
| 170 | 5652 stridx() works similar to the C function strstr(). When used |
| 5653 with a single character it works similar to strchr(). | |
| 5654 | |
| 55 | 5655 *string()* |
| 95 | 5656 string({expr}) Return {expr} converted to a String. If {expr} is a Number, |
| 1621 | 5657 Float, String or a composition of them, then the result can be |
| 5658 parsed back with |eval()|. | |
| 55 | 5659 {expr} type result ~ |
| 99 | 5660 String 'string' |
| 95 | 5661 Number 123 |
| 1621 | 5662 Float 123.123456 or 1.123456e8 |
| 99 | 5663 Funcref function('name') |
| 95 | 5664 List [item, item] |
| 323 | 5665 Dictionary {key: value, key: value} |
| 99 | 5666 Note that in String values the ' character is doubled. |
| 1156 | 5667 Also see |strtrans()|. |
| 55 | 5668 |
| 7 | 5669 *strlen()* |
| 5670 strlen({expr}) The result is a Number, which is the length of the String | |
| 502 | 5671 {expr} in bytes. |
| 5672 If you want to count the number of multi-byte characters (not | |
| 5673 counting composing characters) use something like this: > | |
| 7 | 5674 |
| 5675 :let len = strlen(substitute(str, ".", "x", "g")) | |
| 502 | 5676 < |
| 55 | 5677 If the argument is a Number it is first converted to a String. |
| 5678 For other types an error is given. | |
|
2339
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5679 Also see |len()|, |strchars()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |
|
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5680 |strwidth()|. |
| 7 | 5681 |
| 5682 strpart({src}, {start}[, {len}]) *strpart()* | |
| 5683 The result is a String, which is part of {src}, starting from | |
| 574 | 5684 byte {start}, with the byte length {len}. |
| 7 | 5685 When non-existing bytes are included, this doesn't result in |
| 5686 an error, the bytes are simply omitted. | |
| 5687 If {len} is missing, the copy continues from {start} till the | |
| 5688 end of the {src}. > | |
| 5689 strpart("abcdefg", 3, 2) == "de" | |
| 5690 strpart("abcdefg", -2, 4) == "ab" | |
| 5691 strpart("abcdefg", 5, 4) == "fg" | |
| 1621 | 5692 strpart("abcdefg", 3) == "defg" |
| 7 | 5693 < Note: To get the first character, {start} must be 0. For |
| 5694 example, to get three bytes under and after the cursor: > | |
| 823 | 5695 strpart(getline("."), col(".") - 1, 3) |
| 7 | 5696 < |
| 140 | 5697 strridx({haystack}, {needle} [, {start}]) *strridx()* |
| 5698 The result is a Number, which gives the byte index in | |
| 5699 {haystack} of the last occurrence of the String {needle}. | |
| 5700 When {start} is specified, matches beyond this index are | |
| 5701 ignored. This can be used to find a match before a previous | |
| 5702 match: > | |
| 5703 :let lastcomma = strridx(line, ",") | |
| 5704 :let comma2 = strridx(line, ",", lastcomma - 1) | |
| 5705 < The search is done case-sensitive. | |
| 133 | 5706 For pattern searches use |match()|. |
| 5707 -1 is returned if the {needle} does not occur in {haystack}. | |
| 22 | 5708 If the {needle} is empty the length of {haystack} is returned. |
| 236 | 5709 See also |stridx()|. Examples: > |
| 7 | 5710 :echo strridx("an angry armadillo", "an") 3 |
| 856 | 5711 < *strrchr()* |
| 170 | 5712 When used with a single character it works similar to the C |
| 5713 function strrchr(). | |
| 5714 | |
| 7 | 5715 strtrans({expr}) *strtrans()* |
| 5716 The result is a String, which is {expr} with all unprintable | |
| 5717 characters translated into printable characters |'isprint'|. | |
| 5718 Like they are shown in a window. Example: > | |
| 5719 echo strtrans(@a) | |
| 5720 < This displays a newline in register a as "^@" instead of | |
| 5721 starting a new line. | |
| 5722 | |
|
2338
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5723 strwidth({expr}) *strwidth()* |
|
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5724 The result is a Number, which is the number of display cells |
|
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5725 String {expr} occupies. A Tab character is counted as one |
|
2339
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5726 cell, alternatively use |strdisplaywidth()|. |
|
2338
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5727 When {expr} contains characters with East Asian Width Class |
|
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5728 Ambiguous, this function's return value depends on 'ambiwidth'. |
|
2339
01e4b4d37842
Added strdisplaywidth() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2338
diff
changeset
|
5729 Also see |strlen()|, |strdisplaywidth()| and |strchars()|. |
|
2338
da6ec32d8d8f
Added strwidth() and strchars() functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2337
diff
changeset
|
5730 |
| 7 | 5731 submatch({nr}) *submatch()* |
| 2908 | 5732 Only for an expression in a |:substitute| command or |
| 5733 substitute() function. | |
| 5734 Returns the {nr}'th submatch of the matched text. When {nr} | |
| 5735 is 0 the whole matched text is returned. | |
| 5736 Also see |sub-replace-expression|. | |
| 7 | 5737 Example: > |
| 5738 :s/\d\+/\=submatch(0) + 1/ | |
| 5739 < This finds the first number in the line and adds one to it. | |
| 5740 A line break is included as a newline character. | |
| 5741 | |
| 5742 substitute({expr}, {pat}, {sub}, {flags}) *substitute()* | |
| 5743 The result is a String, which is a copy of {expr}, in which | |
| 2908 | 5744 the first match of {pat} is replaced with {sub}. |
| 5745 When {flags} is "g", all matches of {pat} in {expr} are | |
| 5746 replaced. Otherwise {flags} should be "". | |
| 5747 | |
| 5748 This works like the ":substitute" command (without any flags). | |
| 5749 But the matching with {pat} is always done like the 'magic' | |
| 5750 option is set and 'cpoptions' is empty (to make scripts | |
| 3967 | 5751 portable). 'ignorecase' is still relevant, use |/\c| or |/\C| |
| 5752 if you want to ignore or match case and ignore 'ignorecase'. | |
| 5753 'smartcase' is not used. See |string-match| for how {pat} is | |
| 5754 used. | |
| 2908 | 5755 |
| 5756 A "~" in {sub} is not replaced with the previous {sub}. | |
| 7 | 5757 Note that some codes in {sub} have a special meaning |
| 1621 | 5758 |sub-replace-special|. For example, to replace something with |
| 7 | 5759 "\n" (two characters), use "\\\\n" or '\\n'. |
| 2908 | 5760 |
| 7 | 5761 When {pat} does not match in {expr}, {expr} is returned |
| 5762 unmodified. | |
| 2908 | 5763 |
| 7 | 5764 Example: > |
| 5765 :let &path = substitute(&path, ",\\=[^,]*$", "", "") | |
| 5766 < This removes the last component of the 'path' option. > | |
| 5767 :echo substitute("testing", ".*", "\\U\\0", "") | |
| 5768 < results in "TESTING". | |
| 2908 | 5769 |
| 5770 When {sub} starts with "\=", the remainder is interpreted as | |
| 5771 an expression. See |sub-replace-expression|. Example: > | |
| 2833 | 5772 :echo substitute(s, '%\(\x\x\)', |
| 5773 \ '\=nr2char("0x" . submatch(1))', 'g') | |
| 7 | 5774 |
| 32 | 5775 synID({lnum}, {col}, {trans}) *synID()* |
| 7 | 5776 The result is a Number, which is the syntax ID at the position |
| 32 | 5777 {lnum} and {col} in the current window. |
| 7 | 5778 The syntax ID can be used with |synIDattr()| and |
| 5779 |synIDtrans()| to obtain syntax information about text. | |
| 419 | 5780 |
| 32 | 5781 {col} is 1 for the leftmost column, {lnum} is 1 for the first |
| 419 | 5782 line. 'synmaxcol' applies, in a longer line zero is returned. |
| 5783 | |
| 7 | 5784 When {trans} is non-zero, transparent items are reduced to the |
| 1621 | 5785 item that they reveal. This is useful when wanting to know |
| 7 | 5786 the effective color. When {trans} is zero, the transparent |
| 5787 item is returned. This is useful when wanting to know which | |
| 5788 syntax item is effective (e.g. inside parens). | |
| 5789 Warning: This function can be very slow. Best speed is | |
| 5790 obtained by going through the file in forward direction. | |
| 5791 | |
| 5792 Example (echoes the name of the syntax item under the cursor): > | |
| 5793 :echo synIDattr(synID(line("."), col("."), 1), "name") | |
| 5794 < | |
|
2401
e7751177126b
Add the synconcealed() function and use it for :TOhtml. (Benjamin Fritz)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2350
diff
changeset
|
5795 |
| 7 | 5796 synIDattr({synID}, {what} [, {mode}]) *synIDattr()* |
| 5797 The result is a String, which is the {what} attribute of | |
| 5798 syntax ID {synID}. This can be used to obtain information | |
| 5799 about a syntax item. | |
| 5800 {mode} can be "gui", "cterm" or "term", to get the attributes | |
| 1621 | 5801 for that mode. When {mode} is omitted, or an invalid value is |
| 7 | 5802 used, the attributes for the currently active highlighting are |
| 5803 used (GUI, cterm or term). | |
| 5804 Use synIDtrans() to follow linked highlight groups. | |
| 5805 {what} result | |
| 5806 "name" the name of the syntax item | |
| 5807 "fg" foreground color (GUI: color name used to set | |
| 5808 the color, cterm: color number as a string, | |
| 5809 term: empty string) | |
| 1755 | 5810 "bg" background color (as with "fg") |
|
2106
15674e198164
updated for version 7.2.389
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2072
diff
changeset
|
5811 "font" font name (only available in the GUI) |
|
15674e198164
updated for version 7.2.389
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2072
diff
changeset
|
5812 |highlight-font| |
| 1755 | 5813 "sp" special color (as with "fg") |highlight-guisp| |
| 7 | 5814 "fg#" like "fg", but for the GUI and the GUI is |
| 5815 running the name in "#RRGGBB" form | |
| 5816 "bg#" like "fg#" for "bg" | |
| 1755 | 5817 "sp#" like "fg#" for "sp" |
| 7 | 5818 "bold" "1" if bold |
| 5819 "italic" "1" if italic | |
| 5820 "reverse" "1" if reverse | |
| 5821 "inverse" "1" if inverse (= reverse) | |
|
2106
15674e198164
updated for version 7.2.389
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
2072
diff
changeset
|
5822 "standout" "1" if standout |
| 7 | 5823 "underline" "1" if underlined |
| 205 | 5824 "undercurl" "1" if undercurled |
| 7 | 5825 |
| 5826 Example (echoes the color of the syntax item under the | |
| 5827 cursor): > | |
| 5828 :echo synIDattr(synIDtrans(synID(line("."), col("."), 1)), "fg") | |
| 5829 < | |
| 5830 synIDtrans({synID}) *synIDtrans()* | |
| 5831 The result is a Number, which is the translated syntax ID of | |
| 5832 {synID}. This is the syntax group ID of what is being used to | |
| 5833 highlight the character. Highlight links given with | |
| 5834 ":highlight link" are followed. | |
| 5835 | |
|
2608
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5836 synconcealed({lnum}, {col}) *synconcealed()* |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5837 The result is a List. The first item in the list is 0 if the |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5838 character at the position {lnum} and {col} is not part of a |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5839 concealable region, 1 if it is. The second item in the list is |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5840 a string. If the first item is 1, the second item contains the |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5841 text which will be displayed in place of the concealed text, |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5842 depending on the current setting of 'conceallevel'. The third |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5843 and final item in the list is a unique number representing the |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5844 specific syntax region matched. This allows detection of the |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5845 beginning of a new concealable region if there are two |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5846 consecutive regions with the same replacement character. |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5847 For an example use see $VIMRUNTIME/syntax/2html.vim . |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5848 |
|
7d8af31066c8
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2596
diff
changeset
|
5849 |
| 1500 | 5850 synstack({lnum}, {col}) *synstack()* |
| 5851 Return a |List|, which is the stack of syntax items at the | |
| 5852 position {lnum} and {col} in the current window. Each item in | |
| 5853 the List is an ID like what |synID()| returns. | |
| 5854 The first item in the List is the outer region, following are | |
| 5855 items contained in that one. The last one is what |synID()| | |
| 5856 returns, unless not the whole item is highlighted or it is a | |
| 5857 transparent item. | |
| 5858 This function is useful for debugging a syntax file. | |
| 5859 Example that shows the syntax stack under the cursor: > | |
| 5860 for id in synstack(line("."), col(".")) | |
| 5861 echo synIDattr(id, "name") | |
| 5862 endfor | |
|
2290
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2281
diff
changeset
|
5863 < When the position specified with {lnum} and {col} is invalid |
|
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2281
diff
changeset
|
5864 nothing is returned. The position just after the last |
|
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2281
diff
changeset
|
5865 character in a line and the first column in an empty line are |
|
22529abcd646
Fixed ":s" message. Docs updates.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2281
diff
changeset
|
5866 valid positions. |
| 1500 | 5867 |
| 24 | 5868 system({expr} [, {input}]) *system()* *E677* |
| 5869 Get the output of the shell command {expr}. | |
| 5870 When {input} is given, this string is written to a file and | |
| 5871 passed as stdin to the command. The string is written as-is, | |
| 5872 you need to take care of using the correct line separators | |
| 170 | 5873 yourself. Pipes are not used. |
| 1661 | 5874 Note: Use |shellescape()| to escape special characters in a |
| 5875 command argument. Newlines in {expr} may cause the command to | |
| 5876 fail. The characters in 'shellquote' and 'shellxquote' may | |
| 5877 also cause trouble. | |
| 7 | 5878 This is not to be used for interactive commands. |
| 1661 | 5879 |
| 7 | 5880 The result is a String. Example: > |
| 1661 | 5881 :let files = system("ls " . shellescape(expand('%:h'))) |
| 7 | 5882 |
| 5883 < To make the result more system-independent, the shell output | |
| 5884 is filtered to replace <CR> with <NL> for Macintosh, and | |
| 5885 <CR><NL> with <NL> for DOS-like systems. | |
| 5886 The command executed is constructed using several options: | |
| 5887 'shell' 'shellcmdflag' 'shellxquote' {expr} 'shellredir' {tmp} 'shellxquote' | |
| 5888 ({tmp} is an automatically generated file name). | |
| 5889 For Unix and OS/2 braces are put around {expr} to allow for | |
| 5890 concatenated commands. | |
| 5891 | |
| 794 | 5892 The command will be executed in "cooked" mode, so that a |
| 5893 CTRL-C will interrupt the command (on Unix at least). | |
| 5894 | |
| 7 | 5895 The resulting error code can be found in |v:shell_error|. |
| 5896 This function will fail in |restricted-mode|. | |
| 625 | 5897 |
| 5898 Note that any wrong value in the options mentioned above may | |
| 5899 make the function fail. It has also been reported to fail | |
| 5900 when using a security agent application. | |
| 7 | 5901 Unlike ":!cmd" there is no automatic check for changed files. |
| 5902 Use |:checktime| to force a check. | |
| 5903 | |
| 205 | 5904 |
| 677 | 5905 tabpagebuflist([{arg}]) *tabpagebuflist()* |
| 685 | 5906 The result is a |List|, where each item is the number of the |
| 677 | 5907 buffer associated with each window in the current tab page. |
| 5908 {arg} specifies the number of tab page to be used. When | |
| 5909 omitted the current tab page is used. | |
| 5910 When {arg} is invalid the number zero is returned. | |
| 5911 To get a list of all buffers in all tabs use this: > | |
| 3445 | 5912 let buflist = [] |
| 677 | 5913 for i in range(tabpagenr('$')) |
| 3445 | 5914 call extend(buflist, tabpagebuflist(i + 1)) |
| 677 | 5915 endfor |
| 5916 < Note that a buffer may appear in more than one window. | |
| 5917 | |
| 5918 | |
| 5919 tabpagenr([{arg}]) *tabpagenr()* | |
| 674 | 5920 The result is a Number, which is the number of the current |
| 5921 tab page. The first tab page has number 1. | |
| 5922 When the optional argument is "$", the number of the last tab | |
| 5923 page is returned (the tab page count). | |
| 5924 The number can be used with the |:tab| command. | |
| 5925 | |
| 5926 | |
| 677 | 5927 tabpagewinnr({tabarg}, [{arg}]) *tabpagewinnr()* |
|
2569
f612f6b0b883
Docs fix for tabpagewinnr(). (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2561
diff
changeset
|
5928 Like |winnr()| but for tab page {tabarg}. |
| 677 | 5929 {tabarg} specifies the number of tab page to be used. |
| 5930 {arg} is used like with |winnr()|: | |
| 5931 - When omitted the current window number is returned. This is | |
| 5932 the window which will be used when going to this tab page. | |
| 5933 - When "$" the number of windows is returned. | |
| 5934 - When "#" the previous window nr is returned. | |
| 5935 Useful examples: > | |
| 5936 tabpagewinnr(1) " current window of tab page 1 | |
| 5937 tabpagewinnr(4, '$') " number of windows in tab page 4 | |
| 5938 < When {tabarg} is invalid zero is returned. | |
| 5939 | |
| 805 | 5940 *tagfiles()* |
| 5941 tagfiles() Returns a |List| with the file names used to search for tags | |
| 5942 for the current buffer. This is the 'tags' option expanded. | |
| 5943 | |
| 5944 | |
| 205 | 5945 taglist({expr}) *taglist()* |
| 5946 Returns a list of tags matching the regular expression {expr}. | |
| 438 | 5947 Each list item is a dictionary with at least the following |
| 5948 entries: | |
| 648 | 5949 name Name of the tag. |
| 5950 filename Name of the file where the tag is | |
| 1156 | 5951 defined. It is either relative to the |
| 5952 current directory or a full path. | |
| 205 | 5953 cmd Ex command used to locate the tag in |
| 5954 the file. | |
| 648 | 5955 kind Type of the tag. The value for this |
| 205 | 5956 entry depends on the language specific |
| 1156 | 5957 kind values. Only available when |
| 5958 using a tags file generated by | |
| 5959 Exuberant ctags or hdrtag. | |
| 648 | 5960 static A file specific tag. Refer to |
| 205 | 5961 |static-tag| for more information. |
| 1156 | 5962 More entries may be present, depending on the content of the |
| 5963 tags file: access, implementation, inherits and signature. | |
| 5964 Refer to the ctags documentation for information about these | |
| 5965 fields. For C code the fields "struct", "class" and "enum" | |
| 5966 may appear, they give the name of the entity the tag is | |
| 5967 contained in. | |
| 452 | 5968 |
| 216 | 5969 The ex-command 'cmd' can be either an ex search pattern, a |
| 5970 line number or a line number followed by a byte number. | |
| 205 | 5971 |
| 5972 If there are no matching tags, then an empty list is returned. | |
| 5973 | |
| 5974 To get an exact tag match, the anchors '^' and '$' should be | |
| 4073 | 5975 used in {expr}. This also make the function work faster. |
| 5976 Refer to |tag-regexp| for more information about the tag | |
| 5977 search regular expression pattern. | |
| 205 | 5978 |
| 5979 Refer to |'tags'| for information about how the tags file is | |
| 5980 located by Vim. Refer to |tags-file-format| for the format of | |
| 5981 the tags file generated by the different ctags tools. | |
| 5982 | |
| 7 | 5983 tempname() *tempname()* *temp-file-name* |
| 5984 The result is a String, which is the name of a file that | |
| 1621 | 5985 doesn't exist. It can be used for a temporary file. The name |
| 7 | 5986 is different for at least 26 consecutive calls. Example: > |
| 5987 :let tmpfile = tempname() | |
| 5988 :exe "redir > " . tmpfile | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
5989 < For Unix, the file will be in a private directory |tempfile|. |
| 7 | 5990 For MS-Windows forward slashes are used when the 'shellslash' |
| 5991 option is set or when 'shellcmdflag' starts with '-'. | |
| 5992 | |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5993 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5994 tan({expr}) *tan()* |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
5995 Return the tangent of {expr}, measured in radians, as a |Float| |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5996 in the range [-inf, inf]. |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
5997 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5998 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
5999 :echo tan(10) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6000 < 0.648361 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6001 :echo tan(-4.01) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6002 < -1.181502 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
6003 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6004 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6005 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6006 tanh({expr}) *tanh()* |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
6007 Return the hyperbolic tangent of {expr} as a |Float| in the |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6008 range [-1, 1]. |
|
2337
a0f87fc19d1d
Better conceal in help. (partly by Dominique Pelle)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2320
diff
changeset
|
6009 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6010 Examples: > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6011 :echo tanh(0.5) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6012 < 0.462117 > |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6013 :echo tanh(-1) |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6014 < -0.761594 |
|
2570
71b56b4e7785
Make the references to features in the help more consistent. (Sylvain Hitier)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2569
diff
changeset
|
6015 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} |
|
2206
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6016 |
|
a8afba7027ae
Add extra floating point functions.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2154
diff
changeset
|
6017 |
| 7 | 6018 tolower({expr}) *tolower()* |
| 6019 The result is a copy of the String given, with all uppercase | |
| 6020 characters turned into lowercase (just like applying |gu| to | |
| 6021 the string). | |
| 6022 | |
| 6023 toupper({expr}) *toupper()* | |
| 6024 The result is a copy of the String given, with all lowercase | |
| 6025 characters turned into uppercase (just like applying |gU| to | |
| 6026 the string). | |
| 6027 | |
| 15 | 6028 tr({src}, {fromstr}, {tostr}) *tr()* |
| 6029 The result is a copy of the {src} string with all characters | |
| 6030 which appear in {fromstr} replaced by the character in that | |
| 6031 position in the {tostr} string. Thus the first character in | |
| 6032 {fromstr} is translated into the first character in {tostr} | |
| 6033 and so on. Exactly like the unix "tr" command. | |
| 6034 This code also deals with multibyte characters properly. | |
| 6035 | |
| 6036 Examples: > | |
| 6037 echo tr("hello there", "ht", "HT") | |
| 6038 < returns "Hello THere" > | |
| 6039 echo tr("<blob>", "<>", "{}") | |
| 6040 < returns "{blob}" | |
| 6041 | |
| 1621 | 6042 trunc({expr}) *trunc()* |
| 1668 | 6043 Return the largest integral value with magnitude less than or |
| 1621 | 6044 equal to {expr} as a |Float| (truncate towards zero). |
| 6045 {expr} must evaluate to a |Float| or a |Number|. | |
| 6046 Examples: > | |
| 6047 echo trunc(1.456) | |
| 6048 < 1.0 > | |
| 6049 echo trunc(-5.456) | |
| 6050 < -5.0 > | |
| 6051 echo trunc(4.0) | |
| 6052 < 4.0 | |
| 6053 {only available when compiled with the |+float| feature} | |
| 6054 | |
| 87 | 6055 *type()* |
| 6056 type({expr}) The result is a Number, depending on the type of {expr}: | |
| 153 | 6057 Number: 0 |
| 6058 String: 1 | |
| 6059 Funcref: 2 | |
| 6060 List: 3 | |
| 6061 Dictionary: 4 | |
| 1621 | 6062 Float: 5 |
| 153 | 6063 To avoid the magic numbers it should be used this way: > |
| 87 | 6064 :if type(myvar) == type(0) |
| 6065 :if type(myvar) == type("") | |
| 6066 :if type(myvar) == type(function("tr")) | |
| 6067 :if type(myvar) == type([]) | |
| 153 | 6068 :if type(myvar) == type({}) |
| 1621 | 6069 :if type(myvar) == type(0.0) |
| 7 | 6070 |
|
2236
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
6071 undofile({name}) *undofile()* |
|
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
6072 Return the name of the undo file that would be used for a file |
|
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
6073 with name {name} when writing. This uses the 'undodir' |
|
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
6074 option, finding directories that exist. It does not check if |
|
2250
1bac28a53fae
Add the conceal patch from Vince Negri.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2249
diff
changeset
|
6075 the undo file exists. |
|
2249
6d3d35ff2c2b
Use full path in undofile(). Updated docs.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2236
diff
changeset
|
6076 {name} is always expanded to the full path, since that is what |
|
6d3d35ff2c2b
Use full path in undofile(). Updated docs.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2236
diff
changeset
|
6077 is used internally. |
|
3507
8201108e9cf0
More runtime file fixes for 'compatible' mode.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3492
diff
changeset
|
6078 If {name} is empty undofile() returns an empty string, since a |
|
8201108e9cf0
More runtime file fixes for 'compatible' mode.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3492
diff
changeset
|
6079 buffer without a file name will not write an undo file. |
|
2236
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
6080 Useful in combination with |:wundo| and |:rundo|. |
|
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
6081 When compiled without the +persistent_undo option this always |
|
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
6082 returns an empty string. |
|
dc2e5ec0500d
Added the undofile() function. Updated runtime files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2226
diff
changeset
|
6083 |
|
2280
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6084 undotree() *undotree()* |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6085 Return the current state of the undo tree in a dictionary with |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6086 the following items: |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6087 "seq_last" The highest undo sequence number used. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6088 "seq_cur" The sequence number of the current position in |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6089 the undo tree. This differs from "seq_last" |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6090 when some changes were undone. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6091 "time_cur" Time last used for |:earlier| and related |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6092 commands. Use |strftime()| to convert to |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6093 something readable. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6094 "save_last" Number of the last file write. Zero when no |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6095 write yet. |
|
2281
e41433ea71df
Added ":earlier 1f" and ":later 1f".
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2280
diff
changeset
|
6096 "save_cur" Number of the current position in the undo |
|
e41433ea71df
Added ":earlier 1f" and ":later 1f".
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2280
diff
changeset
|
6097 tree. |
|
2280
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6098 "synced" Non-zero when the last undo block was synced. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6099 This happens when waiting from input from the |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6100 user. See |undo-blocks|. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6101 "entries" A list of dictionaries with information about |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6102 undo blocks. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6103 |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6104 The first item in the "entries" list is the oldest undo item. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6105 Each List item is a Dictionary with these items: |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6106 "seq" Undo sequence number. Same as what appears in |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6107 |:undolist|. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6108 "time" Timestamp when the change happened. Use |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6109 |strftime()| to convert to something readable. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6110 "newhead" Only appears in the item that is the last one |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6111 that was added. This marks the last change |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6112 and where further changes will be added. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6113 "curhead" Only appears in the item that is the last one |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6114 that was undone. This marks the current |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6115 position in the undo tree, the block that will |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6116 be used by a redo command. When nothing was |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6117 undone after the last change this item will |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6118 not appear anywhere. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6119 "save" Only appears on the last block before a file |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6120 write. The number is the write count. The |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6121 first write has number 1, the last one the |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6122 "save_last" mentioned above. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6123 "alt" Alternate entry. This is again a List of undo |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6124 blocks. Each item may again have an "alt" |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6125 item. |
|
941ff1cd317a
Add file save counter to undo information. Add undotree() function.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2252
diff
changeset
|
6126 |
| 140 | 6127 values({dict}) *values()* |
| 1621 | 6128 Return a |List| with all the values of {dict}. The |List| is |
| 685 | 6129 in arbitrary order. |
| 140 | 6130 |
| 6131 | |
| 7 | 6132 virtcol({expr}) *virtcol()* |
| 6133 The result is a Number, which is the screen column of the file | |
| 6134 position given with {expr}. That is, the last screen position | |
| 6135 occupied by the character at that position, when the screen | |
| 6136 would be of unlimited width. When there is a <Tab> at the | |
| 6137 position, the returned Number will be the column at the end of | |
| 6138 the <Tab>. For example, for a <Tab> in column 1, with 'ts' | |
| 3445 | 6139 set to 8, it returns 8. |conceal| is ignored. |
| 1317 | 6140 For the byte position use |col()|. |
| 6141 For the use of {expr} see |col()|. | |
| 6142 When 'virtualedit' is used {expr} can be [lnum, col, off], where | |
| 703 | 6143 "off" is the offset in screen columns from the start of the |
| 1266 | 6144 character. E.g., a position within a <Tab> or after the last |
| 2965 | 6145 character. When "off" is omitted zero is used. |
| 7 | 6146 When Virtual editing is active in the current mode, a position |
| 6147 beyond the end of the line can be returned. |'virtualedit'| | |
| 6148 The accepted positions are: | |
| 6149 . the cursor position | |
| 6150 $ the end of the cursor line (the result is the | |
| 6151 number of displayed characters in the cursor line | |
| 6152 plus one) | |
| 6153 'x position of mark x (if the mark is not set, 0 is | |
| 6154 returned) | |
| 6155 Note that only marks in the current file can be used. | |
| 6156 Examples: > | |
| 6157 virtcol(".") with text "foo^Lbar", with cursor on the "^L", returns 5 | |
| 6158 virtcol("$") with text "foo^Lbar", returns 9 | |
| 1621 | 6159 virtcol("'t") with text " there", with 't at 'h', returns 6 |
| 6160 < The first column is 1. 0 is returned for an error. | |
| 1156 | 6161 A more advanced example that echoes the maximum length of |
| 6162 all lines: > | |
| 6163 echo max(map(range(1, line('$')), "virtcol([v:val, '$'])")) | |
| 6164 | |
| 7 | 6165 |
| 6166 visualmode([expr]) *visualmode()* | |
| 6167 The result is a String, which describes the last Visual mode | |
| 856 | 6168 used in the current buffer. Initially it returns an empty |
| 6169 string, but once Visual mode has been used, it returns "v", | |
| 6170 "V", or "<CTRL-V>" (a single CTRL-V character) for | |
| 6171 character-wise, line-wise, or block-wise Visual mode | |
| 6172 respectively. | |
| 7 | 6173 Example: > |
| 6174 :exe "normal " . visualmode() | |
| 6175 < This enters the same Visual mode as before. It is also useful | |
| 6176 in scripts if you wish to act differently depending on the | |
| 6177 Visual mode that was used. | |
| 1621 | 6178 If Visual mode is active, use |mode()| to get the Visual mode |
| 6179 (e.g., in a |:vmap|). | |
| 1661 | 6180 *non-zero-arg* |
| 6181 If [expr] is supplied and it evaluates to a non-zero Number or | |
| 6182 a non-empty String, then the Visual mode will be cleared and | |
| 1621 | 6183 the old value is returned. Note that " " and "0" are also |
| 1661 | 6184 non-empty strings, thus cause the mode to be cleared. A List, |
| 6185 Dictionary or Float is not a Number or String, thus does not | |
| 6186 cause the mode to be cleared. | |
| 7 | 6187 |
| 4151 | 6188 wildmenumode() *wildmenumode()* |
| 6189 Returns non-zero when the wildmenu is active and zero | |
| 6190 otherwise. See 'wildmenu' and 'wildmode'. | |
| 6191 This can be used in mappings to handle the 'wildcharm' option | |
| 6192 gracefully. (Makes only sense with |mapmode-c| mappings). | |
| 6193 | |
| 6194 For example to make <c-j> work like <down> in wildmode, use: > | |
| 6195 :cnoremap <expr> <C-j> wildmenumode() ? "\<Down>\<Tab>" : "\<c-j>" | |
| 6196 < | |
| 6197 (Note, this needs the 'wildcharm' option set appropriately). | |
| 6198 | |
| 6199 | |
| 7 | 6200 *winbufnr()* |
| 6201 winbufnr({nr}) The result is a Number, which is the number of the buffer | |
| 236 | 6202 associated with window {nr}. When {nr} is zero, the number of |
| 7 | 6203 the buffer in the current window is returned. When window |
| 6204 {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned. | |
| 6205 Example: > | |
| 6206 :echo "The file in the current window is " . bufname(winbufnr(0)) | |
| 6207 < | |
| 6208 *wincol()* | |
| 6209 wincol() The result is a Number, which is the virtual column of the | |
| 6210 cursor in the window. This is counting screen cells from the | |
| 6211 left side of the window. The leftmost column is one. | |
| 6212 | |
| 6213 winheight({nr}) *winheight()* | |
| 6214 The result is a Number, which is the height of window {nr}. | |
| 6215 When {nr} is zero, the height of the current window is | |
| 6216 returned. When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned. | |
| 6217 An existing window always has a height of zero or more. | |
| 6218 Examples: > | |
| 6219 :echo "The current window has " . winheight(0) . " lines." | |
| 6220 < | |
| 6221 *winline()* | |
| 6222 winline() The result is a Number, which is the screen line of the cursor | |
| 1621 | 6223 in the window. This is counting screen lines from the top of |
| 7 | 6224 the window. The first line is one. |
| 531 | 6225 If the cursor was moved the view on the file will be updated |
| 6226 first, this may cause a scroll. | |
| 7 | 6227 |
| 6228 *winnr()* | |
| 20 | 6229 winnr([{arg}]) The result is a Number, which is the number of the current |
| 6230 window. The top window has number 1. | |
| 6231 When the optional argument is "$", the number of the | |
| 3967 | 6232 last window is returned (the window count). > |
| 6233 let window_count = winnr('$') | |
| 6234 < When the optional argument is "#", the number of the last | |
| 20 | 6235 accessed window is returned (where |CTRL-W_p| goes to). |
| 1156 | 6236 If there is no previous window or it is in another tab page 0 |
| 6237 is returned. | |
| 20 | 6238 The number can be used with |CTRL-W_w| and ":wincmd w" |
| 6239 |:wincmd|. | |
| 1156 | 6240 Also see |tabpagewinnr()|. |
| 7 | 6241 |
| 6242 *winrestcmd()* | |
| 6243 winrestcmd() Returns a sequence of |:resize| commands that should restore | |
| 6244 the current window sizes. Only works properly when no windows | |
| 712 | 6245 are opened or closed and the current window and tab page is |
| 6246 unchanged. | |
| 7 | 6247 Example: > |
| 6248 :let cmd = winrestcmd() | |
| 6249 :call MessWithWindowSizes() | |
| 6250 :exe cmd | |
| 712 | 6251 < |
| 6252 *winrestview()* | |
| 6253 winrestview({dict}) | |
| 6254 Uses the |Dictionary| returned by |winsaveview()| to restore | |
| 6255 the view of the current window. | |
| 6256 If you have changed the values the result is unpredictable. | |
| 6257 If the window size changed the result won't be the same. | |
| 6258 | |
| 6259 *winsaveview()* | |
| 6260 winsaveview() Returns a |Dictionary| that contains information to restore | |
| 6261 the view of the current window. Use |winrestview()| to | |
| 6262 restore the view. | |
| 6263 This is useful if you have a mapping that jumps around in the | |
| 6264 buffer and you want to go back to the original view. | |
| 6265 This does not save fold information. Use the 'foldenable' | |
| 798 | 6266 option to temporarily switch off folding, so that folds are |
| 6267 not opened when moving around. | |
| 712 | 6268 The return value includes: |
| 6269 lnum cursor line number | |
| 6270 col cursor column | |
| 6271 coladd cursor column offset for 'virtualedit' | |
| 6272 curswant column for vertical movement | |
| 6273 topline first line in the window | |
| 6274 topfill filler lines, only in diff mode | |
| 6275 leftcol first column displayed | |
| 6276 skipcol columns skipped | |
| 6277 Note that no option values are saved. | |
| 6278 | |
| 7 | 6279 |
| 6280 winwidth({nr}) *winwidth()* | |
| 6281 The result is a Number, which is the width of window {nr}. | |
| 6282 When {nr} is zero, the width of the current window is | |
| 6283 returned. When window {nr} doesn't exist, -1 is returned. | |
| 6284 An existing window always has a width of zero or more. | |
| 6285 Examples: > | |
| 6286 :echo "The current window has " . winwidth(0) . " columns." | |
| 6287 :if winwidth(0) <= 50 | |
| 6288 : exe "normal 50\<C-W>|" | |
| 6289 :endif | |
| 6290 < | |
| 158 | 6291 *writefile()* |
| 6292 writefile({list}, {fname} [, {binary}]) | |
| 685 | 6293 Write |List| {list} to file {fname}. Each list item is |
| 158 | 6294 separated with a NL. Each list item must be a String or |
| 6295 Number. | |
| 6296 When {binary} is equal to "b" binary mode is used: There will | |
| 6297 not be a NL after the last list item. An empty item at the | |
| 6298 end does cause the last line in the file to end in a NL. | |
| 6299 All NL characters are replaced with a NUL character. | |
| 6300 Inserting CR characters needs to be done before passing {list} | |
| 6301 to writefile(). | |
| 6302 An existing file is overwritten, if possible. | |
| 6303 When the write fails -1 is returned, otherwise 0. There is an | |
| 6304 error message if the file can't be created or when writing | |
| 6305 fails. | |
| 6306 Also see |readfile()|. | |
| 6307 To copy a file byte for byte: > | |
| 6308 :let fl = readfile("foo", "b") | |
| 6309 :call writefile(fl, "foocopy", "b") | |
| 3214 | 6310 |
| 6311 | |
| 6312 xor({expr}, {expr}) *xor()* | |
| 6313 Bitwise XOR on the two arguments. The arguments are converted | |
| 6314 to a number. A List, Dict or Float argument causes an error. | |
| 6315 Example: > | |
| 6316 :let bits = xor(bits, 0x80) | |
| 3256 | 6317 < |
| 3214 | 6318 |
| 7 | 6319 |
| 6320 *feature-list* | |
| 6321 There are three types of features: | |
| 6322 1. Features that are only supported when they have been enabled when Vim | |
| 6323 was compiled |+feature-list|. Example: > | |
| 6324 :if has("cindent") | |
| 6325 2. Features that are only supported when certain conditions have been met. | |
| 6326 Example: > | |
| 6327 :if has("gui_running") | |
| 6328 < *has-patch* | |
| 6329 3. Included patches. First check |v:version| for the version of Vim. | |
| 6330 Then the "patch123" feature means that patch 123 has been included for | |
| 6331 this version. Example (checking version 6.2.148 or later): > | |
| 6332 :if v:version > 602 || v:version == 602 && has("patch148") | |
| 1156 | 6333 < Note that it's possible for patch 147 to be omitted even though 148 is |
| 6334 included. | |
| 7 | 6335 |
| 6336 all_builtin_terms Compiled with all builtin terminals enabled. | |
| 6337 amiga Amiga version of Vim. | |
| 6338 arabic Compiled with Arabic support |Arabic|. | |
| 6339 arp Compiled with ARP support (Amiga). | |
| 613 | 6340 autocmd Compiled with autocommand support. |autocommand| |
| 7 | 6341 balloon_eval Compiled with |balloon-eval| support. |
| 435 | 6342 balloon_multiline GUI supports multiline balloons. |
| 7 | 6343 beos BeOS version of Vim. |
| 6344 browse Compiled with |:browse| support, and browse() will | |
| 6345 work. | |
| 3682 | 6346 browsefilter Compiled with support for |browsefilter|. |
| 7 | 6347 builtin_terms Compiled with some builtin terminals. |
| 6348 byte_offset Compiled with support for 'o' in 'statusline' | |
| 6349 cindent Compiled with 'cindent' support. | |
| 6350 clientserver Compiled with remote invocation support |clientserver|. | |
| 6351 clipboard Compiled with 'clipboard' support. | |
| 6352 cmdline_compl Compiled with |cmdline-completion| support. | |
| 6353 cmdline_hist Compiled with |cmdline-history| support. | |
| 6354 cmdline_info Compiled with 'showcmd' and 'ruler' support. | |
| 6355 comments Compiled with |'comments'| support. | |
| 2681 | 6356 compatible Compiled to be very Vi compatible. |
| 7 | 6357 cryptv Compiled with encryption support |encryption|. |
| 6358 cscope Compiled with |cscope| support. | |
| 6359 debug Compiled with "DEBUG" defined. | |
| 6360 dialog_con Compiled with console dialog support. | |
| 6361 dialog_gui Compiled with GUI dialog support. | |
| 6362 diff Compiled with |vimdiff| and 'diff' support. | |
| 6363 digraphs Compiled with support for digraphs. | |
| 6364 dnd Compiled with support for the "~ register |quote_~|. | |
| 2681 | 6365 dos16 16 bits DOS version of Vim. |
| 7 | 6366 dos32 32 bits DOS (DJGPP) version of Vim. |
| 6367 ebcdic Compiled on a machine with ebcdic character set. | |
| 6368 emacs_tags Compiled with support for Emacs tags. | |
| 6369 eval Compiled with expression evaluation support. Always | |
| 6370 true, of course! | |
| 6371 ex_extra Compiled with extra Ex commands |+ex_extra|. | |
| 6372 extra_search Compiled with support for |'incsearch'| and | |
| 6373 |'hlsearch'| | |
| 6374 farsi Compiled with Farsi support |farsi|. | |
| 6375 file_in_path Compiled with support for |gf| and |<cfile>| | |
| 168 | 6376 filterpipe When 'shelltemp' is off pipes are used for shell |
| 6377 read/write/filter commands | |
| 7 | 6378 find_in_path Compiled with support for include file searches |
| 6379 |+find_in_path|. | |
| 1621 | 6380 float Compiled with support for |Float|. |
| 7 | 6381 fname_case Case in file names matters (for Amiga, MS-DOS, and |
| 6382 Windows this is not present). | |
| 6383 folding Compiled with |folding| support. | |
| 6384 footer Compiled with GUI footer support. |gui-footer| | |
| 6385 fork Compiled to use fork()/exec() instead of system(). | |
| 6386 gettext Compiled with message translation |multi-lang| | |
| 6387 gui Compiled with GUI enabled. | |
| 6388 gui_athena Compiled with Athena GUI. | |
| 2681 | 6389 gui_gnome Compiled with Gnome support (gui_gtk is also defined). |
| 7 | 6390 gui_gtk Compiled with GTK+ GUI (any version). |
| 6391 gui_gtk2 Compiled with GTK+ 2 GUI (gui_gtk is also defined). | |
| 6392 gui_mac Compiled with Macintosh GUI. | |
| 6393 gui_motif Compiled with Motif GUI. | |
| 6394 gui_photon Compiled with Photon GUI. | |
| 2681 | 6395 gui_running Vim is running in the GUI, or it will start soon. |
| 7 | 6396 gui_win32 Compiled with MS Windows Win32 GUI. |
| 6397 gui_win32s idem, and Win32s system being used (Windows 3.1) | |
| 6398 hangul_input Compiled with Hangul input support. |hangul| | |
| 6399 iconv Can use iconv() for conversion. | |
| 6400 insert_expand Compiled with support for CTRL-X expansion commands in | |
| 6401 Insert mode. | |
| 6402 jumplist Compiled with |jumplist| support. | |
| 6403 keymap Compiled with 'keymap' support. | |
| 6404 langmap Compiled with 'langmap' support. | |
| 6405 libcall Compiled with |libcall()| support. | |
| 6406 linebreak Compiled with 'linebreak', 'breakat' and 'showbreak' | |
| 6407 support. | |
| 6408 lispindent Compiled with support for lisp indenting. | |
| 6409 listcmds Compiled with commands for the buffer list |:files| | |
| 6410 and the argument list |arglist|. | |
| 6411 localmap Compiled with local mappings and abbr. |:map-local| | |
|
2320
966a5609669e
Added Lua interfae. (Luis Carvalho)
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2290
diff
changeset
|
6412 lua Compiled with Lua interface |Lua|. |
| 7 | 6413 mac Macintosh version of Vim. |
| 6414 macunix Macintosh version of Vim, using Unix files (OS-X). | |
| 6415 menu Compiled with support for |:menu|. | |
| 6416 mksession Compiled with support for |:mksession|. | |
| 6417 modify_fname Compiled with file name modifiers. |filename-modifiers| | |
| 6418 mouse Compiled with support mouse. | |
| 6419 mouse_dec Compiled with support for Dec terminal mouse. | |
| 6420 mouse_gpm Compiled with support for gpm (Linux console mouse) | |
| 6421 mouse_netterm Compiled with support for netterm mouse. | |
| 6422 mouse_pterm Compiled with support for qnx pterm mouse. | |
| 1621 | 6423 mouse_sysmouse Compiled with support for sysmouse (*BSD console mouse) |
| 3750 | 6424 mouse_sgr Compiled with support for sgr mouse. |
| 3224 | 6425 mouse_urxvt Compiled with support for urxvt mouse. |
| 7 | 6426 mouse_xterm Compiled with support for xterm mouse. |
| 2681 | 6427 mouseshape Compiled with support for 'mouseshape'. |
| 1768 | 6428 multi_byte Compiled with support for 'encoding' |
| 6429 multi_byte_encoding 'encoding' is set to a multi-byte encoding. | |
| 7 | 6430 multi_byte_ime Compiled with support for IME input method. |
| 6431 multi_lang Compiled with support for multiple languages. | |
| 14 | 6432 mzscheme Compiled with MzScheme interface |mzscheme|. |
| 2681 | 6433 netbeans_enabled Compiled with support for |netbeans| and connected. |
| 7 | 6434 netbeans_intg Compiled with support for |netbeans|. |
| 6435 ole Compiled with OLE automation support for Win32. | |
| 6436 os2 OS/2 version of Vim. | |
| 6437 path_extra Compiled with up/downwards search in 'path' and 'tags' | |
| 6438 perl Compiled with Perl interface. | |
|
2214
f8222d1f9a73
Included patch for persistent undo. Lots of changes and added test.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2210
diff
changeset
|
6439 persistent_undo Compiled with support for persistent undo history. |
| 7 | 6440 postscript Compiled with PostScript file printing. |
| 6441 printer Compiled with |:hardcopy| support. | |
| 170 | 6442 profile Compiled with |:profile| support. |
| 2826 | 6443 python Compiled with Python 2.x interface. |has-python| |
| 6444 python3 Compiled with Python 3.x interface. |has-python| | |
| 7 | 6445 qnx QNX version of Vim. |
| 6446 quickfix Compiled with |quickfix| support. | |
| 857 | 6447 reltime Compiled with |reltime()| support. |
| 7 | 6448 rightleft Compiled with 'rightleft' support. |
| 6449 ruby Compiled with Ruby interface |ruby|. | |
| 6450 scrollbind Compiled with 'scrollbind' support. | |
| 6451 showcmd Compiled with 'showcmd' support. | |
| 6452 signs Compiled with |:sign| support. | |
| 6453 smartindent Compiled with 'smartindent' support. | |
| 9 | 6454 sniff Compiled with SNiFF interface support. |
| 2681 | 6455 spell Compiled with spell checking support |spell|. |
| 1989 | 6456 startuptime Compiled with |--startuptime| support. |
| 7 | 6457 statusline Compiled with support for 'statusline', 'rulerformat' |
| 6458 and special formats of 'titlestring' and 'iconstring'. | |
| 6459 sun_workshop Compiled with support for Sun |workshop|. | |
| 314 | 6460 syntax Compiled with syntax highlighting support |syntax|. |
| 7 | 6461 syntax_items There are active syntax highlighting items for the |
| 6462 current buffer. | |
| 6463 system Compiled to use system() instead of fork()/exec(). | |
| 6464 tag_binary Compiled with binary searching in tags files | |
| 6465 |tag-binary-search|. | |
| 6466 tag_old_static Compiled with support for old static tags | |
| 6467 |tag-old-static|. | |
| 6468 tag_any_white Compiled with support for any white characters in tags | |
| 6469 files |tag-any-white|. | |
| 6470 tcl Compiled with Tcl interface. | |
| 6471 terminfo Compiled with terminfo instead of termcap. | |
| 6472 termresponse Compiled with support for |t_RV| and |v:termresponse|. | |
| 6473 textobjects Compiled with support for |text-objects|. | |
| 6474 tgetent Compiled with tgetent support, able to use a termcap | |
| 6475 or terminfo file. | |
| 6476 title Compiled with window title support |'title'|. | |
| 6477 toolbar Compiled with support for |gui-toolbar|. | |
| 6478 unix Unix version of Vim. | |
| 6479 user_commands User-defined commands. | |
| 2681 | 6480 vertsplit Compiled with vertically split windows |:vsplit|. |
| 2581 | 6481 vim_starting True while initial source'ing takes place. |startup| |
| 2681 | 6482 viminfo Compiled with viminfo support. |
| 7 | 6483 virtualedit Compiled with 'virtualedit' option. |
| 6484 visual Compiled with Visual mode. | |
| 6485 visualextra Compiled with extra Visual mode commands. | |
| 6486 |blockwise-operators|. | |
| 6487 vms VMS version of Vim. | |
| 6488 vreplace Compiled with |gR| and |gr| commands. | |
| 6489 wildignore Compiled with 'wildignore' option. | |
| 6490 wildmenu Compiled with 'wildmenu' option. | |
| 6491 win16 Win16 version of Vim (MS-Windows 3.1). | |
|
2698
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
6492 win32 Win32 version of Vim (MS-Windows 95 and later, 32 or |
|
b6471224d2af
Updated runtime files and translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2681
diff
changeset
|
6493 64 bits) |
| 2681 | 6494 win32unix Win32 version of Vim, using Unix files (Cygwin) |
| 7 | 6495 win64 Win64 version of Vim (MS-Windows 64 bit). |
| 6496 win95 Win32 version for MS-Windows 95/98/ME. | |
| 2681 | 6497 winaltkeys Compiled with 'winaltkeys' option. |
| 6498 windows Compiled with support for more than one window. | |
| 7 | 6499 writebackup Compiled with 'writebackup' default on. |
| 6500 xfontset Compiled with X fontset support |xfontset|. | |
| 6501 xim Compiled with X input method support |xim|. | |
| 3256 | 6502 xpm_w32 Compiled with pixmap support for Win32. |
| 7 | 6503 xsmp Compiled with X session management support. |
| 6504 xsmp_interact Compiled with interactive X session management support. | |
| 6505 xterm_clipboard Compiled with support for xterm clipboard. | |
| 6506 xterm_save Compiled with support for saving and restoring the | |
| 6507 xterm screen. | |
| 6508 x11 Compiled with X11 support. | |
| 6509 | |
| 6510 *string-match* | |
| 6511 Matching a pattern in a String | |
| 6512 | |
| 6513 A regexp pattern as explained at |pattern| is normally used to find a match in | |
| 6514 the buffer lines. When a pattern is used to find a match in a String, almost | |
| 6515 everything works in the same way. The difference is that a String is handled | |
| 6516 like it is one line. When it contains a "\n" character, this is not seen as a | |
| 6517 line break for the pattern. It can be matched with a "\n" in the pattern, or | |
| 6518 with ".". Example: > | |
| 6519 :let a = "aaaa\nxxxx" | |
| 6520 :echo matchstr(a, "..\n..") | |
| 6521 aa | |
| 6522 xx | |
| 6523 :echo matchstr(a, "a.x") | |
| 6524 a | |
| 6525 x | |
| 6526 | |
| 6527 Don't forget that "^" will only match at the first character of the String and | |
| 6528 "$" at the last character of the string. They don't match after or before a | |
| 6529 "\n". | |
| 6530 | |
| 6531 ============================================================================== | |
| 6532 5. Defining functions *user-functions* | |
| 6533 | |
| 6534 New functions can be defined. These can be called just like builtin | |
| 6535 functions. The function executes a sequence of Ex commands. Normal mode | |
| 6536 commands can be executed with the |:normal| command. | |
| 6537 | |
| 6538 The function name must start with an uppercase letter, to avoid confusion with | |
| 6539 builtin functions. To prevent from using the same name in different scripts | |
| 6540 avoid obvious, short names. A good habit is to start the function name with | |
| 6541 the name of the script, e.g., "HTMLcolor()". | |
| 6542 | |
| 504 | 6543 It's also possible to use curly braces, see |curly-braces-names|. And the |
| 6544 |autoload| facility is useful to define a function only when it's called. | |
| 7 | 6545 |
| 6546 *local-function* | |
| 6547 A function local to a script must start with "s:". A local script function | |
| 6548 can only be called from within the script and from functions, user commands | |
| 6549 and autocommands defined in the script. It is also possible to call the | |
| 1698 | 6550 function from a mapping defined in the script, but then |<SID>| must be used |
| 7 | 6551 instead of "s:" when the mapping is expanded outside of the script. |
| 6552 | |
| 6553 *:fu* *:function* *E128* *E129* *E123* | |
| 6554 :fu[nction] List all functions and their arguments. | |
| 6555 | |
| 6556 :fu[nction] {name} List function {name}. | |
| 685 | 6557 {name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a |
| 6558 |Funcref|: > | |
| 114 | 6559 :function dict.init |
| 504 | 6560 |
| 6561 :fu[nction] /{pattern} List functions with a name matching {pattern}. | |
| 6562 Example that lists all functions ending with "File": > | |
| 6563 :function /File$ | |
| 482 | 6564 < |
| 6565 *:function-verbose* | |
| 6566 When 'verbose' is non-zero, listing a function will also display where it was | |
| 6567 last defined. Example: > | |
| 6568 | |
| 6569 :verbose function SetFileTypeSH | |
| 6570 function SetFileTypeSH(name) | |
| 6571 Last set from /usr/share/vim/vim-7.0/filetype.vim | |
| 6572 < | |
| 484 | 6573 See |:verbose-cmd| for more information. |
| 482 | 6574 |
| 3153 | 6575 *E124* *E125* *E853* |
| 102 | 6576 :fu[nction][!] {name}([arguments]) [range] [abort] [dict] |
| 7 | 6577 Define a new function by the name {name}. The name |
| 6578 must be made of alphanumeric characters and '_', and | |
| 6579 must start with a capital or "s:" (see above). | |
| 114 | 6580 |
| 685 | 6581 {name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a |
| 6582 |Funcref|: > | |
| 114 | 6583 :function dict.init(arg) |
| 1621 | 6584 < "dict" must be an existing dictionary. The entry |
| 114 | 6585 "init" is added if it didn't exist yet. Otherwise [!] |
| 1621 | 6586 is required to overwrite an existing function. The |
| 114 | 6587 result is a |Funcref| to a numbered function. The |
| 6588 function can only be used with a |Funcref| and will be | |
| 6589 deleted if there are no more references to it. | |
| 7 | 6590 *E127* *E122* |
| 6591 When a function by this name already exists and [!] is | |
| 6592 not used an error message is given. When [!] is used, | |
| 6593 an existing function is silently replaced. Unless it | |
| 6594 is currently being executed, that is an error. | |
| 133 | 6595 |
| 6596 For the {arguments} see |function-argument|. | |
| 6597 | |
| 7 | 6598 *a:firstline* *a:lastline* |
| 6599 When the [range] argument is added, the function is | |
| 6600 expected to take care of a range itself. The range is | |
| 6601 passed as "a:firstline" and "a:lastline". If [range] | |
| 6602 is excluded, ":{range}call" will call the function for | |
| 6603 each line in the range, with the cursor on the start | |
| 6604 of each line. See |function-range-example|. | |
| 3967 | 6605 The cursor is still moved to the first line of the |
| 6606 range, as is the case with all Ex commands. | |
| 114 | 6607 |
| 7 | 6608 When the [abort] argument is added, the function will |
| 6609 abort as soon as an error is detected. | |
| 114 | 6610 |
| 102 | 6611 When the [dict] argument is added, the function must |
| 1621 | 6612 be invoked through an entry in a |Dictionary|. The |
| 102 | 6613 local variable "self" will then be set to the |
| 6614 dictionary. See |Dictionary-function|. | |
| 7 | 6615 |
| 1621 | 6616 *function-search-undo* |
| 653 | 6617 The last used search pattern and the redo command "." |
| 1621 | 6618 will not be changed by the function. This also |
| 6619 implies that the effect of |:nohlsearch| is undone | |
| 6620 when the function returns. | |
| 653 | 6621 |
| 7 | 6622 *:endf* *:endfunction* *E126* *E193* |
| 6623 :endf[unction] The end of a function definition. Must be on a line | |
| 6624 by its own, without other commands. | |
| 6625 | |
| 6626 *:delf* *:delfunction* *E130* *E131* | |
| 6627 :delf[unction] {name} Delete function {name}. | |
| 685 | 6628 {name} can also be a |Dictionary| entry that is a |
| 6629 |Funcref|: > | |
| 114 | 6630 :delfunc dict.init |
| 1621 | 6631 < This will remove the "init" entry from "dict". The |
| 114 | 6632 function is deleted if there are no more references to |
| 6633 it. | |
| 7 | 6634 *:retu* *:return* *E133* |
| 6635 :retu[rn] [expr] Return from a function. When "[expr]" is given, it is | |
| 6636 evaluated and returned as the result of the function. | |
| 6637 If "[expr]" is not given, the number 0 is returned. | |
| 6638 When a function ends without an explicit ":return", | |
| 6639 the number 0 is returned. | |
| 6640 Note that there is no check for unreachable lines, | |
| 6641 thus there is no warning if commands follow ":return". | |
| 6642 | |
| 6643 If the ":return" is used after a |:try| but before the | |
| 6644 matching |:finally| (if present), the commands | |
| 6645 following the ":finally" up to the matching |:endtry| | |
| 6646 are executed first. This process applies to all | |
| 6647 nested ":try"s inside the function. The function | |
| 6648 returns at the outermost ":endtry". | |
| 6649 | |
| 133 | 6650 *function-argument* *a:var* |
| 1621 | 6651 An argument can be defined by giving its name. In the function this can then |
| 133 | 6652 be used as "a:name" ("a:" for argument). |
| 1156 | 6653 *a:0* *a:1* *a:000* *E740* *...* |
| 133 | 6654 Up to 20 arguments can be given, separated by commas. After the named |
| 6655 arguments an argument "..." can be specified, which means that more arguments | |
| 6656 may optionally be following. In the function the extra arguments can be used | |
| 6657 as "a:1", "a:2", etc. "a:0" is set to the number of extra arguments (which | |
| 685 | 6658 can be 0). "a:000" is set to a |List| that contains these arguments. Note |
| 6659 that "a:1" is the same as "a:000[0]". | |
| 148 | 6660 *E742* |
| 6661 The a: scope and the variables in it cannot be changed, they are fixed. | |
| 1698 | 6662 However, if a |List| or |Dictionary| is used, you can change their contents. |
| 685 | 6663 Thus you can pass a |List| to a function and have the function add an item to |
| 6664 it. If you want to make sure the function cannot change a |List| or | |
| 6665 |Dictionary| use |:lockvar|. | |
| 133 | 6666 |
| 6667 When not using "...", the number of arguments in a function call must be equal | |
| 6668 to the number of named arguments. When using "...", the number of arguments | |
| 6669 may be larger. | |
| 6670 | |
| 6671 It is also possible to define a function without any arguments. You must | |
| 6672 still supply the () then. The body of the function follows in the next lines, | |
| 6673 until the matching |:endfunction|. It is allowed to define another function | |
| 6674 inside a function body. | |
| 6675 | |
| 6676 *local-variables* | |
| 7 | 6677 Inside a function variables can be used. These are local variables, which |
| 6678 will disappear when the function returns. Global variables need to be | |
| 6679 accessed with "g:". | |
| 6680 | |
| 6681 Example: > | |
| 6682 :function Table(title, ...) | |
| 6683 : echohl Title | |
| 6684 : echo a:title | |
| 6685 : echohl None | |
| 140 | 6686 : echo a:0 . " items:" |
| 6687 : for s in a:000 | |
| 6688 : echon ' ' . s | |
| 6689 : endfor | |
| 7 | 6690 :endfunction |
| 6691 | |
| 6692 This function can then be called with: > | |
| 140 | 6693 call Table("Table", "line1", "line2") |
| 6694 call Table("Empty Table") | |
| 7 | 6695 |
| 1156 | 6696 To return more than one value, return a |List|: > |
| 6697 :function Compute(n1, n2) | |
| 7 | 6698 : if a:n2 == 0 |
| 1156 | 6699 : return ["fail", 0] |
| 7 | 6700 : endif |
| 1156 | 6701 : return ["ok", a:n1 / a:n2] |
| 7 | 6702 :endfunction |
| 6703 | |
| 6704 This function can then be called with: > | |
| 1156 | 6705 :let [success, div] = Compute(102, 6) |
| 7 | 6706 :if success == "ok" |
| 6707 : echo div | |
| 6708 :endif | |
| 1156 | 6709 < |
| 786 | 6710 *:cal* *:call* *E107* *E117* |
| 7 | 6711 :[range]cal[l] {name}([arguments]) |
| 6712 Call a function. The name of the function and its arguments | |
| 6713 are as specified with |:function|. Up to 20 arguments can be | |
| 1156 | 6714 used. The returned value is discarded. |
| 7 | 6715 Without a range and for functions that accept a range, the |
| 6716 function is called once. When a range is given the cursor is | |
| 6717 positioned at the start of the first line before executing the | |
| 6718 function. | |
| 6719 When a range is given and the function doesn't handle it | |
| 6720 itself, the function is executed for each line in the range, | |
| 6721 with the cursor in the first column of that line. The cursor | |
| 6722 is left at the last line (possibly moved by the last function | |
| 1621 | 6723 call). The arguments are re-evaluated for each line. Thus |
| 7 | 6724 this works: |
| 6725 *function-range-example* > | |
| 6726 :function Mynumber(arg) | |
| 6727 : echo line(".") . " " . a:arg | |
| 6728 :endfunction | |
| 6729 :1,5call Mynumber(getline(".")) | |
| 6730 < | |
| 6731 The "a:firstline" and "a:lastline" are defined anyway, they | |
| 6732 can be used to do something different at the start or end of | |
| 6733 the range. | |
| 6734 | |
| 6735 Example of a function that handles the range itself: > | |
| 6736 | |
| 6737 :function Cont() range | |
| 6738 : execute (a:firstline + 1) . "," . a:lastline . 's/^/\t\\ ' | |
| 6739 :endfunction | |
| 6740 :4,8call Cont() | |
| 6741 < | |
| 6742 This function inserts the continuation character "\" in front | |
| 6743 of all the lines in the range, except the first one. | |
| 6744 | |
| 1156 | 6745 When the function returns a composite value it can be further |
| 6746 dereferenced, but the range will not be used then. Example: > | |
| 6747 :4,8call GetDict().method() | |
| 6748 < Here GetDict() gets the range but method() does not. | |
| 6749 | |
| 7 | 6750 *E132* |
| 6751 The recursiveness of user functions is restricted with the |'maxfuncdepth'| | |
| 6752 option. | |
| 6753 | |
| 161 | 6754 |
| 6755 AUTOMATICALLY LOADING FUNCTIONS ~ | |
| 7 | 6756 *autoload-functions* |
| 6757 When using many or large functions, it's possible to automatically define them | |
| 161 | 6758 only when they are used. There are two methods: with an autocommand and with |
| 6759 the "autoload" directory in 'runtimepath'. | |
| 6760 | |
| 6761 | |
| 6762 Using an autocommand ~ | |
| 6763 | |
| 170 | 6764 This is introduced in the user manual, section |41.14|. |
| 6765 | |
| 161 | 6766 The autocommand is useful if you have a plugin that is a long Vim script file. |
| 6767 You can define the autocommand and quickly quit the script with |:finish|. | |
| 1621 | 6768 That makes Vim startup faster. The autocommand should then load the same file |
| 161 | 6769 again, setting a variable to skip the |:finish| command. |
| 6770 | |
| 6771 Use the FuncUndefined autocommand event with a pattern that matches the | |
| 6772 function(s) to be defined. Example: > | |
| 7 | 6773 |
| 6774 :au FuncUndefined BufNet* source ~/vim/bufnetfuncs.vim | |
| 6775 | |
| 6776 The file "~/vim/bufnetfuncs.vim" should then define functions that start with | |
| 6777 "BufNet". Also see |FuncUndefined|. | |
| 6778 | |
| 161 | 6779 |
| 6780 Using an autoload script ~ | |
| 168 | 6781 *autoload* *E746* |
| 170 | 6782 This is introduced in the user manual, section |41.15|. |
| 6783 | |
| 161 | 6784 Using a script in the "autoload" directory is simpler, but requires using |
| 6785 exactly the right file name. A function that can be autoloaded has a name | |
| 6786 like this: > | |
| 6787 | |
| 270 | 6788 :call filename#funcname() |
| 161 | 6789 |
| 6790 When such a function is called, and it is not defined yet, Vim will search the | |
| 6791 "autoload" directories in 'runtimepath' for a script file called | |
| 6792 "filename.vim". For example "~/.vim/autoload/filename.vim". That file should | |
| 6793 then define the function like this: > | |
| 6794 | |
| 270 | 6795 function filename#funcname() |
| 161 | 6796 echo "Done!" |
| 6797 endfunction | |
| 6798 | |
| 530 | 6799 The file name and the name used before the # in the function must match |
| 161 | 6800 exactly, and the defined function must have the name exactly as it will be |
| 6801 called. | |
| 6802 | |
| 270 | 6803 It is possible to use subdirectories. Every # in the function name works like |
| 6804 a path separator. Thus when calling a function: > | |
| 6805 | |
| 6806 :call foo#bar#func() | |
| 161 | 6807 |
| 6808 Vim will look for the file "autoload/foo/bar.vim" in 'runtimepath'. | |
| 6809 | |
| 168 | 6810 This also works when reading a variable that has not been set yet: > |
| 6811 | |
| 270 | 6812 :let l = foo#bar#lvar |
| 168 | 6813 |
| 557 | 6814 However, when the autoload script was already loaded it won't be loaded again |
| 6815 for an unknown variable. | |
| 6816 | |
| 168 | 6817 When assigning a value to such a variable nothing special happens. This can |
| 6818 be used to pass settings to the autoload script before it's loaded: > | |
| 6819 | |
| 270 | 6820 :let foo#bar#toggle = 1 |
| 6821 :call foo#bar#func() | |
| 168 | 6822 |
| 164 | 6823 Note that when you make a mistake and call a function that is supposed to be |
| 6824 defined in an autoload script, but the script doesn't actually define the | |
| 6825 function, the script will be sourced every time you try to call the function. | |
| 168 | 6826 And you will get an error message every time. |
| 6827 | |
| 6828 Also note that if you have two script files, and one calls a function in the | |
| 1621 | 6829 other and vice versa, before the used function is defined, it won't work. |
| 168 | 6830 Avoid using the autoload functionality at the toplevel. |
| 161 | 6831 |
| 794 | 6832 Hint: If you distribute a bunch of scripts you can pack them together with the |
| 6833 |vimball| utility. Also read the user manual |distribute-script|. | |
| 6834 | |
| 7 | 6835 ============================================================================== |
| 6836 6. Curly braces names *curly-braces-names* | |
| 6837 | |
|
3410
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
6838 In most places where you can use a variable, you can use a "curly braces name" |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
6839 variable. This is a regular variable name with one or more expressions |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
6840 wrapped in braces {} like this: > |
| 7 | 6841 my_{adjective}_variable |
| 6842 | |
| 6843 When Vim encounters this, it evaluates the expression inside the braces, puts | |
| 6844 that in place of the expression, and re-interprets the whole as a variable | |
| 6845 name. So in the above example, if the variable "adjective" was set to | |
| 6846 "noisy", then the reference would be to "my_noisy_variable", whereas if | |
| 6847 "adjective" was set to "quiet", then it would be to "my_quiet_variable". | |
| 6848 | |
| 6849 One application for this is to create a set of variables governed by an option | |
| 1621 | 6850 value. For example, the statement > |
| 7 | 6851 echo my_{&background}_message |
| 6852 | |
| 6853 would output the contents of "my_dark_message" or "my_light_message" depending | |
| 6854 on the current value of 'background'. | |
| 6855 | |
| 6856 You can use multiple brace pairs: > | |
| 6857 echo my_{adverb}_{adjective}_message | |
| 6858 ..or even nest them: > | |
| 6859 echo my_{ad{end_of_word}}_message | |
| 6860 where "end_of_word" is either "verb" or "jective". | |
| 6861 | |
| 6862 However, the expression inside the braces must evaluate to a valid single | |
| 236 | 6863 variable name, e.g. this is invalid: > |
| 7 | 6864 :let foo='a + b' |
| 6865 :echo c{foo}d | |
| 6866 .. since the result of expansion is "ca + bd", which is not a variable name. | |
| 6867 | |
| 6868 *curly-braces-function-names* | |
| 6869 You can call and define functions by an evaluated name in a similar way. | |
| 6870 Example: > | |
| 6871 :let func_end='whizz' | |
| 6872 :call my_func_{func_end}(parameter) | |
| 6873 | |
| 6874 This would call the function "my_func_whizz(parameter)". | |
| 6875 | |
|
3410
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
6876 This does NOT work: > |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
6877 :let i = 3 |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
6878 :let @{i} = '' " error |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
6879 :echo @{i} " error |
|
94601b379f38
Updated runtime files. Add Dutch translations.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
3398
diff
changeset
|
6880 |
| 7 | 6881 ============================================================================== |
| 6882 7. Commands *expression-commands* | |
| 6883 | |
| 6884 :let {var-name} = {expr1} *:let* *E18* | |
| 6885 Set internal variable {var-name} to the result of the | |
| 6886 expression {expr1}. The variable will get the type | |
| 6887 from the {expr}. If {var-name} didn't exist yet, it | |
| 6888 is created. | |
| 6889 | |
| 85 | 6890 :let {var-name}[{idx}] = {expr1} *E689* |
| 6891 Set a list item to the result of the expression | |
| 6892 {expr1}. {var-name} must refer to a list and {idx} | |
| 6893 must be a valid index in that list. For nested list | |
| 6894 the index can be repeated. | |
| 1621 | 6895 This cannot be used to add an item to a |List|. |
| 6896 This cannot be used to set a byte in a String. You | |
| 6897 can do that like this: > | |
| 6898 :let var = var[0:2] . 'X' . var[4:] | |
| 6899 < | |
| 114 | 6900 *E711* *E719* |
| 6901 :let {var-name}[{idx1}:{idx2}] = {expr1} *E708* *E709* *E710* | |
| 685 | 6902 Set a sequence of items in a |List| to the result of |
| 6903 the expression {expr1}, which must be a list with the | |
| 87 | 6904 correct number of items. |
| 6905 {idx1} can be omitted, zero is used instead. | |
| 6906 {idx2} can be omitted, meaning the end of the list. | |
| 6907 When the selected range of items is partly past the | |
| 6908 end of the list, items will be added. | |
| 6909 | |
| 153 | 6910 *:let+=* *:let-=* *:let.=* *E734* |
| 114 | 6911 :let {var} += {expr1} Like ":let {var} = {var} + {expr1}". |
| 6912 :let {var} -= {expr1} Like ":let {var} = {var} - {expr1}". | |
| 6913 :let {var} .= {expr1} Like ":let {var} = {var} . {expr1}". | |
| 6914 These fail if {var} was not set yet and when the type | |
| 6915 of {var} and {expr1} don't fit the operator. | |
| 6916 | |
| 6917 | |
| 7 | 6918 :let ${env-name} = {expr1} *:let-environment* *:let-$* |
| 6919 Set environment variable {env-name} to the result of | |
| 6920 the expression {expr1}. The type is always String. | |
| 114 | 6921 :let ${env-name} .= {expr1} |
| 6922 Append {expr1} to the environment variable {env-name}. | |
| 6923 If the environment variable didn't exist yet this | |
| 6924 works like "=". | |
| 7 | 6925 |
| 6926 :let @{reg-name} = {expr1} *:let-register* *:let-@* | |
| 6927 Write the result of the expression {expr1} in register | |
| 6928 {reg-name}. {reg-name} must be a single letter, and | |
| 6929 must be the name of a writable register (see | |
| 6930 |registers|). "@@" can be used for the unnamed | |
| 6931 register, "@/" for the search pattern. | |
| 6932 If the result of {expr1} ends in a <CR> or <NL>, the | |
| 6933 register will be linewise, otherwise it will be set to | |
| 6934 characterwise. | |
| 6935 This can be used to clear the last search pattern: > | |
| 6936 :let @/ = "" | |
| 6937 < This is different from searching for an empty string, | |
| 6938 that would match everywhere. | |
| 6939 | |
| 114 | 6940 :let @{reg-name} .= {expr1} |
| 1621 | 6941 Append {expr1} to register {reg-name}. If the |
| 114 | 6942 register was empty it's like setting it to {expr1}. |
| 6943 | |
| 1156 | 6944 :let &{option-name} = {expr1} *:let-option* *:let-&* |
| 7 | 6945 Set option {option-name} to the result of the |
| 68 | 6946 expression {expr1}. A String or Number value is |
| 6947 always converted to the type of the option. | |
| 7 | 6948 For an option local to a window or buffer the effect |
| 6949 is just like using the |:set| command: both the local | |
| 555 | 6950 value and the global value are changed. |
| 68 | 6951 Example: > |
| 6952 :let &path = &path . ',/usr/local/include' | |
| 7 | 6953 |
| 114 | 6954 :let &{option-name} .= {expr1} |
| 6955 For a string option: Append {expr1} to the value. | |
| 6956 Does not insert a comma like |:set+=|. | |
| 6957 | |
| 6958 :let &{option-name} += {expr1} | |
| 6959 :let &{option-name} -= {expr1} | |
| 6960 For a number or boolean option: Add or subtract | |
| 6961 {expr1}. | |
| 6962 | |
| 7 | 6963 :let &l:{option-name} = {expr1} |
| 114 | 6964 :let &l:{option-name} .= {expr1} |
| 6965 :let &l:{option-name} += {expr1} | |
| 6966 :let &l:{option-name} -= {expr1} | |
| 7 | 6967 Like above, but only set the local value of an option |
| 6968 (if there is one). Works like |:setlocal|. | |
| 6969 | |
| 6970 :let &g:{option-name} = {expr1} | |
| 114 | 6971 :let &g:{option-name} .= {expr1} |
| 6972 :let &g:{option-name} += {expr1} | |
| 6973 :let &g:{option-name} -= {expr1} | |
| 7 | 6974 Like above, but only set the global value of an option |
| 6975 (if there is one). Works like |:setglobal|. | |
| 6976 | |
| 85 | 6977 :let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] = {expr1} *:let-unpack* *E687* *E688* |
| 685 | 6978 {expr1} must evaluate to a |List|. The first item in |
| 68 | 6979 the list is assigned to {name1}, the second item to |
| 6980 {name2}, etc. | |
| 6981 The number of names must match the number of items in | |
| 685 | 6982 the |List|. |
| 68 | 6983 Each name can be one of the items of the ":let" |
| 6984 command as mentioned above. | |
| 6985 Example: > | |
| 6986 :let [s, item] = GetItem(s) | |
| 114 | 6987 < Detail: {expr1} is evaluated first, then the |
| 6988 assignments are done in sequence. This matters if | |
| 6989 {name2} depends on {name1}. Example: > | |
| 6990 :let x = [0, 1] | |
| 6991 :let i = 0 | |
| 6992 :let [i, x[i]] = [1, 2] | |
| 6993 :echo x | |
| 6994 < The result is [0, 2]. | |
| 6995 | |
| 6996 :let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] .= {expr1} | |
| 6997 :let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] += {expr1} | |
| 6998 :let [{name1}, {name2}, ...] -= {expr1} | |
| 6999 Like above, but append/add/subtract the value for each | |
| 685 | 7000 |List| item. |
| 68 | 7001 |
| 7002 :let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] = {expr1} | |
| 685 | 7003 Like |:let-unpack| above, but the |List| may have more |
| 114 | 7004 items than there are names. A list of the remaining |
| 7005 items is assigned to {lastname}. If there are no | |
| 7006 remaining items {lastname} is set to an empty list. | |
| 68 | 7007 Example: > |
| 7008 :let [a, b; rest] = ["aval", "bval", 3, 4] | |
| 7009 < | |
| 114 | 7010 :let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] .= {expr1} |
| 7011 :let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] += {expr1} | |
| 7012 :let [{name}, ..., ; {lastname}] -= {expr1} | |
| 7013 Like above, but append/add/subtract the value for each | |
| 685 | 7014 |List| item. |
| 2596 | 7015 |
| 7016 *E121* | |
| 1621 | 7017 :let {var-name} .. List the value of variable {var-name}. Multiple |
| 123 | 7018 variable names may be given. Special names recognized |
| 7019 here: *E738* | |
| 777 | 7020 g: global variables |
| 7021 b: local buffer variables | |
| 7022 w: local window variables | |
| 819 | 7023 t: local tab page variables |
| 777 | 7024 s: script-local variables |
| 7025 l: local function variables | |
| 123 | 7026 v: Vim variables. |
| 7 | 7027 |
| 55 | 7028 :let List the values of all variables. The type of the |
| 7029 variable is indicated before the value: | |
| 7030 <nothing> String | |
| 7031 # Number | |
| 856 | 7032 * Funcref |
| 7 | 7033 |
| 148 | 7034 |
| 1156 | 7035 :unl[et][!] {name} ... *:unlet* *:unl* *E108* *E795* |
| 148 | 7036 Remove the internal variable {name}. Several variable |
| 7037 names can be given, they are all removed. The name | |
| 685 | 7038 may also be a |List| or |Dictionary| item. |
| 7 | 7039 With [!] no error message is given for non-existing |
| 7040 variables. | |
| 685 | 7041 One or more items from a |List| can be removed: > |
| 108 | 7042 :unlet list[3] " remove fourth item |
| 7043 :unlet list[3:] " remove fourth item to last | |
| 685 | 7044 < One item from a |Dictionary| can be removed at a time: > |
| 108 | 7045 :unlet dict['two'] |
| 7046 :unlet dict.two | |
| 1668 | 7047 < This is especially useful to clean up used global |
| 7048 variables and script-local variables (these are not | |
| 7049 deleted when the script ends). Function-local | |
| 7050 variables are automatically deleted when the function | |
| 7051 ends. | |
| 7 | 7052 |
| 148 | 7053 :lockv[ar][!] [depth] {name} ... *:lockvar* *:lockv* |
| 7054 Lock the internal variable {name}. Locking means that | |
| 7055 it can no longer be changed (until it is unlocked). | |
| 7056 A locked variable can be deleted: > | |
| 7057 :lockvar v | |
| 7058 :let v = 'asdf' " fails! | |
| 7059 :unlet v | |
| 7060 < *E741* | |
| 7061 If you try to change a locked variable you get an | |
| 7062 error message: "E741: Value of {name} is locked" | |
| 7063 | |
| 685 | 7064 [depth] is relevant when locking a |List| or |
| 7065 |Dictionary|. It specifies how deep the locking goes: | |
| 7066 1 Lock the |List| or |Dictionary| itself, | |
| 148 | 7067 cannot add or remove items, but can |
| 7068 still change their values. | |
| 7069 2 Also lock the values, cannot change | |
| 685 | 7070 the items. If an item is a |List| or |
| 7071 |Dictionary|, cannot add or remove | |
| 148 | 7072 items, but can still change the |
| 7073 values. | |
| 685 | 7074 3 Like 2 but for the |List| / |
| 7075 |Dictionary| in the |List| / | |
| 7076 |Dictionary|, one level deeper. | |
| 7077 The default [depth] is 2, thus when {name} is a |List| | |
| 7078 or |Dictionary| the values cannot be changed. | |
| 148 | 7079 *E743* |
| 7080 For unlimited depth use [!] and omit [depth]. | |
| 7081 However, there is a maximum depth of 100 to catch | |
| 7082 loops. | |
| 7083 | |
| 685 | 7084 Note that when two variables refer to the same |List| |
| 7085 and you lock one of them, the |List| will also be | |
| 819 | 7086 locked when used through the other variable. |
| 7087 Example: > | |
| 148 | 7088 :let l = [0, 1, 2, 3] |
| 7089 :let cl = l | |
| 7090 :lockvar l | |
| 7091 :let cl[1] = 99 " won't work! | |
| 7092 < You may want to make a copy of a list to avoid this. | |
| 7093 See |deepcopy()|. | |
| 7094 | |
| 7095 | |
| 7096 :unlo[ckvar][!] [depth] {name} ... *:unlockvar* *:unlo* | |
| 7097 Unlock the internal variable {name}. Does the | |
| 7098 opposite of |:lockvar|. | |
| 7099 | |
| 7100 | |
| 7 | 7101 :if {expr1} *:if* *:endif* *:en* *E171* *E579* *E580* |
| 7102 :en[dif] Execute the commands until the next matching ":else" | |
| 7103 or ":endif" if {expr1} evaluates to non-zero. | |
| 7104 | |
| 7105 From Vim version 4.5 until 5.0, every Ex command in | |
| 7106 between the ":if" and ":endif" is ignored. These two | |
| 7107 commands were just to allow for future expansions in a | |
| 7108 backwards compatible way. Nesting was allowed. Note | |
| 7109 that any ":else" or ":elseif" was ignored, the "else" | |
| 7110 part was not executed either. | |
| 7111 | |
| 7112 You can use this to remain compatible with older | |
| 7113 versions: > | |
| 7114 :if version >= 500 | |
| 7115 : version-5-specific-commands | |
| 7116 :endif | |
| 7117 < The commands still need to be parsed to find the | |
| 7118 "endif". Sometimes an older Vim has a problem with a | |
| 7119 new command. For example, ":silent" is recognized as | |
| 7120 a ":substitute" command. In that case ":execute" can | |
| 7121 avoid problems: > | |
| 7122 :if version >= 600 | |
| 7123 : execute "silent 1,$delete" | |
| 7124 :endif | |
| 7125 < | |
| 7126 NOTE: The ":append" and ":insert" commands don't work | |
| 7127 properly in between ":if" and ":endif". | |
| 7128 | |
| 7129 *:else* *:el* *E581* *E583* | |
| 7130 :el[se] Execute the commands until the next matching ":else" | |
| 7131 or ":endif" if they previously were not being | |
| 7132 executed. | |
| 7133 | |
| 7134 *:elseif* *:elsei* *E582* *E584* | |
| 7135 :elsei[f] {expr1} Short for ":else" ":if", with the addition that there | |
| 7136 is no extra ":endif". | |
| 7137 | |
| 7138 :wh[ile] {expr1} *:while* *:endwhile* *:wh* *:endw* | |
| 114 | 7139 *E170* *E585* *E588* *E733* |
| 7 | 7140 :endw[hile] Repeat the commands between ":while" and ":endwhile", |
| 7141 as long as {expr1} evaluates to non-zero. | |
| 7142 When an error is detected from a command inside the | |
| 7143 loop, execution continues after the "endwhile". | |
| 75 | 7144 Example: > |
| 7145 :let lnum = 1 | |
| 7146 :while lnum <= line("$") | |
| 7147 :call FixLine(lnum) | |
| 7148 :let lnum = lnum + 1 | |
| 7149 :endwhile | |
| 7150 < | |
| 7 | 7151 NOTE: The ":append" and ":insert" commands don't work |
| 99 | 7152 properly inside a ":while" and ":for" loop. |
| 75 | 7153 |
| 114 | 7154 :for {var} in {list} *:for* *E690* *E732* |
| 75 | 7155 :endfo[r] *:endfo* *:endfor* |
| 7156 Repeat the commands between ":for" and ":endfor" for | |
| 158 | 7157 each item in {list}. Variable {var} is set to the |
| 79 | 7158 value of each item. |
| 7159 When an error is detected for a command inside the | |
| 75 | 7160 loop, execution continues after the "endfor". |
| 464 | 7161 Changing {list} inside the loop affects what items are |
| 7162 used. Make a copy if this is unwanted: > | |
| 79 | 7163 :for item in copy(mylist) |
| 7164 < When not making a copy, Vim stores a reference to the | |
| 7165 next item in the list, before executing the commands | |
| 1621 | 7166 with the current item. Thus the current item can be |
| 79 | 7167 removed without effect. Removing any later item means |
| 7168 it will not be found. Thus the following example | |
| 7169 works (an inefficient way to make a list empty): > | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7170 for item in mylist |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7171 call remove(mylist, 0) |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7172 endfor |
| 87 | 7173 < Note that reordering the list (e.g., with sort() or |
| 7174 reverse()) may have unexpected effects. | |
| 7175 Note that the type of each list item should be | |
| 75 | 7176 identical to avoid errors for the type of {var} |
| 7177 changing. Unlet the variable at the end of the loop | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7178 to allow multiple item types: > |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7179 for item in ["foo", ["bar"]] |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7180 echo item |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7181 unlet item " E706 without this |
|
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7182 endfor |
| 75 | 7183 |
| 7184 :for [{var1}, {var2}, ...] in {listlist} | |
| 7185 :endfo[r] | |
| 7186 Like ":for" above, but each item in {listlist} must be | |
| 7187 a list, of which each item is assigned to {var1}, | |
| 7188 {var2}, etc. Example: > | |
| 7189 :for [lnum, col] in [[1, 3], [2, 5], [3, 8]] | |
| 7190 :echo getline(lnum)[col] | |
| 7191 :endfor | |
| 7192 < | |
| 7 | 7193 *:continue* *:con* *E586* |
| 75 | 7194 :con[tinue] When used inside a ":while" or ":for" loop, jumps back |
| 7195 to the start of the loop. | |
| 7196 If it is used after a |:try| inside the loop but | |
| 7197 before the matching |:finally| (if present), the | |
| 7198 commands following the ":finally" up to the matching | |
| 7199 |:endtry| are executed first. This process applies to | |
| 7200 all nested ":try"s inside the loop. The outermost | |
| 7201 ":endtry" then jumps back to the start of the loop. | |
| 7 | 7202 |
| 7203 *:break* *:brea* *E587* | |
| 75 | 7204 :brea[k] When used inside a ":while" or ":for" loop, skips to |
| 7205 the command after the matching ":endwhile" or | |
| 7206 ":endfor". | |
| 7207 If it is used after a |:try| inside the loop but | |
| 7208 before the matching |:finally| (if present), the | |
| 7209 commands following the ":finally" up to the matching | |
| 7210 |:endtry| are executed first. This process applies to | |
| 7211 all nested ":try"s inside the loop. The outermost | |
| 7212 ":endtry" then jumps to the command after the loop. | |
| 7 | 7213 |
| 7214 :try *:try* *:endt* *:endtry* *E600* *E601* *E602* | |
| 7215 :endt[ry] Change the error handling for the commands between | |
| 7216 ":try" and ":endtry" including everything being | |
| 7217 executed across ":source" commands, function calls, | |
| 7218 or autocommand invocations. | |
| 7219 | |
| 7220 When an error or interrupt is detected and there is | |
| 7221 a |:finally| command following, execution continues | |
| 7222 after the ":finally". Otherwise, or when the | |
| 7223 ":endtry" is reached thereafter, the next | |
| 7224 (dynamically) surrounding ":try" is checked for | |
| 7225 a corresponding ":finally" etc. Then the script | |
| 7226 processing is terminated. (Whether a function | |
| 7227 definition has an "abort" argument does not matter.) | |
| 7228 Example: > | |
| 7229 :try | edit too much | finally | echo "cleanup" | endtry | |
| 7230 :echo "impossible" " not reached, script terminated above | |
| 7231 < | |
| 7232 Moreover, an error or interrupt (dynamically) inside | |
| 7233 ":try" and ":endtry" is converted to an exception. It | |
| 7234 can be caught as if it were thrown by a |:throw| | |
| 7235 command (see |:catch|). In this case, the script | |
| 7236 processing is not terminated. | |
| 7237 | |
| 7238 The value "Vim:Interrupt" is used for an interrupt | |
| 7239 exception. An error in a Vim command is converted | |
| 7240 to a value of the form "Vim({command}):{errmsg}", | |
| 7241 other errors are converted to a value of the form | |
| 7242 "Vim:{errmsg}". {command} is the full command name, | |
| 7243 and {errmsg} is the message that is displayed if the | |
| 7244 error exception is not caught, always beginning with | |
| 7245 the error number. | |
| 7246 Examples: > | |
| 7247 :try | sleep 100 | catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/ | endtry | |
| 7248 :try | edit | catch /^Vim(edit):E\d\+/ | echo "error" | endtry | |
| 7249 < | |
| 7250 *:cat* *:catch* *E603* *E604* *E605* | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7251 :cat[ch] /{pattern}/ The following commands until the next |:catch|, |
| 7 | 7252 |:finally|, or |:endtry| that belongs to the same |
| 7253 |:try| as the ":catch" are executed when an exception | |
| 7254 matching {pattern} is being thrown and has not yet | |
| 7255 been caught by a previous ":catch". Otherwise, these | |
| 7256 commands are skipped. | |
| 7257 When {pattern} is omitted all errors are caught. | |
| 7258 Examples: > | |
| 7259 :catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/ " catch interrupts (CTRL-C) | |
| 7260 :catch /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:E/ " catch all Vim errors | |
| 7261 :catch /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:/ " catch errors and interrupts | |
| 7262 :catch /^Vim(write):/ " catch all errors in :write | |
| 7263 :catch /^Vim\%((\a\+)\)\=:E123/ " catch error E123 | |
| 7264 :catch /my-exception/ " catch user exception | |
| 7265 :catch /.*/ " catch everything | |
| 7266 :catch " same as /.*/ | |
| 7267 < | |
| 7268 Another character can be used instead of / around the | |
| 7269 {pattern}, so long as it does not have a special | |
| 7270 meaning (e.g., '|' or '"') and doesn't occur inside | |
| 7271 {pattern}. | |
| 7272 NOTE: It is not reliable to ":catch" the TEXT of | |
| 7273 an error message because it may vary in different | |
| 7274 locales. | |
| 7275 | |
| 7276 *:fina* *:finally* *E606* *E607* | |
| 7277 :fina[lly] The following commands until the matching |:endtry| | |
| 7278 are executed whenever the part between the matching | |
| 7279 |:try| and the ":finally" is left: either by falling | |
| 7280 through to the ":finally" or by a |:continue|, | |
| 7281 |:break|, |:finish|, or |:return|, or by an error or | |
| 7282 interrupt or exception (see |:throw|). | |
| 7283 | |
| 7284 *:th* *:throw* *E608* | |
| 7285 :th[row] {expr1} The {expr1} is evaluated and thrown as an exception. | |
| 7286 If the ":throw" is used after a |:try| but before the | |
| 7287 first corresponding |:catch|, commands are skipped | |
| 7288 until the first ":catch" matching {expr1} is reached. | |
| 7289 If there is no such ":catch" or if the ":throw" is | |
| 7290 used after a ":catch" but before the |:finally|, the | |
| 7291 commands following the ":finally" (if present) up to | |
| 7292 the matching |:endtry| are executed. If the ":throw" | |
| 7293 is after the ":finally", commands up to the ":endtry" | |
| 7294 are skipped. At the ":endtry", this process applies | |
| 7295 again for the next dynamically surrounding ":try" | |
| 7296 (which may be found in a calling function or sourcing | |
| 7297 script), until a matching ":catch" has been found. | |
| 7298 If the exception is not caught, the command processing | |
| 7299 is terminated. | |
| 7300 Example: > | |
| 7301 :try | throw "oops" | catch /^oo/ | echo "caught" | endtry | |
| 2725 | 7302 < Note that "catch" may need to be on a separate line |
| 7303 for when an error causes the parsing to skip the whole | |
| 7304 line and not see the "|" that separates the commands. | |
| 7 | 7305 |
| 7306 *:ec* *:echo* | |
| 7307 :ec[ho] {expr1} .. Echoes each {expr1}, with a space in between. The | |
| 7308 first {expr1} starts on a new line. | |
| 7309 Also see |:comment|. | |
| 7310 Use "\n" to start a new line. Use "\r" to move the | |
| 7311 cursor to the first column. | |
| 7312 Uses the highlighting set by the |:echohl| command. | |
| 7313 Cannot be followed by a comment. | |
| 7314 Example: > | |
| 7315 :echo "the value of 'shell' is" &shell | |
| 1156 | 7316 < *:echo-redraw* |
| 7317 A later redraw may make the message disappear again. | |
| 7318 And since Vim mostly postpones redrawing until it's | |
| 7319 finished with a sequence of commands this happens | |
| 7320 quite often. To avoid that a command from before the | |
| 7321 ":echo" causes a redraw afterwards (redraws are often | |
| 7322 postponed until you type something), force a redraw | |
| 7323 with the |:redraw| command. Example: > | |
| 7 | 7324 :new | redraw | echo "there is a new window" |
| 7325 < | |
| 7326 *:echon* | |
| 7327 :echon {expr1} .. Echoes each {expr1}, without anything added. Also see | |
| 7328 |:comment|. | |
| 7329 Uses the highlighting set by the |:echohl| command. | |
| 7330 Cannot be followed by a comment. | |
| 7331 Example: > | |
| 7332 :echon "the value of 'shell' is " &shell | |
| 7333 < | |
| 7334 Note the difference between using ":echo", which is a | |
| 7335 Vim command, and ":!echo", which is an external shell | |
| 7336 command: > | |
| 7337 :!echo % --> filename | |
| 7338 < The arguments of ":!" are expanded, see |:_%|. > | |
| 7339 :!echo "%" --> filename or "filename" | |
| 7340 < Like the previous example. Whether you see the double | |
| 7341 quotes or not depends on your 'shell'. > | |
| 7342 :echo % --> nothing | |
| 7343 < The '%' is an illegal character in an expression. > | |
| 7344 :echo "%" --> % | |
| 7345 < This just echoes the '%' character. > | |
| 7346 :echo expand("%") --> filename | |
| 7347 < This calls the expand() function to expand the '%'. | |
| 7348 | |
| 7349 *:echoh* *:echohl* | |
| 7350 :echoh[l] {name} Use the highlight group {name} for the following | |
| 7351 |:echo|, |:echon| and |:echomsg| commands. Also used | |
| 7352 for the |input()| prompt. Example: > | |
| 7353 :echohl WarningMsg | echo "Don't panic!" | echohl None | |
| 7354 < Don't forget to set the group back to "None", | |
| 7355 otherwise all following echo's will be highlighted. | |
| 7356 | |
| 7357 *:echom* *:echomsg* | |
| 7358 :echom[sg] {expr1} .. Echo the expression(s) as a true message, saving the | |
| 7359 message in the |message-history|. | |
| 7360 Spaces are placed between the arguments as with the | |
| 7361 |:echo| command. But unprintable characters are | |
| 7362 displayed, not interpreted. | |
| 1156 | 7363 The parsing works slightly different from |:echo|, |
| 7364 more like |:execute|. All the expressions are first | |
| 7365 evaluated and concatenated before echoing anything. | |
| 7366 The expressions must evaluate to a Number or String, a | |
| 7367 Dictionary or List causes an error. | |
| 7 | 7368 Uses the highlighting set by the |:echohl| command. |
| 7369 Example: > | |
| 7370 :echomsg "It's a Zizzer Zazzer Zuzz, as you can plainly see." | |
| 1156 | 7371 < See |:echo-redraw| to avoid the message disappearing |
| 7372 when the screen is redrawn. | |
| 7 | 7373 *:echoe* *:echoerr* |
| 7374 :echoe[rr] {expr1} .. Echo the expression(s) as an error message, saving the | |
| 7375 message in the |message-history|. When used in a | |
| 7376 script or function the line number will be added. | |
| 7377 Spaces are placed between the arguments as with the | |
| 1621 | 7378 :echo command. When used inside a try conditional, |
| 7 | 7379 the message is raised as an error exception instead |
| 7380 (see |try-echoerr|). | |
| 7381 Example: > | |
| 7382 :echoerr "This script just failed!" | |
| 7383 < If you just want a highlighted message use |:echohl|. | |
| 7384 And to get a beep: > | |
| 7385 :exe "normal \<Esc>" | |
| 7386 < | |
| 7387 *:exe* *:execute* | |
| 7388 :exe[cute] {expr1} .. Executes the string that results from the evaluation | |
| 2152 | 7389 of {expr1} as an Ex command. |
| 7390 Multiple arguments are concatenated, with a space in | |
| 7391 between. To avoid the extra space use the "." | |
| 7392 operator to concatenate strings into one argument. | |
| 7393 {expr1} is used as the processed command, command line | |
| 7394 editing keys are not recognized. | |
| 7 | 7395 Cannot be followed by a comment. |
| 7396 Examples: > | |
| 2152 | 7397 :execute "buffer" nextbuf |
| 7398 :execute "normal" count . "w" | |
| 7 | 7399 < |
| 7400 ":execute" can be used to append a command to commands | |
| 7401 that don't accept a '|'. Example: > | |
| 7402 :execute '!ls' | echo "theend" | |
| 7403 | |
| 7404 < ":execute" is also a nice way to avoid having to type | |
| 7405 control characters in a Vim script for a ":normal" | |
| 7406 command: > | |
| 7407 :execute "normal ixxx\<Esc>" | |
| 7408 < This has an <Esc> character, see |expr-string|. | |
| 7409 | |
| 1621 | 7410 Be careful to correctly escape special characters in |
| 7411 file names. The |fnameescape()| function can be used | |
| 1661 | 7412 for Vim commands, |shellescape()| for |:!| commands. |
| 7413 Examples: > | |
| 1621 | 7414 :execute "e " . fnameescape(filename) |
| 1661 | 7415 :execute "!ls " . shellescape(expand('%:h'), 1) |
| 1621 | 7416 < |
| 7 | 7417 Note: The executed string may be any command-line, but |
| 99 | 7418 you cannot start or end a "while", "for" or "if" |
| 7419 command. Thus this is illegal: > | |
| 7 | 7420 :execute 'while i > 5' |
| 7421 :execute 'echo "test" | break' | |
| 7422 < | |
| 7423 It is allowed to have a "while" or "if" command | |
| 7424 completely in the executed string: > | |
| 7425 :execute 'while i < 5 | echo i | let i = i + 1 | endwhile' | |
| 7426 < | |
| 7427 | |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
7428 *:exe-comment* |
| 7 | 7429 ":execute", ":echo" and ":echon" cannot be followed by |
| 7430 a comment directly, because they see the '"' as the | |
| 7431 start of a string. But, you can use '|' followed by a | |
| 7432 comment. Example: > | |
| 7433 :echo "foo" | "this is a comment | |
| 7434 | |
| 7435 ============================================================================== | |
| 7436 8. Exception handling *exception-handling* | |
| 7437 | |
| 7438 The Vim script language comprises an exception handling feature. This section | |
| 7439 explains how it can be used in a Vim script. | |
| 7440 | |
| 7441 Exceptions may be raised by Vim on an error or on interrupt, see | |
| 7442 |catch-errors| and |catch-interrupt|. You can also explicitly throw an | |
| 7443 exception by using the ":throw" command, see |throw-catch|. | |
| 7444 | |
| 7445 | |
| 7446 TRY CONDITIONALS *try-conditionals* | |
| 7447 | |
| 7448 Exceptions can be caught or can cause cleanup code to be executed. You can | |
| 7449 use a try conditional to specify catch clauses (that catch exceptions) and/or | |
| 7450 a finally clause (to be executed for cleanup). | |
| 7451 A try conditional begins with a |:try| command and ends at the matching | |
| 7452 |:endtry| command. In between, you can use a |:catch| command to start | |
| 7453 a catch clause, or a |:finally| command to start a finally clause. There may | |
| 7454 be none or multiple catch clauses, but there is at most one finally clause, | |
| 7455 which must not be followed by any catch clauses. The lines before the catch | |
| 7456 clauses and the finally clause is called a try block. > | |
| 7457 | |
| 7458 :try | |
| 1621 | 7459 : ... |
| 7460 : ... TRY BLOCK | |
| 7461 : ... | |
| 7 | 7462 :catch /{pattern}/ |
| 1621 | 7463 : ... |
| 7464 : ... CATCH CLAUSE | |
| 7465 : ... | |
| 7 | 7466 :catch /{pattern}/ |
| 1621 | 7467 : ... |
| 7468 : ... CATCH CLAUSE | |
| 7469 : ... | |
| 7 | 7470 :finally |
| 1621 | 7471 : ... |
| 7472 : ... FINALLY CLAUSE | |
| 7473 : ... | |
| 7 | 7474 :endtry |
| 7475 | |
| 7476 The try conditional allows to watch code for exceptions and to take the | |
| 7477 appropriate actions. Exceptions from the try block may be caught. Exceptions | |
| 7478 from the try block and also the catch clauses may cause cleanup actions. | |
| 7479 When no exception is thrown during execution of the try block, the control | |
| 7480 is transferred to the finally clause, if present. After its execution, the | |
| 7481 script continues with the line following the ":endtry". | |
| 7482 When an exception occurs during execution of the try block, the remaining | |
| 7483 lines in the try block are skipped. The exception is matched against the | |
| 7484 patterns specified as arguments to the ":catch" commands. The catch clause | |
| 7485 after the first matching ":catch" is taken, other catch clauses are not | |
| 7486 executed. The catch clause ends when the next ":catch", ":finally", or | |
| 7487 ":endtry" command is reached - whatever is first. Then, the finally clause | |
| 7488 (if present) is executed. When the ":endtry" is reached, the script execution | |
| 7489 continues in the following line as usual. | |
| 7490 When an exception that does not match any of the patterns specified by the | |
| 7491 ":catch" commands is thrown in the try block, the exception is not caught by | |
| 7492 that try conditional and none of the catch clauses is executed. Only the | |
| 7493 finally clause, if present, is taken. The exception pends during execution of | |
| 7494 the finally clause. It is resumed at the ":endtry", so that commands after | |
| 7495 the ":endtry" are not executed and the exception might be caught elsewhere, | |
| 7496 see |try-nesting|. | |
| 7497 When during execution of a catch clause another exception is thrown, the | |
| 1621 | 7498 remaining lines in that catch clause are not executed. The new exception is |
| 7 | 7499 not matched against the patterns in any of the ":catch" commands of the same |
| 7500 try conditional and none of its catch clauses is taken. If there is, however, | |
| 7501 a finally clause, it is executed, and the exception pends during its | |
| 7502 execution. The commands following the ":endtry" are not executed. The new | |
| 7503 exception might, however, be caught elsewhere, see |try-nesting|. | |
| 7504 When during execution of the finally clause (if present) an exception is | |
| 1621 | 7505 thrown, the remaining lines in the finally clause are skipped. If the finally |
| 7 | 7506 clause has been taken because of an exception from the try block or one of the |
| 7507 catch clauses, the original (pending) exception is discarded. The commands | |
| 7508 following the ":endtry" are not executed, and the exception from the finally | |
| 7509 clause is propagated and can be caught elsewhere, see |try-nesting|. | |
| 7510 | |
| 7511 The finally clause is also executed, when a ":break" or ":continue" for | |
| 7512 a ":while" loop enclosing the complete try conditional is executed from the | |
| 7513 try block or a catch clause. Or when a ":return" or ":finish" is executed | |
| 7514 from the try block or a catch clause of a try conditional in a function or | |
| 7515 sourced script, respectively. The ":break", ":continue", ":return", or | |
| 7516 ":finish" pends during execution of the finally clause and is resumed when the | |
| 7517 ":endtry" is reached. It is, however, discarded when an exception is thrown | |
| 7518 from the finally clause. | |
| 7519 When a ":break" or ":continue" for a ":while" loop enclosing the complete | |
| 7520 try conditional or when a ":return" or ":finish" is encountered in the finally | |
| 7521 clause, the rest of the finally clause is skipped, and the ":break", | |
| 7522 ":continue", ":return" or ":finish" is executed as usual. If the finally | |
| 7523 clause has been taken because of an exception or an earlier ":break", | |
| 7524 ":continue", ":return", or ":finish" from the try block or a catch clause, | |
| 7525 this pending exception or command is discarded. | |
| 7526 | |
| 7527 For examples see |throw-catch| and |try-finally|. | |
| 7528 | |
| 7529 | |
| 7530 NESTING OF TRY CONDITIONALS *try-nesting* | |
| 7531 | |
| 7532 Try conditionals can be nested arbitrarily. That is, a complete try | |
| 7533 conditional can be put into the try block, a catch clause, or the finally | |
| 7534 clause of another try conditional. If the inner try conditional does not | |
| 7535 catch an exception thrown in its try block or throws a new exception from one | |
| 7536 of its catch clauses or its finally clause, the outer try conditional is | |
| 7537 checked according to the rules above. If the inner try conditional is in the | |
| 7538 try block of the outer try conditional, its catch clauses are checked, but | |
| 1621 | 7539 otherwise only the finally clause is executed. It does not matter for |
| 7 | 7540 nesting, whether the inner try conditional is directly contained in the outer |
| 7541 one, or whether the outer one sources a script or calls a function containing | |
| 7542 the inner try conditional. | |
| 7543 | |
| 7544 When none of the active try conditionals catches an exception, just their | |
| 7545 finally clauses are executed. Thereafter, the script processing terminates. | |
| 7546 An error message is displayed in case of an uncaught exception explicitly | |
| 7547 thrown by a ":throw" command. For uncaught error and interrupt exceptions | |
| 7548 implicitly raised by Vim, the error message(s) or interrupt message are shown | |
| 7549 as usual. | |
| 7550 | |
| 7551 For examples see |throw-catch|. | |
| 7552 | |
| 7553 | |
| 7554 EXAMINING EXCEPTION HANDLING CODE *except-examine* | |
| 7555 | |
| 7556 Exception handling code can get tricky. If you are in doubt what happens, set | |
| 7557 'verbose' to 13 or use the ":13verbose" command modifier when sourcing your | |
| 7558 script file. Then you see when an exception is thrown, discarded, caught, or | |
| 7559 finished. When using a verbosity level of at least 14, things pending in | |
| 7560 a finally clause are also shown. This information is also given in debug mode | |
| 7561 (see |debug-scripts|). | |
| 7562 | |
| 7563 | |
| 7564 THROWING AND CATCHING EXCEPTIONS *throw-catch* | |
| 7565 | |
| 7566 You can throw any number or string as an exception. Use the |:throw| command | |
| 7567 and pass the value to be thrown as argument: > | |
| 7568 :throw 4711 | |
| 7569 :throw "string" | |
| 7570 < *throw-expression* | |
| 7571 You can also specify an expression argument. The expression is then evaluated | |
| 7572 first, and the result is thrown: > | |
| 7573 :throw 4705 + strlen("string") | |
| 7574 :throw strpart("strings", 0, 6) | |
| 7575 | |
| 7576 An exception might be thrown during evaluation of the argument of the ":throw" | |
| 7577 command. Unless it is caught there, the expression evaluation is abandoned. | |
| 7578 The ":throw" command then does not throw a new exception. | |
| 7579 Example: > | |
| 7580 | |
| 7581 :function! Foo(arg) | |
| 7582 : try | |
| 7583 : throw a:arg | |
| 7584 : catch /foo/ | |
| 7585 : endtry | |
| 7586 : return 1 | |
| 7587 :endfunction | |
| 7588 : | |
| 7589 :function! Bar() | |
| 7590 : echo "in Bar" | |
| 7591 : return 4710 | |
| 7592 :endfunction | |
| 7593 : | |
| 7594 :throw Foo("arrgh") + Bar() | |
| 7595 | |
| 7596 This throws "arrgh", and "in Bar" is not displayed since Bar() is not | |
| 7597 executed. > | |
| 7598 :throw Foo("foo") + Bar() | |
| 7599 however displays "in Bar" and throws 4711. | |
| 7600 | |
| 7601 Any other command that takes an expression as argument might also be | |
| 1621 | 7602 abandoned by an (uncaught) exception during the expression evaluation. The |
| 7 | 7603 exception is then propagated to the caller of the command. |
| 7604 Example: > | |
| 7605 | |
| 7606 :if Foo("arrgh") | |
| 7607 : echo "then" | |
| 7608 :else | |
| 7609 : echo "else" | |
| 7610 :endif | |
| 7611 | |
| 7612 Here neither of "then" or "else" is displayed. | |
| 7613 | |
| 7614 *catch-order* | |
| 7615 Exceptions can be caught by a try conditional with one or more |:catch| | |
| 7616 commands, see |try-conditionals|. The values to be caught by each ":catch" | |
| 7617 command can be specified as a pattern argument. The subsequent catch clause | |
| 7618 gets executed when a matching exception is caught. | |
| 7619 Example: > | |
| 7620 | |
| 7621 :function! Foo(value) | |
| 7622 : try | |
| 7623 : throw a:value | |
| 7624 : catch /^\d\+$/ | |
| 7625 : echo "Number thrown" | |
| 7626 : catch /.*/ | |
| 7627 : echo "String thrown" | |
| 7628 : endtry | |
| 7629 :endfunction | |
| 7630 : | |
| 7631 :call Foo(0x1267) | |
| 7632 :call Foo('string') | |
| 7633 | |
| 7634 The first call to Foo() displays "Number thrown", the second "String thrown". | |
| 7635 An exception is matched against the ":catch" commands in the order they are | |
| 7636 specified. Only the first match counts. So you should place the more | |
| 7637 specific ":catch" first. The following order does not make sense: > | |
| 7638 | |
| 7639 : catch /.*/ | |
| 7640 : echo "String thrown" | |
| 7641 : catch /^\d\+$/ | |
| 7642 : echo "Number thrown" | |
| 7643 | |
| 7644 The first ":catch" here matches always, so that the second catch clause is | |
| 7645 never taken. | |
| 7646 | |
| 7647 *throw-variables* | |
| 7648 If you catch an exception by a general pattern, you may access the exact value | |
| 7649 in the variable |v:exception|: > | |
| 7650 | |
| 7651 : catch /^\d\+$/ | |
| 7652 : echo "Number thrown. Value is" v:exception | |
| 7653 | |
| 7654 You may also be interested where an exception was thrown. This is stored in | |
| 7655 |v:throwpoint|. Note that "v:exception" and "v:throwpoint" are valid for the | |
| 7656 exception most recently caught as long it is not finished. | |
| 7657 Example: > | |
| 7658 | |
| 7659 :function! Caught() | |
| 7660 : if v:exception != "" | |
| 7661 : echo 'Caught "' . v:exception . '" in ' . v:throwpoint | |
| 7662 : else | |
| 7663 : echo 'Nothing caught' | |
| 7664 : endif | |
| 7665 :endfunction | |
| 7666 : | |
| 7667 :function! Foo() | |
| 7668 : try | |
| 7669 : try | |
| 7670 : try | |
| 7671 : throw 4711 | |
| 7672 : finally | |
| 7673 : call Caught() | |
| 7674 : endtry | |
| 7675 : catch /.*/ | |
| 7676 : call Caught() | |
| 7677 : throw "oops" | |
| 7678 : endtry | |
| 7679 : catch /.*/ | |
| 7680 : call Caught() | |
| 7681 : finally | |
| 7682 : call Caught() | |
| 7683 : endtry | |
| 7684 :endfunction | |
| 7685 : | |
| 7686 :call Foo() | |
| 7687 | |
| 7688 This displays > | |
| 7689 | |
| 7690 Nothing caught | |
| 7691 Caught "4711" in function Foo, line 4 | |
| 7692 Caught "oops" in function Foo, line 10 | |
| 7693 Nothing caught | |
| 7694 | |
| 7695 A practical example: The following command ":LineNumber" displays the line | |
| 7696 number in the script or function where it has been used: > | |
| 7697 | |
| 7698 :function! LineNumber() | |
| 7699 : return substitute(v:throwpoint, '.*\D\(\d\+\).*', '\1', "") | |
| 7700 :endfunction | |
| 7701 :command! LineNumber try | throw "" | catch | echo LineNumber() | endtry | |
| 7702 < | |
| 7703 *try-nested* | |
| 7704 An exception that is not caught by a try conditional can be caught by | |
| 7705 a surrounding try conditional: > | |
| 7706 | |
| 7707 :try | |
| 7708 : try | |
| 7709 : throw "foo" | |
| 7710 : catch /foobar/ | |
| 7711 : echo "foobar" | |
| 7712 : finally | |
| 7713 : echo "inner finally" | |
| 7714 : endtry | |
| 7715 :catch /foo/ | |
| 7716 : echo "foo" | |
| 7717 :endtry | |
| 7718 | |
| 7719 The inner try conditional does not catch the exception, just its finally | |
| 7720 clause is executed. The exception is then caught by the outer try | |
| 7721 conditional. The example displays "inner finally" and then "foo". | |
| 7722 | |
| 7723 *throw-from-catch* | |
| 7724 You can catch an exception and throw a new one to be caught elsewhere from the | |
| 7725 catch clause: > | |
| 7726 | |
| 7727 :function! Foo() | |
| 7728 : throw "foo" | |
| 7729 :endfunction | |
| 7730 : | |
| 7731 :function! Bar() | |
| 7732 : try | |
| 7733 : call Foo() | |
| 7734 : catch /foo/ | |
| 7735 : echo "Caught foo, throw bar" | |
| 7736 : throw "bar" | |
| 7737 : endtry | |
| 7738 :endfunction | |
| 7739 : | |
| 7740 :try | |
| 7741 : call Bar() | |
| 7742 :catch /.*/ | |
| 7743 : echo "Caught" v:exception | |
| 7744 :endtry | |
| 7745 | |
| 7746 This displays "Caught foo, throw bar" and then "Caught bar". | |
| 7747 | |
| 7748 *rethrow* | |
| 7749 There is no real rethrow in the Vim script language, but you may throw | |
| 7750 "v:exception" instead: > | |
| 7751 | |
| 7752 :function! Bar() | |
| 7753 : try | |
| 7754 : call Foo() | |
| 7755 : catch /.*/ | |
| 7756 : echo "Rethrow" v:exception | |
| 7757 : throw v:exception | |
| 7758 : endtry | |
| 7759 :endfunction | |
| 7760 < *try-echoerr* | |
| 7761 Note that this method cannot be used to "rethrow" Vim error or interrupt | |
| 7762 exceptions, because it is not possible to fake Vim internal exceptions. | |
| 7763 Trying so causes an error exception. You should throw your own exception | |
| 7764 denoting the situation. If you want to cause a Vim error exception containing | |
| 7765 the original error exception value, you can use the |:echoerr| command: > | |
| 7766 | |
| 7767 :try | |
| 7768 : try | |
| 7769 : asdf | |
| 7770 : catch /.*/ | |
| 7771 : echoerr v:exception | |
| 7772 : endtry | |
| 7773 :catch /.*/ | |
| 7774 : echo v:exception | |
| 7775 :endtry | |
| 7776 | |
| 7777 This code displays | |
| 7778 | |
| 1621 | 7779 Vim(echoerr):Vim:E492: Not an editor command: asdf ~ |
| 7 | 7780 |
| 7781 | |
| 7782 CLEANUP CODE *try-finally* | |
| 7783 | |
| 7784 Scripts often change global settings and restore them at their end. If the | |
| 7785 user however interrupts the script by pressing CTRL-C, the settings remain in | |
| 1621 | 7786 an inconsistent state. The same may happen to you in the development phase of |
| 7 | 7787 a script when an error occurs or you explicitly throw an exception without |
| 7788 catching it. You can solve these problems by using a try conditional with | |
| 7789 a finally clause for restoring the settings. Its execution is guaranteed on | |
| 7790 normal control flow, on error, on an explicit ":throw", and on interrupt. | |
| 7791 (Note that errors and interrupts from inside the try conditional are converted | |
| 1621 | 7792 to exceptions. When not caught, they terminate the script after the finally |
| 7 | 7793 clause has been executed.) |
| 7794 Example: > | |
| 7795 | |
| 7796 :try | |
| 7797 : let s:saved_ts = &ts | |
| 7798 : set ts=17 | |
| 7799 : | |
| 7800 : " Do the hard work here. | |
| 7801 : | |
| 7802 :finally | |
| 7803 : let &ts = s:saved_ts | |
| 7804 : unlet s:saved_ts | |
| 7805 :endtry | |
| 7806 | |
| 7807 This method should be used locally whenever a function or part of a script | |
| 7808 changes global settings which need to be restored on failure or normal exit of | |
| 7809 that function or script part. | |
| 7810 | |
| 7811 *break-finally* | |
| 7812 Cleanup code works also when the try block or a catch clause is left by | |
| 7813 a ":continue", ":break", ":return", or ":finish". | |
| 7814 Example: > | |
| 7815 | |
| 7816 :let first = 1 | |
| 7817 :while 1 | |
| 7818 : try | |
| 7819 : if first | |
| 7820 : echo "first" | |
| 7821 : let first = 0 | |
| 7822 : continue | |
| 7823 : else | |
| 7824 : throw "second" | |
| 7825 : endif | |
| 7826 : catch /.*/ | |
| 7827 : echo v:exception | |
| 7828 : break | |
| 7829 : finally | |
| 7830 : echo "cleanup" | |
| 7831 : endtry | |
| 7832 : echo "still in while" | |
| 7833 :endwhile | |
| 7834 :echo "end" | |
| 7835 | |
| 7836 This displays "first", "cleanup", "second", "cleanup", and "end". > | |
| 7837 | |
| 7838 :function! Foo() | |
| 7839 : try | |
| 7840 : return 4711 | |
| 7841 : finally | |
| 7842 : echo "cleanup\n" | |
| 7843 : endtry | |
| 7844 : echo "Foo still active" | |
| 7845 :endfunction | |
| 7846 : | |
| 7847 :echo Foo() "returned by Foo" | |
| 7848 | |
| 7849 This displays "cleanup" and "4711 returned by Foo". You don't need to add an | |
| 1621 | 7850 extra ":return" in the finally clause. (Above all, this would override the |
| 7 | 7851 return value.) |
| 7852 | |
| 7853 *except-from-finally* | |
| 7854 Using either of ":continue", ":break", ":return", ":finish", or ":throw" in | |
| 7855 a finally clause is possible, but not recommended since it abandons the | |
| 7856 cleanup actions for the try conditional. But, of course, interrupt and error | |
| 7857 exceptions might get raised from a finally clause. | |
| 7858 Example where an error in the finally clause stops an interrupt from | |
| 7859 working correctly: > | |
| 7860 | |
| 7861 :try | |
| 7862 : try | |
| 7863 : echo "Press CTRL-C for interrupt" | |
| 7864 : while 1 | |
| 7865 : endwhile | |
| 7866 : finally | |
| 7867 : unlet novar | |
| 7868 : endtry | |
| 7869 :catch /novar/ | |
| 7870 :endtry | |
| 7871 :echo "Script still running" | |
| 7872 :sleep 1 | |
| 7873 | |
| 7874 If you need to put commands that could fail into a finally clause, you should | |
| 7875 think about catching or ignoring the errors in these commands, see | |
| 7876 |catch-errors| and |ignore-errors|. | |
| 7877 | |
| 7878 | |
| 7879 CATCHING ERRORS *catch-errors* | |
| 7880 | |
| 7881 If you want to catch specific errors, you just have to put the code to be | |
| 7882 watched in a try block and add a catch clause for the error message. The | |
| 7883 presence of the try conditional causes all errors to be converted to an | |
| 7884 exception. No message is displayed and |v:errmsg| is not set then. To find | |
| 7885 the right pattern for the ":catch" command, you have to know how the format of | |
| 7886 the error exception is. | |
| 7887 Error exceptions have the following format: > | |
| 7888 | |
| 7889 Vim({cmdname}):{errmsg} | |
| 7890 or > | |
| 7891 Vim:{errmsg} | |
| 7892 | |
| 7893 {cmdname} is the name of the command that failed; the second form is used when | |
| 1621 | 7894 the command name is not known. {errmsg} is the error message usually produced |
| 7 | 7895 when the error occurs outside try conditionals. It always begins with |
| 7896 a capital "E", followed by a two or three-digit error number, a colon, and | |
| 7897 a space. | |
| 7898 | |
| 7899 Examples: | |
| 7900 | |
| 7901 The command > | |
| 7902 :unlet novar | |
| 7903 normally produces the error message > | |
| 7904 E108: No such variable: "novar" | |
| 7905 which is converted inside try conditionals to an exception > | |
| 7906 Vim(unlet):E108: No such variable: "novar" | |
| 7907 | |
| 7908 The command > | |
| 7909 :dwim | |
| 7910 normally produces the error message > | |
| 7911 E492: Not an editor command: dwim | |
| 7912 which is converted inside try conditionals to an exception > | |
| 7913 Vim:E492: Not an editor command: dwim | |
| 7914 | |
| 7915 You can catch all ":unlet" errors by a > | |
| 7916 :catch /^Vim(unlet):/ | |
| 7917 or all errors for misspelled command names by a > | |
| 7918 :catch /^Vim:E492:/ | |
| 7919 | |
| 7920 Some error messages may be produced by different commands: > | |
| 7921 :function nofunc | |
| 7922 and > | |
| 7923 :delfunction nofunc | |
| 7924 both produce the error message > | |
| 7925 E128: Function name must start with a capital: nofunc | |
| 7926 which is converted inside try conditionals to an exception > | |
| 7927 Vim(function):E128: Function name must start with a capital: nofunc | |
| 7928 or > | |
| 7929 Vim(delfunction):E128: Function name must start with a capital: nofunc | |
| 7930 respectively. You can catch the error by its number independently on the | |
| 7931 command that caused it if you use the following pattern: > | |
| 7932 :catch /^Vim(\a\+):E128:/ | |
| 7933 | |
| 7934 Some commands like > | |
| 7935 :let x = novar | |
| 7936 produce multiple error messages, here: > | |
| 7937 E121: Undefined variable: novar | |
| 7938 E15: Invalid expression: novar | |
| 7939 Only the first is used for the exception value, since it is the most specific | |
| 7940 one (see |except-several-errors|). So you can catch it by > | |
| 7941 :catch /^Vim(\a\+):E121:/ | |
| 7942 | |
| 7943 You can catch all errors related to the name "nofunc" by > | |
| 7944 :catch /\<nofunc\>/ | |
| 7945 | |
| 7946 You can catch all Vim errors in the ":write" and ":read" commands by > | |
| 7947 :catch /^Vim(\(write\|read\)):E\d\+:/ | |
| 7948 | |
| 7949 You can catch all Vim errors by the pattern > | |
| 7950 :catch /^Vim\((\a\+)\)\=:E\d\+:/ | |
| 7951 < | |
| 7952 *catch-text* | |
| 7953 NOTE: You should never catch the error message text itself: > | |
| 7954 :catch /No such variable/ | |
| 7955 only works in the english locale, but not when the user has selected | |
| 7956 a different language by the |:language| command. It is however helpful to | |
| 7957 cite the message text in a comment: > | |
| 7958 :catch /^Vim(\a\+):E108:/ " No such variable | |
| 7959 | |
| 7960 | |
| 7961 IGNORING ERRORS *ignore-errors* | |
| 7962 | |
| 7963 You can ignore errors in a specific Vim command by catching them locally: > | |
| 7964 | |
| 7965 :try | |
| 7966 : write | |
| 7967 :catch | |
| 7968 :endtry | |
| 7969 | |
| 7970 But you are strongly recommended NOT to use this simple form, since it could | |
| 7971 catch more than you want. With the ":write" command, some autocommands could | |
| 7972 be executed and cause errors not related to writing, for instance: > | |
| 7973 | |
| 7974 :au BufWritePre * unlet novar | |
| 7975 | |
| 7976 There could even be such errors you are not responsible for as a script | |
| 7977 writer: a user of your script might have defined such autocommands. You would | |
| 7978 then hide the error from the user. | |
| 7979 It is much better to use > | |
| 7980 | |
| 7981 :try | |
| 7982 : write | |
| 7983 :catch /^Vim(write):/ | |
| 7984 :endtry | |
| 7985 | |
| 7986 which only catches real write errors. So catch only what you'd like to ignore | |
| 7987 intentionally. | |
| 7988 | |
| 7989 For a single command that does not cause execution of autocommands, you could | |
| 7990 even suppress the conversion of errors to exceptions by the ":silent!" | |
| 7991 command: > | |
| 7992 :silent! nunmap k | |
| 7993 This works also when a try conditional is active. | |
| 7994 | |
| 7995 | |
| 7996 CATCHING INTERRUPTS *catch-interrupt* | |
| 7997 | |
| 7998 When there are active try conditionals, an interrupt (CTRL-C) is converted to | |
| 1621 | 7999 the exception "Vim:Interrupt". You can catch it like every exception. The |
| 7 | 8000 script is not terminated, then. |
| 8001 Example: > | |
| 8002 | |
| 8003 :function! TASK1() | |
| 8004 : sleep 10 | |
| 8005 :endfunction | |
| 8006 | |
| 8007 :function! TASK2() | |
| 8008 : sleep 20 | |
| 8009 :endfunction | |
| 8010 | |
| 8011 :while 1 | |
| 8012 : let command = input("Type a command: ") | |
| 8013 : try | |
| 8014 : if command == "" | |
| 8015 : continue | |
| 8016 : elseif command == "END" | |
| 8017 : break | |
| 8018 : elseif command == "TASK1" | |
| 8019 : call TASK1() | |
| 8020 : elseif command == "TASK2" | |
| 8021 : call TASK2() | |
| 8022 : else | |
| 8023 : echo "\nIllegal command:" command | |
| 8024 : continue | |
| 8025 : endif | |
| 8026 : catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/ | |
| 8027 : echo "\nCommand interrupted" | |
| 8028 : " Caught the interrupt. Continue with next prompt. | |
| 8029 : endtry | |
| 8030 :endwhile | |
| 8031 | |
| 8032 You can interrupt a task here by pressing CTRL-C; the script then asks for | |
| 1621 | 8033 a new command. If you press CTRL-C at the prompt, the script is terminated. |
| 7 | 8034 |
| 8035 For testing what happens when CTRL-C would be pressed on a specific line in | |
| 8036 your script, use the debug mode and execute the |>quit| or |>interrupt| | |
| 8037 command on that line. See |debug-scripts|. | |
| 8038 | |
| 8039 | |
| 8040 CATCHING ALL *catch-all* | |
| 8041 | |
| 8042 The commands > | |
| 8043 | |
| 8044 :catch /.*/ | |
| 8045 :catch // | |
| 8046 :catch | |
| 8047 | |
| 8048 catch everything, error exceptions, interrupt exceptions and exceptions | |
| 8049 explicitly thrown by the |:throw| command. This is useful at the top level of | |
| 8050 a script in order to catch unexpected things. | |
| 8051 Example: > | |
| 8052 | |
| 8053 :try | |
| 8054 : | |
| 8055 : " do the hard work here | |
| 8056 : | |
| 8057 :catch /MyException/ | |
| 8058 : | |
| 8059 : " handle known problem | |
| 8060 : | |
| 8061 :catch /^Vim:Interrupt$/ | |
| 8062 : echo "Script interrupted" | |
| 8063 :catch /.*/ | |
| 8064 : echo "Internal error (" . v:exception . ")" | |
| 8065 : echo " - occurred at " . v:throwpoint | |
| 8066 :endtry | |
| 8067 :" end of script | |
| 8068 | |
| 8069 Note: Catching all might catch more things than you want. Thus, you are | |
| 8070 strongly encouraged to catch only for problems that you can really handle by | |
| 8071 specifying a pattern argument to the ":catch". | |
| 8072 Example: Catching all could make it nearly impossible to interrupt a script | |
| 8073 by pressing CTRL-C: > | |
| 8074 | |
| 8075 :while 1 | |
| 8076 : try | |
| 8077 : sleep 1 | |
| 8078 : catch | |
| 8079 : endtry | |
| 8080 :endwhile | |
| 8081 | |
| 8082 | |
| 8083 EXCEPTIONS AND AUTOCOMMANDS *except-autocmd* | |
| 8084 | |
| 8085 Exceptions may be used during execution of autocommands. Example: > | |
| 8086 | |
| 8087 :autocmd User x try | |
| 8088 :autocmd User x throw "Oops!" | |
| 8089 :autocmd User x catch | |
| 8090 :autocmd User x echo v:exception | |
| 8091 :autocmd User x endtry | |
| 8092 :autocmd User x throw "Arrgh!" | |
| 8093 :autocmd User x echo "Should not be displayed" | |
| 8094 : | |
| 8095 :try | |
| 8096 : doautocmd User x | |
| 8097 :catch | |
| 8098 : echo v:exception | |
| 8099 :endtry | |
| 8100 | |
| 8101 This displays "Oops!" and "Arrgh!". | |
| 8102 | |
| 8103 *except-autocmd-Pre* | |
| 8104 For some commands, autocommands get executed before the main action of the | |
| 8105 command takes place. If an exception is thrown and not caught in the sequence | |
| 8106 of autocommands, the sequence and the command that caused its execution are | |
| 8107 abandoned and the exception is propagated to the caller of the command. | |
| 8108 Example: > | |
| 8109 | |
| 8110 :autocmd BufWritePre * throw "FAIL" | |
| 8111 :autocmd BufWritePre * echo "Should not be displayed" | |
| 8112 : | |
| 8113 :try | |
| 8114 : write | |
| 8115 :catch | |
| 8116 : echo "Caught:" v:exception "from" v:throwpoint | |
| 8117 :endtry | |
| 8118 | |
| 8119 Here, the ":write" command does not write the file currently being edited (as | |
| 8120 you can see by checking 'modified'), since the exception from the BufWritePre | |
| 8121 autocommand abandons the ":write". The exception is then caught and the | |
| 8122 script displays: > | |
| 8123 | |
| 8124 Caught: FAIL from BufWrite Auto commands for "*" | |
| 8125 < | |
| 8126 *except-autocmd-Post* | |
| 8127 For some commands, autocommands get executed after the main action of the | |
| 8128 command has taken place. If this main action fails and the command is inside | |
| 8129 an active try conditional, the autocommands are skipped and an error exception | |
| 8130 is thrown that can be caught by the caller of the command. | |
| 8131 Example: > | |
| 8132 | |
| 8133 :autocmd BufWritePost * echo "File successfully written!" | |
| 8134 : | |
| 8135 :try | |
| 8136 : write /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e | |
| 8137 :catch | |
| 8138 : echo v:exception | |
| 8139 :endtry | |
| 8140 | |
| 8141 This just displays: > | |
| 8142 | |
| 8143 Vim(write):E212: Can't open file for writing (/i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e) | |
| 8144 | |
| 8145 If you really need to execute the autocommands even when the main action | |
| 8146 fails, trigger the event from the catch clause. | |
| 8147 Example: > | |
| 8148 | |
| 8149 :autocmd BufWritePre * set noreadonly | |
| 8150 :autocmd BufWritePost * set readonly | |
| 8151 : | |
| 8152 :try | |
| 8153 : write /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e | |
| 8154 :catch | |
| 8155 : doautocmd BufWritePost /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e | |
| 8156 :endtry | |
| 8157 < | |
| 8158 You can also use ":silent!": > | |
| 8159 | |
| 8160 :let x = "ok" | |
| 8161 :let v:errmsg = "" | |
| 8162 :autocmd BufWritePost * if v:errmsg != "" | |
| 8163 :autocmd BufWritePost * let x = "after fail" | |
| 8164 :autocmd BufWritePost * endif | |
| 8165 :try | |
| 8166 : silent! write /i/m/p/o/s/s/i/b/l/e | |
| 8167 :catch | |
| 8168 :endtry | |
| 8169 :echo x | |
| 8170 | |
| 8171 This displays "after fail". | |
| 8172 | |
| 8173 If the main action of the command does not fail, exceptions from the | |
| 8174 autocommands will be catchable by the caller of the command: > | |
| 8175 | |
| 8176 :autocmd BufWritePost * throw ":-(" | |
| 8177 :autocmd BufWritePost * echo "Should not be displayed" | |
| 8178 : | |
| 8179 :try | |
| 8180 : write | |
| 8181 :catch | |
| 8182 : echo v:exception | |
| 8183 :endtry | |
| 8184 < | |
| 8185 *except-autocmd-Cmd* | |
| 8186 For some commands, the normal action can be replaced by a sequence of | |
| 8187 autocommands. Exceptions from that sequence will be catchable by the caller | |
| 8188 of the command. | |
| 8189 Example: For the ":write" command, the caller cannot know whether the file | |
| 1621 | 8190 had actually been written when the exception occurred. You need to tell it in |
| 7 | 8191 some way. > |
| 8192 | |
| 8193 :if !exists("cnt") | |
| 8194 : let cnt = 0 | |
| 8195 : | |
| 8196 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * if &modified | |
| 8197 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * let cnt = cnt + 1 | |
| 8198 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * if cnt % 3 == 2 | |
| 8199 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * throw "BufWriteCmdError" | |
| 8200 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * endif | |
| 8201 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * write | set nomodified | |
| 8202 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * if cnt % 3 == 0 | |
| 8203 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * throw "BufWriteCmdError" | |
| 8204 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * endif | |
| 8205 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * echo "File successfully written!" | |
| 8206 : autocmd BufWriteCmd * endif | |
| 8207 :endif | |
| 8208 : | |
| 8209 :try | |
| 8210 : write | |
| 8211 :catch /^BufWriteCmdError$/ | |
| 8212 : if &modified | |
| 8213 : echo "Error on writing (file contents not changed)" | |
| 8214 : else | |
| 8215 : echo "Error after writing" | |
| 8216 : endif | |
| 8217 :catch /^Vim(write):/ | |
| 8218 : echo "Error on writing" | |
| 8219 :endtry | |
| 8220 | |
| 8221 When this script is sourced several times after making changes, it displays | |
| 8222 first > | |
| 8223 File successfully written! | |
| 8224 then > | |
| 8225 Error on writing (file contents not changed) | |
| 8226 then > | |
| 8227 Error after writing | |
| 8228 etc. | |
| 8229 | |
| 8230 *except-autocmd-ill* | |
| 8231 You cannot spread a try conditional over autocommands for different events. | |
| 8232 The following code is ill-formed: > | |
| 8233 | |
| 8234 :autocmd BufWritePre * try | |
| 8235 : | |
| 8236 :autocmd BufWritePost * catch | |
| 8237 :autocmd BufWritePost * echo v:exception | |
| 8238 :autocmd BufWritePost * endtry | |
| 8239 : | |
| 8240 :write | |
| 8241 | |
| 8242 | |
| 8243 EXCEPTION HIERARCHIES AND PARAMETERIZED EXCEPTIONS *except-hier-param* | |
| 8244 | |
| 8245 Some programming languages allow to use hierarchies of exception classes or to | |
| 8246 pass additional information with the object of an exception class. You can do | |
| 8247 similar things in Vim. | |
| 8248 In order to throw an exception from a hierarchy, just throw the complete | |
| 8249 class name with the components separated by a colon, for instance throw the | |
| 8250 string "EXCEPT:MATHERR:OVERFLOW" for an overflow in a mathematical library. | |
| 8251 When you want to pass additional information with your exception class, add | |
| 8252 it in parentheses, for instance throw the string "EXCEPT:IO:WRITEERR(myfile)" | |
| 8253 for an error when writing "myfile". | |
| 8254 With the appropriate patterns in the ":catch" command, you can catch for | |
| 8255 base classes or derived classes of your hierarchy. Additional information in | |
| 8256 parentheses can be cut out from |v:exception| with the ":substitute" command. | |
| 8257 Example: > | |
| 8258 | |
| 8259 :function! CheckRange(a, func) | |
| 8260 : if a:a < 0 | |
| 8261 : throw "EXCEPT:MATHERR:RANGE(" . a:func . ")" | |
| 8262 : endif | |
| 8263 :endfunction | |
| 8264 : | |
| 8265 :function! Add(a, b) | |
| 8266 : call CheckRange(a:a, "Add") | |
| 8267 : call CheckRange(a:b, "Add") | |
| 8268 : let c = a:a + a:b | |
| 8269 : if c < 0 | |
| 8270 : throw "EXCEPT:MATHERR:OVERFLOW" | |
| 8271 : endif | |
| 8272 : return c | |
| 8273 :endfunction | |
| 8274 : | |
| 8275 :function! Div(a, b) | |
| 8276 : call CheckRange(a:a, "Div") | |
| 8277 : call CheckRange(a:b, "Div") | |
| 8278 : if (a:b == 0) | |
| 8279 : throw "EXCEPT:MATHERR:ZERODIV" | |
| 8280 : endif | |
| 8281 : return a:a / a:b | |
| 8282 :endfunction | |
| 8283 : | |
| 8284 :function! Write(file) | |
| 8285 : try | |
| 1621 | 8286 : execute "write" fnameescape(a:file) |
| 7 | 8287 : catch /^Vim(write):/ |
| 8288 : throw "EXCEPT:IO(" . getcwd() . ", " . a:file . "):WRITEERR" | |
| 8289 : endtry | |
| 8290 :endfunction | |
| 8291 : | |
| 8292 :try | |
| 8293 : | |
| 8294 : " something with arithmetics and I/O | |
| 8295 : | |
| 8296 :catch /^EXCEPT:MATHERR:RANGE/ | |
| 8297 : let function = substitute(v:exception, '.*(\(\a\+\)).*', '\1', "") | |
| 8298 : echo "Range error in" function | |
| 8299 : | |
| 8300 :catch /^EXCEPT:MATHERR/ " catches OVERFLOW and ZERODIV | |
| 8301 : echo "Math error" | |
| 8302 : | |
| 8303 :catch /^EXCEPT:IO/ | |
| 8304 : let dir = substitute(v:exception, '.*(\(.\+\),\s*.\+).*', '\1', "") | |
| 8305 : let file = substitute(v:exception, '.*(.\+,\s*\(.\+\)).*', '\1', "") | |
| 8306 : if file !~ '^/' | |
| 8307 : let file = dir . "/" . file | |
| 8308 : endif | |
| 8309 : echo 'I/O error for "' . file . '"' | |
| 8310 : | |
| 8311 :catch /^EXCEPT/ | |
| 8312 : echo "Unspecified error" | |
| 8313 : | |
| 8314 :endtry | |
| 8315 | |
| 8316 The exceptions raised by Vim itself (on error or when pressing CTRL-C) use | |
| 8317 a flat hierarchy: they are all in the "Vim" class. You cannot throw yourself | |
| 8318 exceptions with the "Vim" prefix; they are reserved for Vim. | |
| 8319 Vim error exceptions are parameterized with the name of the command that | |
| 8320 failed, if known. See |catch-errors|. | |
| 8321 | |
| 8322 | |
| 8323 PECULIARITIES | |
| 8324 *except-compat* | |
| 8325 The exception handling concept requires that the command sequence causing the | |
| 8326 exception is aborted immediately and control is transferred to finally clauses | |
| 8327 and/or a catch clause. | |
| 8328 | |
| 8329 In the Vim script language there are cases where scripts and functions | |
| 8330 continue after an error: in functions without the "abort" flag or in a command | |
| 8331 after ":silent!", control flow goes to the following line, and outside | |
| 8332 functions, control flow goes to the line following the outermost ":endwhile" | |
| 8333 or ":endif". On the other hand, errors should be catchable as exceptions | |
| 8334 (thus, requiring the immediate abortion). | |
| 8335 | |
| 8336 This problem has been solved by converting errors to exceptions and using | |
| 8337 immediate abortion (if not suppressed by ":silent!") only when a try | |
| 1621 | 8338 conditional is active. This is no restriction since an (error) exception can |
| 8339 be caught only from an active try conditional. If you want an immediate | |
| 7 | 8340 termination without catching the error, just use a try conditional without |
| 8341 catch clause. (You can cause cleanup code being executed before termination | |
| 8342 by specifying a finally clause.) | |
| 8343 | |
| 8344 When no try conditional is active, the usual abortion and continuation | |
| 8345 behavior is used instead of immediate abortion. This ensures compatibility of | |
| 8346 scripts written for Vim 6.1 and earlier. | |
| 8347 | |
| 8348 However, when sourcing an existing script that does not use exception handling | |
| 8349 commands (or when calling one of its functions) from inside an active try | |
| 8350 conditional of a new script, you might change the control flow of the existing | |
| 8351 script on error. You get the immediate abortion on error and can catch the | |
| 8352 error in the new script. If however the sourced script suppresses error | |
| 8353 messages by using the ":silent!" command (checking for errors by testing | |
| 1621 | 8354 |v:errmsg| if appropriate), its execution path is not changed. The error is |
| 8355 not converted to an exception. (See |:silent|.) So the only remaining cause | |
| 7 | 8356 where this happens is for scripts that don't care about errors and produce |
| 8357 error messages. You probably won't want to use such code from your new | |
| 8358 scripts. | |
| 8359 | |
| 8360 *except-syntax-err* | |
| 8361 Syntax errors in the exception handling commands are never caught by any of | |
| 8362 the ":catch" commands of the try conditional they belong to. Its finally | |
| 8363 clauses, however, is executed. | |
| 8364 Example: > | |
| 8365 | |
| 8366 :try | |
| 8367 : try | |
| 8368 : throw 4711 | |
| 8369 : catch /\(/ | |
| 8370 : echo "in catch with syntax error" | |
| 8371 : catch | |
| 8372 : echo "inner catch-all" | |
| 8373 : finally | |
| 8374 : echo "inner finally" | |
| 8375 : endtry | |
| 8376 :catch | |
| 8377 : echo 'outer catch-all caught "' . v:exception . '"' | |
| 8378 : finally | |
| 8379 : echo "outer finally" | |
| 8380 :endtry | |
| 8381 | |
| 8382 This displays: > | |
| 8383 inner finally | |
| 8384 outer catch-all caught "Vim(catch):E54: Unmatched \(" | |
| 8385 outer finally | |
| 8386 The original exception is discarded and an error exception is raised, instead. | |
| 8387 | |
| 8388 *except-single-line* | |
| 8389 The ":try", ":catch", ":finally", and ":endtry" commands can be put on | |
| 8390 a single line, but then syntax errors may make it difficult to recognize the | |
| 8391 "catch" line, thus you better avoid this. | |
| 8392 Example: > | |
| 8393 :try | unlet! foo # | catch | endtry | |
| 8394 raises an error exception for the trailing characters after the ":unlet!" | |
| 8395 argument, but does not see the ":catch" and ":endtry" commands, so that the | |
| 8396 error exception is discarded and the "E488: Trailing characters" message gets | |
| 8397 displayed. | |
| 8398 | |
| 8399 *except-several-errors* | |
| 8400 When several errors appear in a single command, the first error message is | |
| 8401 usually the most specific one and therefor converted to the error exception. | |
| 8402 Example: > | |
| 8403 echo novar | |
| 8404 causes > | |
| 8405 E121: Undefined variable: novar | |
| 8406 E15: Invalid expression: novar | |
| 8407 The value of the error exception inside try conditionals is: > | |
| 8408 Vim(echo):E121: Undefined variable: novar | |
| 8409 < *except-syntax-error* | |
| 8410 But when a syntax error is detected after a normal error in the same command, | |
| 8411 the syntax error is used for the exception being thrown. | |
| 8412 Example: > | |
| 8413 unlet novar # | |
| 8414 causes > | |
| 8415 E108: No such variable: "novar" | |
| 8416 E488: Trailing characters | |
| 8417 The value of the error exception inside try conditionals is: > | |
| 8418 Vim(unlet):E488: Trailing characters | |
| 8419 This is done because the syntax error might change the execution path in a way | |
| 8420 not intended by the user. Example: > | |
| 8421 try | |
| 8422 try | unlet novar # | catch | echo v:exception | endtry | |
| 8423 catch /.*/ | |
| 8424 echo "outer catch:" v:exception | |
| 8425 endtry | |
| 8426 This displays "outer catch: Vim(unlet):E488: Trailing characters", and then | |
| 8427 a "E600: Missing :endtry" error message is given, see |except-single-line|. | |
| 8428 | |
| 8429 ============================================================================== | |
| 8430 9. Examples *eval-examples* | |
| 8431 | |
| 1156 | 8432 Printing in Binary ~ |
| 7 | 8433 > |
|
2033
de5a43c5eedc
Update documentation files.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@zimbu.org>
parents:
1998
diff
changeset
|
8434 :" The function Nr2Bin() returns the binary string representation of a number. |
| 1156 | 8435 :func Nr2Bin(nr) |
| 7 | 8436 : let n = a:nr |
| 8437 : let r = "" | |
| 8438 : while n | |
| 1156 | 8439 : let r = '01'[n % 2] . r |
| 8440 : let n = n / 2 | |
| 7 | 8441 : endwhile |
| 8442 : return r | |
| 8443 :endfunc | |
| 8444 | |
| 1156 | 8445 :" The function String2Bin() converts each character in a string to a |
| 8446 :" binary string, separated with dashes. | |
| 8447 :func String2Bin(str) | |
| 7 | 8448 : let out = '' |
| 1156 | 8449 : for ix in range(strlen(a:str)) |
| 8450 : let out = out . '-' . Nr2Bin(char2nr(a:str[ix])) | |
| 8451 : endfor | |
| 8452 : return out[1:] | |
| 7 | 8453 :endfunc |
| 8454 | |
| 8455 Example of its use: > | |
| 1156 | 8456 :echo Nr2Bin(32) |
| 8457 result: "100000" > | |
| 8458 :echo String2Bin("32") | |
| 8459 result: "110011-110010" | |
| 8460 | |
| 8461 | |
| 8462 Sorting lines ~ | |
| 8463 | |
| 8464 This example sorts lines with a specific compare function. > | |
| 8465 | |
| 8466 :func SortBuffer() | |
| 8467 : let lines = getline(1, '$') | |
| 8468 : call sort(lines, function("Strcmp")) | |
| 8469 : call setline(1, lines) | |
| 7 | 8470 :endfunction |
| 8471 | |
| 1156 | 8472 As a one-liner: > |
| 8473 :call setline(1, sort(getline(1, '$'), function("Strcmp"))) | |
| 8474 | |
| 8475 | |
| 8476 scanf() replacement ~ | |
| 7 | 8477 *sscanf* |
| 8478 There is no sscanf() function in Vim. If you need to extract parts from a | |
| 8479 line, you can use matchstr() and substitute() to do it. This example shows | |
| 8480 how to get the file name, line number and column number out of a line like | |
| 8481 "foobar.txt, 123, 45". > | |
| 8482 :" Set up the match bit | |
| 8483 :let mx='\(\f\+\),\s*\(\d\+\),\s*\(\d\+\)' | |
| 8484 :"get the part matching the whole expression | |
| 8485 :let l = matchstr(line, mx) | |
| 8486 :"get each item out of the match | |
| 8487 :let file = substitute(l, mx, '\1', '') | |
| 8488 :let lnum = substitute(l, mx, '\2', '') | |
| 8489 :let col = substitute(l, mx, '\3', '') | |
| 8490 | |
| 8491 The input is in the variable "line", the results in the variables "file", | |
| 8492 "lnum" and "col". (idea from Michael Geddes) | |
| 8493 | |
| 1156 | 8494 |
| 8495 getting the scriptnames in a Dictionary ~ | |
| 8496 *scriptnames-dictionary* | |
| 8497 The |:scriptnames| command can be used to get a list of all script files that | |
| 8498 have been sourced. There is no equivalent function or variable for this | |
| 8499 (because it's rarely needed). In case you need to manipulate the list this | |
| 8500 code can be used: > | |
| 8501 " Get the output of ":scriptnames" in the scriptnames_output variable. | |
| 8502 let scriptnames_output = '' | |
| 8503 redir => scriptnames_output | |
| 8504 silent scriptnames | |
| 8505 redir END | |
| 8506 | |
| 1621 | 8507 " Split the output into lines and parse each line. Add an entry to the |
| 1156 | 8508 " "scripts" dictionary. |
| 8509 let scripts = {} | |
| 8510 for line in split(scriptnames_output, "\n") | |
| 8511 " Only do non-blank lines. | |
| 8512 if line =~ '\S' | |
| 8513 " Get the first number in the line. | |
| 1621 | 8514 let nr = matchstr(line, '\d\+') |
| 1156 | 8515 " Get the file name, remove the script number " 123: ". |
| 1621 | 8516 let name = substitute(line, '.\+:\s*', '', '') |
| 1156 | 8517 " Add an item to the Dictionary |
| 1621 | 8518 let scripts[nr] = name |
| 1156 | 8519 endif |
| 8520 endfor | |
| 8521 unlet scriptnames_output | |
| 8522 | |
| 7 | 8523 ============================================================================== |
| 8524 10. No +eval feature *no-eval-feature* | |
| 8525 | |
| 8526 When the |+eval| feature was disabled at compile time, none of the expression | |
| 8527 evaluation commands are available. To prevent this from causing Vim scripts | |
| 8528 to generate all kinds of errors, the ":if" and ":endif" commands are still | |
| 8529 recognized, though the argument of the ":if" and everything between the ":if" | |
| 8530 and the matching ":endif" is ignored. Nesting of ":if" blocks is allowed, but | |
| 8531 only if the commands are at the start of the line. The ":else" command is not | |
| 8532 recognized. | |
| 8533 | |
| 8534 Example of how to avoid executing commands when the |+eval| feature is | |
| 8535 missing: > | |
| 8536 | |
| 8537 :if 1 | |
| 8538 : echo "Expression evaluation is compiled in" | |
| 8539 :else | |
| 8540 : echo "You will _never_ see this message" | |
| 8541 :endif | |
| 8542 | |
| 8543 ============================================================================== | |
| 8544 11. The sandbox *eval-sandbox* *sandbox* *E48* | |
| 8545 | |
|
2350
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
8546 The 'foldexpr', 'formatexpr', 'includeexpr', 'indentexpr', 'statusline' and |
|
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
8547 'foldtext' options may be evaluated in a sandbox. This means that you are |
|
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
8548 protected from these expressions having nasty side effects. This gives some |
|
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
8549 safety for when these options are set from a modeline. It is also used when |
|
06feaf4fe36a
Rename some "python3" symbols to "py3", as the command name.
Bram Moolenaar <bram@vim.org>
parents:
2345
diff
changeset
|
8550 the command from a tags file is executed and for CTRL-R = in the command line. |
| 29 | 8551 The sandbox is also used for the |:sandbox| command. |
| 7 | 8552 |
| 8553 These items are not allowed in the sandbox: | |
| 8554 - changing the buffer text | |
| 8555 - defining or changing mapping, autocommands, functions, user commands | |
| 8556 - setting certain options (see |option-summary|) | |
| 1156 | 8557 - setting certain v: variables (see |v:var|) *E794* |
| 7 | 8558 - executing a shell command |
| 8559 - reading or writing a file | |
| 8560 - jumping to another buffer or editing a file | |
| 625 | 8561 - executing Python, Perl, etc. commands |
| 29 | 8562 This is not guaranteed 100% secure, but it should block most attacks. |
| 8563 | |
| 8564 *:san* *:sandbox* | |
| 401 | 8565 :san[dbox] {cmd} Execute {cmd} in the sandbox. Useful to evaluate an |
| 29 | 8566 option that may have been set from a modeline, e.g. |
| 8567 'foldexpr'. | |
| 8568 | |
| 634 | 8569 *sandbox-option* |
| 8570 A few options contain an expression. When this expression is evaluated it may | |
| 790 | 8571 have to be done in the sandbox to avoid a security risk. But the sandbox is |
| 634 | 8572 restrictive, thus this only happens when the option was set from an insecure |
| 8573 location. Insecure in this context are: | |
| 843 | 8574 - sourcing a .vimrc or .exrc in the current directory |
| 634 | 8575 - while executing in the sandbox |
| 8576 - value coming from a modeline | |
| 8577 | |
| 8578 Note that when in the sandbox and saving an option value and restoring it, the | |
| 8579 option will still be marked as it was set in the sandbox. | |
| 8580 | |
| 8581 ============================================================================== | |
| 8582 12. Textlock *textlock* | |
| 8583 | |
| 8584 In a few situations it is not allowed to change the text in the buffer, jump | |
| 8585 to another window and some other things that might confuse or break what Vim | |
| 8586 is currently doing. This mostly applies to things that happen when Vim is | |
| 1621 | 8587 actually doing something else. For example, evaluating the 'balloonexpr' may |
| 634 | 8588 happen any moment the mouse cursor is resting at some position. |
| 8589 | |
| 8590 This is not allowed when the textlock is active: | |
| 8591 - changing the buffer text | |
| 8592 - jumping to another buffer or window | |
| 8593 - editing another file | |
| 8594 - closing a window or quitting Vim | |
| 8595 - etc. | |
| 8596 | |
| 7 | 8597 |
| 8598 vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl: |